The Final Chapter - Hamilton Miller

TWELFTH CYCLE
B S i§ a
I HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND ® I
L L thoughts are visitors
That to the palace come
W hen bidden by the king,
A n d fro m the palace go
In to the outer world
W hen they are ordered so.
O T until the exercises of the Eleventh Cycle have

been perfectly mastered should the work now ahead
be given thought and practice. W e descend into deep
waters as we progress. It has been our wish and
purpose to make this course o f training the m ost im
portant and the most valuable ever put forth by us, and we feel
sure that the m agnitude o f the undertaking has been fu lly appreci
ated and realized as each cycle has been unfolded. I f we were
lacking in our feelings of awe and weight of grandeur which im
press us when in the presence o f nature’ s sublime laws, we would
be unable to im part the true worth of these lessons to our students.
Devitalization has two great division s:
1. Eem oving affirmative life from the body.
2. E em oving consciousness from the physical mind.
A ll the statements that are included in the last cycle should be
read and re-read at least ten times in order to fill your thoughts
with the great im portance o f these two steps. D o not try to seek
entertainm ent by their perusal. Study and go deeply into the matter.
There are things that w ill escape you on the first reading, and
other things which the second reading w ill, even i f thorough, not
disclose; and so on fo r many reviews. The philosophy is so deep
and so fu ll o f weight that it has been very difficult to present it
in a readable form . It is intended fo r study, fo r contemplation
and fo r lon g periods o f w orking out in the trains o f thought that
should arise.
HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND
When you are perfectly fam iliar with the instruction o f that cycle,
then turn to the pages n ow ahead and make up your m ind that you
will become their master as well.
These exercises do not require continual perform ance or practice
after they have once been acquired.
The exercises o f the last cycle need n ot be pursued wlien they have
been learn ed ; they are stepping stones; and you do not take stepping
stones w ith you on your journey. B u t they must be mastered to
begin with, and must n ot be left behind as lon g as they are im perfect.
T h e same rule holds true in this cycle. W hen you are able to
send the consciousness o f the w orking m ind away fo r a definite
period, always to be determined by you in advance, then you will
have n o need of the stepping stones o f practice in this cycle.
I f a person who worries were able to empty the m ind, the w orrying
would cease at once. But, n ot know ing how to do this, they go on
and suffer.
I f a person who keeps up all sorts of useless m ental ac
tion, although n ot in the way o f worry, were able to em pty the m ind
he would not lie awake hours at a tim e in the night and lose
valuable sleep, causing a weakness o f health, m ind and nervous
system.
I f a person who wished to concentrate his thoughts upon some
enterprise when in fa ct they scattered in all directions and pre
vented him from m aking progress in his work, knew how to empty
his m ind, he could secure the attention at w ill on any subject or
line o f thought and thus avert the trouble.
I f a person who wished to do the work o f a genius and knew
that he must side-track his everyday, conscious m ind and tap the
Other M in d fo r inspiring help, was fam iliar with a way to empty
the form er, he could easily pass into the realm of the latter. Every
man and woman o f intelligence has thoughts and ideas that at times
almost knock fo r admission, but that stay outside fo r want o f a
way to enter.
A s in the case o f physical devitalization, so in mental devitalization,
there are other uses fo r the results o f the practice than those specif
ically sought in this study. T here are times in the life o f every
person wlien it is absolutely necessary to empty the m in d ; and the
inability to do so leads to disaster or a great deal o f troub)a, whicSi
m ight have been averted.
T he em ptying o f the m ind is the taking out o f it the thinking
OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND
processes that are goin g on th ere; in other words, it is the ability

to stop thinking.
H ow is this to be done ?
A n d what relation has it to the study o f telepathy?
T he preceding cycles w ill answer the latter question; and this
cycle w ill answer the form er. H ow is the m ind to be made to stop
th in k in g? T he hypnotist tells his subject to relax the body and to
think o f nothing. H e means to not think of anything. It is
quite probable that, in trying to think of nothing, the subject gets
to w ondering what that mental condition is, and so his m ind is
abstracted.
B ut this would happen by mere accident. A sure and accurate
method is needed, and the follow in g is presented as su ch ; there
being two parts to the process.
fir s t p a rt : le a r n in g how .
secon d p a rt: h a b itu a l u ses.
In learning how to abstract the m ind the m ost favorable times

and conditions should be sought in the beginning. W hen once there
has been success, it is easier to repeat i t ; and each repetition makes
every subsequent step still easier. Therefore, as the steps become
easier, the conditions should be made harder; and as the steps
are harder as at the beginning, the conditions should be easier.
By and by, when the most difficult conditions can be overcome, then
abstraction of m ind w ill be employed by you in delving into the
m inds of others and taking their thoughts from th em ; or in catching
knowledge of events and purposes at any distance. These are the
definite goals o f this work.
The easiest conditions are as follow s:
1. When goin g to sleep at night.
2. When the body is devitalized.
3. When there is fresh, outdoor air in the room.
A ll three o f these conditions should be united at the same time
in the early experiments. The object is to make the first steps easy
and to win victory.
As there must be purpose in everything, the first purpose to have
in this trial is to fa ll quickly into a. profound, natural slumber.
Y ou w ill say, perhaps, that you do that at all times. Then so m uch
the better; fo r the second stage of the trials w ill be brought to
you that m uch sooner. B ut ninety-five out o f every hundred o f the
I
HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND ^

intelligent, thinking people, do not fa ll asleep as soon as they go
to bed.
One o f the favoring conditions is the admission o f pure outdoor
air. This sim ply serves to bring good oxygen to the lungs. Some
persons are hypnotized by close, warm, bad air, which serves to
make them drow sy; but it is the purpose o f this method to abandon
the im pure agencies that prey on the m ind and nerves, and adopt
the conditions that build up a clear m ind and wholesome nervous
state.
T he air must not blow on you. L et it be adm itted from some
other room , if possible. Otherwise, let it come in at the top of
some distant window. A void draughts. In case your room is small
and the n igh t is cold , shut up the room and open the window at
top and bottom , for a half-hour before you retire. H ave the tem
perature below sixty-five, unless the room is d am p ; then seventy
is right. Just as you come into the room to undress, close the
w indow ; and, as you get into bed, open it one inch at the top.
This presumes that your sleeping room is quite small. A chilling
draught w ill cause neuralgia. I f the room is larger, have it quite
cool when you retire; but n ot under sixty, nor over sixty-five degrees
in w in ter; and the best temperature you can find in summer. A
south room is the best every night o f the year in which to sleep;
it is more moderate in winter and the best aired in summer, for
all the heat-producing winds com e from the south, and they should
have free sweep in order to carry off the irritating warmth, like
a fan on a hot afternoon.
A s soon as you get into bed, arrange your thoughts so that you
can place your whole m ind on the one subject o f devitalizing your
whole body. T hink o f it as being deprived fo r the tim e of all
affirmative life, under the process o f the preceding cycle.
Then take all affirmative life out o f the neck, the shoulders, the
anns, wrists, hands and fingers, by special attention to them. I f
you have been faith fu l in the last cycle, all you need do in this to
devitalize is to think of the fact.
There w ill n ot be the slightest trouble in controlling every part
o f the body by the m ind i f you have once mastered the exercises
that have been given.
The next and last step in these easy conditions is to empty the
mind. This is an intricate process and will be given fu ll description
at this place, as it stands as one of the greatest achievements of
OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND
the hum an m in d in the present era. I t is possible fo r every man

and woman to learn how to do it.
There are three parts to this practice, and they are as fo llo w s:
1. Sedative breathing.
2. C ontrolling the sleep-nerves.
3. Thought-Placem ent.
Sedative breathing is n ot hard to lea rn ; but m ay have to be
preceded by development o f the range of respiration. T he require
ments are as fo llo w s :
1. A n in -goin g breath that must reach deep down into the lungs.
2. A n out-going breath must empty the lungs.
3. B reathing must be silent.
4. B reathing m ust be smooth.
5. B reathing must be gentle.
6. B reathing must be very slow.
H ere are six requirements fo r sedative breathing. T his kind of
respiration used to be employed generations ago in the art o f in du c
in g sleep; but alone it is not enough in this age o f hurry and
nerve-racking effort.
The m ind w ill help you w onderfully to send every in -goin g breath
to the very lowest depths o f the lungs. It is one of the m ost bene
ficial of all exercises, and w ill well repay any trouble and time that
may be required to develop it.
Y o u may learn how to empty the lungs, which are in the vital
zone, by chest contraction, which is to crush in the chest fram e from
side to side and from the top to the lower part, with the aid o f the
hands, during an out-going breath. Squeeze the air out of all parts
o f the lungs by pressure on the outside; but while the breath is on
the way out.
The next precaution is to cultivate silent respiration. D o not
allow the slightest sound to be heard in the nose or th roa t; fo r it
would mean friction and lack o f smoothness. This must not be
forgotten, nor must the habits be careless after the lapse o f time.
Some persons learn a thing, adopt it fo r a while, then gradually
slip backward and are n ot conscious o f the fa ct that they are in the
old ruts again. Silent respiration is a good habit fo r all purposes,
regardless of this study.
The breathing must be smooth.
T h is means that the flow o f air should not be jerky, nor halting
in its course in or out o f the lungs. One o f the best ways o f m aking
smooth respiration is to lift the hand to a height w ith the mouth,

point the index finger outward, then begin to inhale while describing
a straight horizontal line in fron t o f the body, passing fro m one
side to the other. T he flow o f air w ill be ju st as smooth as the
movement o f the finger if the breathing occurs w ith the action o f
the hand. Both must go together.
In passing across the fro n t of the body from its starting point to
its end, the finger must not tremble, nor the hand or arm be jerky
or halting. Several trials at a tim e may be necessary to accom plish
this. Bepeat for the in -going breath as well as fo r the out-going
breath, u ntil the smoothness is a habit.
The breathing must be gentle.
This is n ot difficult i f the preceding requirements have been
mastered.
The breathing must be very slow.
This is controlled by the movement of the index finger as ju st
described; fo r each breath should be continued w ithout halting as
lon g as the finger moves. The latter has about fou r or five feet
o f distance to traverse in one direction, providing it begins fa r out
to one side of the body, and it could be a minute in reaching the
end o f that direction i f so desired. I t w ill control the breath in
any event. I f it is slow, the latter w ill be slow also.
T o sum up in one sentence every in -g oin g and ou t-going breath
must be silent, smooth, gentle and slow.
This part of the w ork should be learned at odd intervals during
the d a y ; and it need not intrude on other duties, as it may be done
while m any other things are being accomplished, except as to the
m otion of the hand.
T he development o f these special powers w ill depend on the tim e
devoted to practice, and the faithfulness with which the exercises are
put into execution. B ut when they are fu lly developed, then m uch
has been gained for the health o f the m ind, the body and the nerves,
as well as fo r telepathy.
A ll the foregoing is called sedative breathing, because it tends
to so tax the nervous system that the flow of erratic currents is
drawn away from the b ra in ; ju st as a ligh t lunch o f the plainest
food w ill, at bedtime, by calling the nervous activities fro m the
brain to the stomach, release the m ind from its acute thoughts and
bring on sleep.
T h is bedtime lunch is recomm ended to those o f our students who
OPERATIONS OF THE OTIIER MIND
are troubled with sleeplessness. The best light lunch is a bowl of

very hot clear beef soup, called bouillon.
The next step is called controlling the sleep-nerves.
The sleep-nerves come to the term inals in the lower h a lf o f each
hand, and are guides to the th ird and fou rth fingers. W hen you
devitalize the little finger, in case you are able to do it perfectly,
the nerves that close down the thought centers of the brain are
connected w ith ; and when the third finger, next to the little finger,
is also devitalized, this effect is increased. Therefore the double
devitalization is o f great im portance in this work. The method
of doing this is as fo llo w s :
W hile ly in g down, as in bed or on a couch, lift both arms a few
inches from the side, ju st so they w ill be free from all support
from the shoulders to the fingers. The purpose o f this is to put
the vital life in the arm, and make the contrast all the more decided
by taking it out of the two fingers.
Raise the third and fourth fingers on each hand, as high as it can
be done w ithout m oving the arms from their p osition ; but do not
raise the hands. Let there be no hin gin g action at the wrist, the
elbow or the shoulders. M erely raise the two fingers on each hand,
and then cu t off the vitality at the ends o f those two fingers and
allow them to fa ll o f their own weight like two lim p strings, the
life all gone out.
W hile doin g this, devitalize all the body, except the arms.
W hen the latter are thoroughly wearied by rem aining slightly
elevated, devitalize them a few times.
Then let them remain lying at the side o f the body, and continue
devitalizing the third and fou rth fingers o f the two hands, the
fingers being raised so as to clear the clothing.
The last step in this part is to put the two hands over the stomach
and take the tw o fingers o f the left hand, the little finger and that
next to it, on the tips o f the fingers o f the right hand, raise them
and let them fa ll o f their own weight devitalized, and so continue
at this until sleep comes.
I t is easy to learn to devitalize these two fingers if you go at
it properly. A n y child can do it, and we have seen hundreds of
children practice it perfectly. B u t grown people, who think that
any downward m otion o f the finger is devitalization, w ill not make
m uch progress until they are able to know wlien the finger is falling
by its own weight, and when it is being sent down by its muscles.
W e have seen hundreds o f men and wom en claim they have mastered
this art, and yet use the muscles to drop the finger. They simply
raise and lower it, which does no earthly good. It is a pure waste
of time.
Failure then must be traced back to this inability to recognize the
difference between the fallin g of the finger by its own weight and
the sending it down by aid of the muscles.
Are you able to see the difference?
I f you are, you w ill then be able to recognize the action o f devitali
zation when once you have acquired it.
In adopting this practice on fa llin g asleep at night, you are to
be sure that the whole body is devitalized and is very lim p. L et it
lie on the bed as flabby as you can.
The final and greatest step in em ptying the m ind is a mental
process known as
Tliought-Placem ent.
This is seemingly an intricate stu d y; but its difficulties are in
the first division. The second is merely a habit. These two divi
sions are:
1. The Science o f Thought-Placem ent.
2. The A rt of Thought-Placem ent.
As it is purely a mental process it is based upon an imaginary
arrangement o f the conscious m ind. In order to assist in building
the sections of the m ind, the accom panying diagram must be referred
to and its parts mem orized so that it w ill be seen w ith the eyes
shut.
P L O T O P T H O U G H T -P L A C E M E N T S .
D A Y ’ S Y E A R ’ S PAST
E V E N T S E V E NT T S E V E N T S
A DEEP, DAEK, BLACK
CAVERN
O P A B S O L U T E N O T H IN G N E S S
There are fo u r sections to the thinking brain, and they are to

be used in their order as shown on the plot. T he first section is
that which holds the thoughts closest at hand, and they are naturally
the ones that w ill cause w orry and w akefulness; fo r the m in d does
not trouble itself m uch with the dead past. I t is the livin g ideas
that bother.
T h e second section includes the year’ s events; and they are to be
those happenings that have occurred in the far part o f the year,
not nearest at hand.
The th ird section excludes to-day and this year o f twelve fu ll
months, and has to do w ith the past.
In m aking use o f the three top sections, go backward from the
nearest end to the farthest end o f each part.
Thus, in thinking o f the day’ s events, take the five principal
matters that have occurred on the day preceding the evening when
you are placing your thoughts. I n placing the year’s events take the
five principal events of the past twelve months, getting as fa r away
from to-day as possible. In placing the past events, think o f the
five principal events of your younger years, g oin g as far back as
you can.
Select the pleasantest transactions which you can recall.
Strike out all matters that cause sadness or regret.
Compel the m ind to go backward through the events in the order
o f their happening. I f you shift the order it w ill defeat this
practice.
It is not necessary to repeat the same events every tim e you pu t
this mental action into practice. B ut each evening you must not
introduce more than the required num ber o f events and they should
be the same five in each period, or section; m aking fifteen events
every evening. The principal events may be groped fo r in the
m ind, and this m ethod is helpful. G roping is done by n ot know ing
what five events you w ill take up fo r the day, but letting them
flow into the m ind as they w ill, and then taking the leading five
o f the day. This may be done also fo r the year’ s events w hich com e
n e x t; and then fo r the past events.
D o not begin with the past events first, or you w ill set the m ind
goin g in the w ron g direction. B y this time you w ill discern what
is intended by the m ental exercise called Thought-Placem ent. It
is to cause the thoughts to vanish. T hey are goin g backward to
the evanescent period o f life , fro m which point the m ind w ill leap
into oblivion. The sensation soon becomes like that o f a fa ll in a

dream.
They start with the day that has ju st closed, when the m ind is
most distinct, and the activities o f the brain more intensified. They
start even that way with the nearest event, the transaction closest
to evening, and go back to those farthest from evening in the day’s
history. Be sure o f the order o f action. D o not skip about. Go
back steadily towards m orning in the order o f time. Then do the
same in the years’ events; preserving the chronological order from
the nearest to the farth est; but excluding those o f the same day.
Then in the past events, exclude those o f the year, and go back
in the exact order of happenings clear to youth, taking in the
first love affair if it is not attended with sadness.
The day’s events w ill vanish toward’ s m o rn in g ; the year’ s events
will vanish towards the twelfth m onth b a ck ; and the past events
w ill vanish towards the dawn o f life.
B y this tim e you must drop the m ind into oblivion.
Close your eyes and think o f the three upper sections o f your
mind. T hink of them as being in the fron t o f your head, and
located in three parts in the upper portion o f your skull. K eep
your eyes closed and let the thought fix itself that there are two
stories of your m ind, as in a house; and that the upper story has
three com partm ents; while, underneath, the cellar includes the w in-
dowless, darkened chamber that extends from right to left and from
near to far, throughout the whole domain o f your brain.
T his under-vault is a
DEEP— DARK— BLACK

CAVERN
OP A B S O L U T E N O T H IN G N E S S
Keep the eyes closed, and see this dark, empty vault in the under
story o f your m ind. See it as in fron t of your thoughts, and make
yourself believe that when your thoughts enter that cavern they
are at once swamped by the blackness o f utter oblivion. See the
fou r upper sections, while yet your eyes are closed. See the Tunning
action of your thoughts from the first section o f the day’s events
back through the m iddle section o f the year’ s events to the past era
from which everything vanishes in to total darkness. This is a
steady step backwards.
The exercise is wholesome fo r the m ind and the nerves.
B y this practice we have recently saved several persons, three

wom en and two men, from, the insane asylum. They were subject
to hallucinations which would become violent in character when
night approached and especially when they went to bed. They said
their minds were fu ll of devils and bad thoughts and evil designs.
One m an, who had been in business and had made his fortune, asked
to be sent to a place o f detainment where he could not get out
as he felt the mania fo r hom icide com ing on. H e, as well as the
others, fou n d a complete cure in the practice o f this cycle.
The hallucinations were all driven out o f the m ind by the power
o f devitalization o f both m ind and body, and especially by the
culture o f Thought-Placem ent. It is the opinion o f experts to-day
that they are permanently cured.
Others have tried this method, who needed it fo r the cure o f
insomnia, and all report that the results were the m ost marvelous
they ever conceived.
The way to use T hought-Placem ent is to take up the review of
events at the tim e when the devitalizing of the fingers has almost
ceased.
The m ind is to select its events fo r the day and review them
backw ard; then fo r the year and review them backw ard; then for
the past life and review them backw ard; and as the last event, the
fifteenth, is reached and reviewed, the m ind is to look in to the lower
cavern, deep, dark, black, and fu ll of absolute nothingness. I t is
to look there and stay looking there, hunting fo r som ething to see
and finding nothing but total blackness.
There it m ust stay.
T his is called the fu ll round o f thinking. Out o f one hundred
persons who tried this, after they had mastered all the preliminary
details, ninety-eight succeeded on the first trial. The other two had
been careless in learning to devitalize, and did not succeed until
they had made amends fo r their neglect.
One woman says in her rep ort: “ I have tried fo r years to find
some way o f p u tting m yself to sleep. I think a lo t and have a
large property that keeps me fussed. I took your private course
in T hought-Placem ent in connection w ith devitalization; and I
have now the m ost perfect control o f m y m ind day and night. This
to me is worth no end o f money. I would n ot take a hundred
thousand dollars fo r what I have learned from this one method
alone.”
Six years ago, follow in g a plan that we have always used o f

testing our exercises and methods fo r a lon g tim e before we place
them before the public, the work o f this and the preceding cycle
was given to three hundred of our private students, o f whom more
than half were men o f success in the world, and over a hundred
were women of high social rank. These classes were selected as
being the most difficult to cure of their nervous troubles. Every
one of the three hundred succeeded in securing all the results they
sought.
T w o years ago this work was given to seventy-two men, all o f
them well educated, several being professors in well-known univer
sities, and twenty-six o f them physicians. They were directed to
em ploy this practice fo r the purpose o f training the m ind to take
on unconsciousness at w ill; in other words, to side-track the working
m ind and open up the Other M ind. They persisted and never lost
their interest. The more they practiced the work, the m ore they
desired to continue it.
H aving proved their ability to do this much, which is the first
step in the work ahead, they were given the further test o f em ploy
in g the method for the purpose of m aking their minds susceptible to
the thoughts of other persons.
The ultimate end o f this study and practice is to acquire the
ability to receive and to translate the thoughts o f others, and the
transactions o f life o f which we can know nothing by the usual
channels o f com m unication.
This is called telepathy.
In order to accomplish so great an end, it is necessary to show
the character and nature o f telepathy by tracing it to its hypnotic
relationship, from which only can a clear knowledge o f this power
be gathered. B oth processes are the same, but take different turns
in com ing to their usefulness. The great objection to hypnotism
is the control which it puts in the care of one person over oth ers;
and the inability o f the subject to participate in the knowledge that
is acquired of thoughts and events.
F or purposes of telepathy, what is the good o f being hypnotized,
if you are to know nothing o f what your m ind receives in that
state ? It is true that many persons who have been put in to induced
sleep are able to receive and to transmit to others the facts, events
and plans of other places and persons; and sometimes they are made
to write them down, as well as speak th e m ; but this is only a very
poor form o f telepathy, and it has no practical uses. I t is also

true that there are a few genuine trance mediums who have exactly
the same powers, but no good is brought to the world or to any
practical lin e o f usefulness by these so-called gifts. I t is also true
that there are persons who, in sleep or otherwise, receive in form a
tion o f things that com e through channels not ord in ary; but no
good is derived from such methods.
B efore this w ork is closed we shall show that telepathy has a
com m on, everyday, practical side, and can be made very useful as
it has been fo r centuries when in the employ o f persons who know
how to direct its activities.
T he trouble with hypnotism is that it puts the conscious m ind
to sleep, and then there is no knowledge o f the inform ation that is
brought in by the Other M ind. In the other phases o f the same
principle, the same trouble exists.
The question has been asked by the ablest investigators o f the
w orld, Is it possible to have the conscious m ind and the Other M ind
both present at the same tim e ? I f this can be done, then the flood
gates o f knowledge w ill be opened and there would be no opportunity
fo r the conscious m ind to do its work with relation to the physical
body. I t is, as you know, the w orking m ind, and it m ust do the
work o f thinking for, planning fo r, and providing fo r the body and
all its wants. I f it were to be bothered eternally with the knowledge
that is held shut up in the Other M ind, it would not be able to de
vote one m inute’ s attention to the duties o f life. I t would know so
m uch that there would be no desire to attend to those du ties; fo r
every man and wom an n ot held in leash by the power o f self-
restraint w ould want to depart this life in order to enter upon the
things that are now close at hand. T oo m uch knowledge is h u rtfu l;
and it is a wise Providence that has built a wall between the two
m inds, so that the duties o f earth m ay be given due thought and
attention. T he ability to bring both minds upon the same arena
at the same tim e would change the alm ost impassable barrier that
separates them, and instead of a solid wall there would be only a
sieve through which all knowledge would leak all the tim e. This
w ould be a most disastrous state o f affairs fo r life on earth.
Is it possible to have the conscious m ind and the Other M ind
both present at the same tim e ?
No.
B ut it is possible to have them present in quick succession, and
ROW TO EMPTY TEE MIND m
by this means to secure some o f the knowledge that is always crow d
ing the Other M ind. This has been done countless m illions of
times, ever since hum anity came upon this orb. It has been done
with you, and with every one of your frie n d s; fo r there is no livin g
human being who has not had flashes 01 the thoughts from other
people, and flashes of events, not only near at hand, but from great
distances. It is a com m on experience. Everybody knows of i t ;
but, until very recently, no one ever knew in what way it occurred.
Starting with the general proposition, which is a proved fact,
that the two minds cannot be present at the same tim e ; and then
passing on to the next proved fact that thoughts and events are
flashed in to your m ind from your Other M in d ; the task was set before
investigators to ascertain in what way these seemingly contradictory
things could actually happen.
T he way has been discovered, and the secret is out.
B y the never-failing analysis of life, we discovered more than
twenty years before it was invented, the action of the x -ra y ; ancl
our works, copyrighted and on file fo r years in advance, are p roof o f
that fact. B y the same analysis, we discovered long years in ad
vance, the principle of wireless telegraphy, which fact m ay be proved
by reference to copyrighted and filed books. It is im portant to
know that there is a way of securing the great secrets locked up
in the bosom of nature.
N ow for the first tim e we present to the world a new secret, and
it is to be called the “ T U R N IN G P O I N T S ” in the action o f think
ing, because no better name is at hand.
The next cycle will be devoted to this new process; new, not in
nature, but in the discussion o f life, and the teachings o f great
principles. A s a means at this tim e o f preparing fo r it, the student
should review this and the two preceding cycles, and should then
seek to make him self fam iliar with the dark, black cavern o f the
w orking m ind. L ook at the diagram already referred to herein.
Then, closing the eyes, look into your own dome o f thought, and
there make yourself see the presence o f the three upper sections on
the higher tier and the lower section beneath those three. Y ou
m ust SEE that dark section mentally and see it quickly at will.
In attem pting to do this, always throw the m ind quickly through
the three ideas o f to-day, last year, and the p ast; and then bring
it into the cavern of nothingness. This action m ay require five
seconds fo r a begin n er; but it is done in one-tenth o f a second by
any person who has practiced it often. I t is known as the fa d in g

m in d ; touching to-day, passing into the last year, skim m ing over the
surface o f lon g ago, and brin gin g up in the abyss o f no-thought. I t
is all a natural process, and is easily learned. B ut it must follow
the night practice in order to be adopted readily in this form .
The science o f T hought-Placem ent has been taught in this cycle
and some o f the art. I t properly is the attendant o f a devitalizing
b o d y ; but, as this cannot be done in the activities o f life w ith other
people about you, the only devitalization that is useful is a gentle
relaxing of the body, such as is asked by the hypnotist when he
stands you up with your arms outstretched. Some relaxing is al
ways possible while stan din g; but it should be slight and never
enough to attract attention from others.
T he eyeballs themselves, when rolled u p under closed lids, are
always relaxed. This can be done when you close your eyes, fo r
then no one can see the eyeballs. A slight lessening o f the muscles
of the neck, of the shoulders, o f the arms and especially o f the
fingers w ill n ot be noticed. I t must all be done so quickly that it
is over with before one can think what to d o ; therefore a fixed habit
should be acquired by m uch previous practice. The best fu n da
mental preparation is to be had in the cycle that teaches the de
vitalization o f the body.
Let that be thoroughly reviewed.
In the com ing pages, where this study goes into greater depths,
the term, “ empty the m ind,” w ill be used in place o f T hought-
Placem ent, as the latter is a developing practice, which cannot be
carried along through the practical application o f the principles in
volved.
The hypnotic side o f the study w ill not be dropped, as that too
has served as a stepping stone fo r the understanding and culture
o f the art o f telepathy. H ypnotism contains the best fo r m o f illus
tration fo r this science o f telepathy; and now we seek the practice
of this power. The desirable thing to accomplish is the close com
in g together o f the two m inds. A s it is agreed that one must give
way to the other, the only course left is to bring the two as closely
together as possible, and that is the work o f the com ing cycles.
T o empty the mind, it is necessary to send the thoughts to no-
man’ s-land, which is the cavern at the base o f the mental dome.
The foundation o f success in this effort must be laid in the last
cycle and in this cycle, com bining the instruction o f the two.
THIRTEENTH CYCLE
D E A S proceed in train,
B elayed from p oin t to point,
Or else like broken streams
T h ey leap from place to place
A n d passage give to all
W ho venture at their hanks.
E E 'P E R A N D D E E P E R we plunge into the profound

principles of nature, seeking light in the darkness
where discovery has never before taken its way. B y
many thousands o f experiments, all brought close home
to the central life o f man, the truth at last was
found. T w o great facts, and well substantiated facts, stared us in
the face all the while, and it seemed m ore than tantalizing to be
able to recognize the facts and n ot ascertain the crucial cause o f
the difficulty.
1. I t was everywhere apparent that the conscious m ind was re
ceiving knowledge from the Other M ind.
2. I t was clearly proved that both these minds cou ld be present
at the same time.
H ow could it happen that thoughts could come in to the con
scious m ind, when there was a wall between the two that seemed
impenetrable ?
It was to discover the cause o f this phenomenon that countless
thousands o f experiments have been made fo r years. Ordinary sleep
side-tracks the conscious m ind, and then there com e sometimes,
though n ot often, w onderful revelations, w onderful warnings, wonder
fu l floods o f knowledge, w onderful discoveries; all in dreams that
have no value except as they can be remembered.
So deep are these dreams that the most reliable o f them are born
in the Sixth Degree, corresponding somewhat to the same degree
in hypnotic sleep. B u t that degree is so vague, so evanescent, that
its freight cannot he carried over into the conscious m ind unless the
dreamer is able to wake up and note down in w riting the details.
L et him wait till m orning and the vague m em ory has all vanished.
The dreams that can be m ost daily recalled are worthless, as they
are born in the conscious m ind or in some o f the m ixed degrees.
T he comm onest o f all experiences are the introductions o f ideas that
are com ing into the conscious m ind, and are recognized, but that are
not known to have come from the Other M ind. Y o u m ay have a
large num ber o f thoughts enter your m ind and not realize that m any
o f them are transfers from the minds o f other persons. There is no
way that you can know that fa ct u ntil someone m entions the very
idea that has ju st come in to your m ind and you say, “ I believe I
got that idea fr o m you.” It is o f course surprising that some other
person should speak aloud the very thought that has been fo r a minute
or more fillin g your m ind. Y e t this thing is happening every day
and coantless times. There is no doubt about it, and every livin g
being knows it is a com m on experience.
Then we come back to the old inquiry, H ow can the Other M ind
transfer its knowledge to the conscious m ind when the two cannot
come on the arena together?
B y a lon g line o f proofs secured through man}1' years, we have
fou n d the follow in g great laws everywhere sustained:
1. T he conscious m ind is the working m ind charged to manage
and p erform the duties that arise from physical existence; and it is
active on ly when the body is awake. W hen the body sleeps the physi
cal m ind, otherwise called the conscious m ind, is asleep also.
2. The Other M ind never sleeps when the conscious m ind sleeps.
A s the inflow o f knowledge o f all that other people think and do
w ould prevent the conscious m ind from perform in g its physical duties,
a wise Creator has ordained that such knowledge shall n ot be in
truded on the w orking intelligence o f physical life.
3. B ut as some men and women are given greater work to do in
this w orld than others about them, and as help fro m the general
source o f all-knowledge is needed at times to enable them to per
form the greater tasks that are imposed upon them, an all-wise
Creator has made it possible fo r every person o f earnest am bition and
willingness to do the greater w ork o f life, to obtain glimpses of the
fu n d o f all-knowledge.
4. These glimpses cannot com e when the conscious m ind is a lert;
and i f they com e when the conscious m ind is asleep they w ill be
THE TURNING POINTS
lost fo r lack o f means to transfer them to the fields o f human use

fu ln ess; therefore the power to abstract the conscious m ind fo r a
brief period of time is given to every person.
5. This power to abstract the conscious m in d can be employed
only at one phase of th ou ght; and that is what is known as the
turning point, which is the space in which the m ind passes from one
idea to another or from one state to another.
This is the discovery.
The turning poin t is the only opportunity fo r the m ind to be
empty and it occurs naturally and w ithout study or effort when the
thought is being shifted from one idea to another. N othin g is more
im portant than this discovery. The interval of tim e between the
ending of one thought and the beginning o f another is often so
short that it has no appreciable part o f a second; yet it can be
measured.
In the interval the thought ceases altogether because the subject
about which it has busied itself has en ded; and another idea is
then taken up, or else the m ind goes to sleep, or is held in a lapse.
T he latter is a dangerous condition and is treated in the m ost ad
vanced training of magnetism, known as Universal Magnetism. A
lapse is a continued no-m an’ s-land o f the mind.
This interval occurs when a person is goin g to sleep at night,
but it is o f m uch shorter duration than is supposed. A ll dream
processes are exceedingly short. A s an example o f this fact, a
man dreamed that he had gone to a city to meet another man on a
certain corner, and that he waited there fo r six hours by the clock,
all the while seeing m any people pass and many incidents occur,
after which he awoke and ascertained that he had been asleep ju st
two minutes. There are thousands o f similar cases o f dreams occupy
in g a seem ingly lon g space of tim e that in fact are enacted in a
m inute or less.
F rom this and other facts it is probable that the Other M ind
knows no passing o f time, and that an eternity m ight be reeled off
in a brief period if measured by physical time.
There is a special value attaching to this law o f absence of time
when the Other M ind is in co n tro l; fo r it w ill explain some o f the
lon g episodes o f knowledge that have been transferred to the con
scious m ind in the briefest possible interval.
The space of tim e in which the m ind is empty occurs at the exact
instant when the thoughts s h ift; but w ill not occur in a train o f
thought. The latter carries the m ind along without break. I t often
ends in strange reminiscences.
The interval is encouraged when there is an end of thinking o f
one idea and the passing to some idea that is not connected. The
train o f thought follow s from one idea to another that is the ou t
growth o f the first. The few examples below will explain what is
meant by the train o f th o u g h t:
1. M y tooth aches.
2. This means that I must go to the dentist.
3. The dentist has his office next door to the theatre.
4. I have not been to the theatre this year and I want to go when
a good play comes along.
5. The last play I saw was a good one and Mansfield was the star.
6. P oor Mansfield is dead n o w ; he died of hardening o f the liver.
7. They say that the liver hardens when one eats too much, or
drinks too m uch alcohol. B ut there may be other causes.
8. Mansfield was not a heavy eater, but I never heard about his
habits of drinking.
9. This moral awakening about drinking is the surprise o f the pres
ent age. N o one seems to account fo r it, except that a new genera
tion is grow ing up, whose predecessors left too long a trail o f murders
from the liquor habit to be forgotten by the children.
10. This shows what great results m ight be obtained i f all the
children were given proper training on the moral questions o f the
day.
I t is a fa r cry from the toothache to the philosophy o f training
the rising generation; but the train is connected all along the way,
and there is not an interval. Consequently the m ind has no oppor
tunity to go to “ no-m an’ s-land” during this series o f ideas.
T he follow in g is an example o f a run o f thoughts not one o f
which has any relationship to the other before or after i t :
1. The heat is very uncom fortable to-day.
2. I wonder what tim e they w ill have dinner.
3. H ere is a button off m y coat.
4. I saw Jones yesterday and he was pretty well tanned by his
summer vacation.
These ideas could go on indefinitely in this way. B ut most people
think along trains o f connected th ou ghts; sometimes starting with
an occurrence ju st at hand and follow in g through many changes by
coherence until they arrive at surprisingly distant themes. This is
T E E TURNING POINTS
called a wandering of the mind in a normal way. The disconnected

line of thinking is known as “ scattered thoughts/’ and is still nor
mal. Y ou can force the mind to adopt either process at will.
It is only by the scattered thoughts that you make intervals. In
the exercises of the preceding cycle the five events of the day, the
five of the year and the five of the long past were fifteen scattered
thoughts, the purpose plainly being to make fourteen intervals,
although no use was made of these; but the dumping of the mind
into “ no-man’ s-land” was making it enter an interval after it had
traveled a highway of intervals. It was building up a process that
would tend to make the mind easy to send to a blank condition.
This was aided by devitalization.
A person who is fainting will devitalize, and here an interval oc
curs in the mind.
A person who is falling asleep will devitalize, and here an interval
takes place.
A person who devitalizes at the time his mind enters the emptied
condition, is in the same state as those just referred to.
It is in the interval that hypnotic suggestions are made, for the
hypnotic sleep is one long interval in which the mind is empty, or in
“ no-man’s-land.”
Natural sleep is an interval in which suggestions may be made;
and where they will not awaken the patient, to catch him just as the
mind is entering the interval will make the strongest impression.
Children are given many suggestions at such a time, and the results
are remarkable.
It is in the interval during full consciousness that the telepathic
communication flashes into the mind. There is no hypnosis, no
falling asleep, no loss of memory or thought, but just the interstice
in which the telepathy occurs.
One of the first proofs of this wonderful fact came about after
hard searching, and as follow s:
In a house of ten rooms there were twenty people sitting in a half
light, two in a room, and all doors open. They were close together,
and talked in subdued tones. They had all mastered the art of
devitalizing in the finest degree. They leaned back in their chairs
and were resting, so as not to accidently vitalize any part of the body.
While sitting in this way, it was agreed that they should speak to
each other with pauses of about a minute and remarks of less than
a minute, and on any subject they chose. I f any one had in mind
prior to utterance by another o f an idea that was spoken, it was to be

put down as the work of telepathy.
This was one of our telepathic clubs organized fo r purposes o f
experim enting. The club m et two evenings in each week. A t the
stage o f the investigation when the foregoing trials were being made,
the purpose that was being kept in m ind was to ascertain, if possible,
under what circumstances thoughts passed from one m ind to an
other. A s soon as there was such a transfer, the remarks ju st pre
ceding and at the tim e were written down fo r future examination.
The members were not told to confine their talks to trains o f thoughts,
o t to scattered thoughts, but to go on talking as they pleased at this
stage.
Here axe some o f the transfers made b y the several couples, as far
as they had such results to report:
1. Mr. A . was speaking o f an article on a message to Congress
that had appeared in the evening paper. M r. B. suddenly asked,
“ B y the way, has the President sent any further message to Con
gress?” T his was regarded as a case o f transfer o f thought, despite
the fact that such messages were com m on at the time.
Later on in the same evening Mr. B., in the room with A ., was
thinking of Peary and his pending trip to the far N orth, when B.
asked, “ I wonder where Peary is at this very mom ent, and if he is all
right ?” Ow ing to the circumstances, there could be no doubt that
it was a clear case of telepathy.
In another room Mr. G. was thinking o f some friends in Chicago,
Mr. H . said, “ I have not been to Chicago fo r two years.” This also
was a clear case o f telepathy.
In a m onth this club had reported fifty-nine cases o f this power
o f thought transference; some o f them rather intricate in that there
were groups of ideas and in one instance a problem o f some difficulty
was taken up as in a flash and solved.
But the m ain purpose was not to merely find instances o f telepathy,
but to ascertain at what junctures in the conversation they occu rred ;
and there was a remarkable sim ilarity o f experiences in which a com
plete shifting o f the thought brought the transfer by the wireless
route, which is a popular name fo r telepathy.
Here we received the first inkling o f the existence of the interval
in which the conscious m ind empties itself lon g enough to receive
the knowledge that is flashed into it from some other person by
the channel of the Other M ind. Over and over again the tests were
THE TURNING POINTS
made, and many other meetings held until no longer any doubt
existed.
The law was found.
It was a great discovery; and, in the light o f many thousands o f
experiments now in vogue, it w ill lead to a new philosophy, fo r it is
the key that unlocks the universe.
The interval occurs at the turning poin t in one’ s thoughts.
T he turning point is the shifting from one idea to another that
has no connection with it. It is turning between two different
thoughts.
In order to make your m ind receptive, you must find the in terva l;
and in order to find the interval you must make a turning p oin t in
your thoughts. In so doing you are coin cidin g with every natural
process in life that brings on the phenom enon o f telepathy. Y o u
are coin cidin g with all the work o f the past in the realms o f this
science, and in all the habits o f hum anity fro m the beginning of
time.
B efore we go deeper, let the definitions be fixed in your m in d :
D E F IN I T IO N S .
F ir s t.— The interval is the empty condition o f the mind.

S econd.— The turning point is the change from one thought to
another thought in no way like it.
The turning point makes the interval.
In the interval there is n o thinking at a ll; and it is then that
the unconscious m ind is out of the way, even i f fo r only a short
time. T o the Other M ind tim e is as nothing and as eternity com
bined. Years o f the past are lived over again by the drowning man
in two or three seconds. H ours are made to drag slowly along in
a dream that lasts for less than two minutes.
I t makes no difference how lon g or how short may be the in terval;
for in it the Other M ind is supreme. The shorter the interval, the
more power the conscious m ind has over the presence o f the Other
M ind, and the easier it w ill be to catch the knowledge that comes
at such a space. In this way we see the same absence of the con
scious m ind as in telepathy through hypnotism , and suggestion under
all conditions.
There are only two things to do to be able to know all there is
to know in earth and heaven:
1. T o side-track the conscious m ind.
2. T o bring the Other M ind upon the arena in such a manner

that its presence w ill be recognized by the conscious mind.
It is like the serf and the king. The serf had a parlor in his
house, and the king wanted to use it but wished to be alone. As
both serf and k in g could not use the parlor at the same time, the
serf withdrew until the king had com e and gone. Then the serf
came back and said to h im s e lf: “ The king has been here. H e was
talking to him self. I f I could translate the silences of this room I
could know the secrets o f State.”
H ad the serf been present at the same tim e with the k in g and
could have heard him talking to him self o f the m ighty matters o f
State, he would have received the knowledge direct. B ut he was
com pelled to remain outside while the king was inside. So with
the two minds. Nature, fo r the reasons described in previous pages,
cannot have the w orking m ind weighted down with the knowledge of
the universe, and she deprives it of the boundless sweep o f fact and
thought all about i t ; except that, when the king has been in and is
m aking his exit still talking, it may be possible for the serf to
hear a few o f the last words.
A n d this is enough.
I t explains why one m ind catches glimpses of another m ind. A nd
it is in the interval when the king is allowed to enter, that the flash
of a thought comes in. Y e t there are many cases where longer in
tervals have brought longer deliveries of knowledge as we shall see
as we proceed. Here we are discussing the simple flashes of ideas
from one m ind to another.
H aving discovered the interval and fou n d that it occurs as the
result o f an empty m ind in the turning point o f thought, the next
step was to confirm the discovery in all the episodes o f life where
such phenom enon may arise. M any other experiments were made
and the same law held true. There was the interval always appear
ing at the tu rn in g point.
It was so in general life. I t was so when some man suddenly made
a mistake that cost him loss. It was so when consent was given that
should have been withheld. It was so when a subtle influence was
exerted over one who was thought capable of taking care o f herself.
In the turning point there come every day the many suggestions
from the minds and wills of others ; and, as in everything else, he who
is strongest, wins the most. It is human nature. It is the law of
life.
THE TURNING POINTS
A ll the mistakes o f earthly ventures have been made in that turning

point. A ll the victories o f magnetism are so made. H e who has the
greater m agnetic power has always the greatest advantage to give
or to receive. M agnetism is a double action. It has both the posi
tive and the negative currents. One drives away, the other brings in.
Thus we see that the turning point m ay have two processes:
1. In that interval the thoughts and purposes o f others and the
knowledge o f events may be taken in.
2. In that interval the commands and demands o f others m ay be
forced in.
W hoever has the interval is sure to have the in -com in g cu rren t;
and what that in-com ing current shall be is the matter to be left
to the magnetism o f the possessor or o f others.
These facts, although o f recent discovery, coincide with all that is
known o f magnetism and with the thousand varied vicissitudes o f
hypnotism and all its attendant train o f circumstances. B ein g im
bued with the im portance o f this discovery over and above all other
laws o f human life, we have pushed with the utm ost vigor all the
tests and experiments that are possible, and many new and startling
coincidences have been ascertained.
It has been fou n d that all the visions, the apparitions, the so-
called ghosts, and other phenomena occur in the interval alluded to,
and last no longer. W hen the conditions are favorable the m ind is in
the interval, and w ill take in the message from the Other M ind. Be
in g only an interval, the conscious m ind is able to grasp it as there
is the closest possible connection between the two m inds at that
time. Books could be written o f the many experiences that have
been based on this one little, apparently insignificant fact.
The deep dreams, as has been said, are those that occur in deep
sleep. Sometimes the ideas that com e then are grand and worthy
o f fu ll attention on w a k in g; but many such a dream has never been
remembered on awakening. In a few instances in a person’ s life,
dreams o f vast m om ent come, and they are follow ed by wakefulness.
Y o u have had such, but not many. Y o u have waked up in the night
and realized the greatness o f the dream, then fallen asleep again.
W hen m orning came you have recalled the fa ct that you have dreamed,
and there lingers a half m em ory o f what it was about; but its details
and chief point have vanished. B y the tim e you have dressed and
gone down stairs, all parts o f the dream have gone fo rev e r; and you
retain the m em ory of the fa ct that you did dream, but no more.
This is the experience of countless thousands of people.

One o f the forem ost inventors, seeking to secure the salient point
in the w orking of a new machine, fell asleep all worn out. In his
dream the solution o f his invention came to him , and in the jo y of
his discovery he awoke. H e saw every detail p e rfectly ; and resolved
to put it in w riting on getting up the next m orning, as he was so
tired that he could not attend to it at the mom ent. So off he went
to sleep again, and woke up refreshed the next m orning. On goin g
to his desk to record the discovery he fou n d his mem ory o f it so faded
that he could not give a definite account of any part o f it. In an
other hour the faded portion had all vanished, and nothing lived
in his m ind except the knowledge that he had dreamed and made
the discovery o f which he had been robbed by his conscious m ind.
In the case o f another inventor who fell asleep in the m iddle of
the forenoon at his desk, and who had a dream in which a most
im portant fact came to him to assist in com pleting an invention
which w ould have been worth m illions to him , he was awakened by
the entrance to his room o f a woman who was begging. H e at
tended to her wants and then went to his paper to note down what he
had learned in his dream ; but, to his horror, he fou n d the idea was
fast fading. H e jotted down a few words, and all had gone. It was
too late.
There is no inventor of any success in the world who does not
have paper and pencil with him night and day. I f an idea comes to
him, no matter where he is, he writes it down then and there. One
man was at dinner in the W hite House, and surprised the other guests
by this same a c t ; and made the explanation that, if he did not
note down the idea then, it would be gone and lost. The affair was
looked upon as a good bit of pleasantry, and was excused by the
President.
The geniuses o f the world are those who have been quick to take
advantage of this closeness of the two minds. It seems that the
com ing o f the Other M ind is like the com ing o f an ech o; we catch the
fading o f the fact rather than the fa ct itself.
Y o u have many times when busy had a remark addressed to you
which you have not heard, although its sound has reached your ears.
B ut if some one says that you did not hear because you were inatten
tive, you may be able to retrace from out the echo-land of your
m ind the last few words that were spoken, and so make reply to
the charge o f not hearing.
TEE TURNING POINTS
A teacher was explaining some rather dull matters to the class,

and one o f the boys spent the tim e in drawing pictures on a piece o f
paper which he held under his desk, out o f sight. The teacher, sus
pecting that something was distracting his attention, s a id : “ Brown,
you are n ot listening. W hat did I say last?” The boy, at the
sound of his name, knew what was com ing, and his m ind caught the
echo of the very last statement the teacher had made, and he re
peated it to her. H a d she made some intervening remark o f no
consequence, and then asked what she had ju st been saying before
that, the inattentive boy would have been caught. Or had she
asked him to repeat what she had said prior to her last remark,
he could not have done it. She had very little knowledge of human
nature, and so could not rise to a high rank as a teacher.
The case will serve as an example o f the echo in the m ind o f the
last words a person speaks, when absolutely no attention has been
paid to what was being said. I t is n ot half-attention, or part-
attention, but an echo in the mind. This is proved by m any tests
where men were given hard problems in mathematics that required
their whole attention even to exhausting all extraneous th ou g h ts; and
they were occasionally asked what some one said who was talking
in a low voice some distance away. They could always repeat the
last words, and some o f them could recall the last fifteen or more
words, although not one could tell what had preceded the last part
o f the remarks. H ad they divided their attention they could have
told what had been said throughout the whole time, or from point to
point in it. When, after a delay lon g enough to let the echo fade
from the m ind, they were asked what was said, n ot one could re
call a thing.
W e have seen school girls talking in groups in an undertone while
some subject was being discussed; and on being charged with in
attention, they could recall the last few words o f the instructor.
They knew this fact, as they made a boast o f it. One o f them said,
“ I can talk all the tim e the lecturer is talking, and I w ill not hear
a word or know what he is saying, but if anyone asks me what was last
said I can always tell, as the words seem to be in m y m ind then.
They soon go, though, and I have to be asked soon or they fade away.”
This is a com m on experience and is cited here to show what is
meant by the lin gerin g echo in the m ind. Y o u m ay be intensely
interested in what you are doing while someone is ta lk in g ; and, two
minutes after the last remark just before an interruption, you
could not recall a single word u ttered ; but, i f asked at once, you
could repeat half a dozen or more of the words.
The conscious m ind holds the echo of the words from another
m ind, and it w ill fix them only when an attempt is made to do
so w ithout delay.
In a dream the Other M ind m ay im part something of the greatest
valu e; and the deeper the sleep is, the more valuable is the sugges
tion that comes from the Other M ind, but the more speedily it w ill
vanish. In order to secure it, you must write down the details as soon
as you first awaken, fo r the fa d in g echo is slipping out of the con
scious m ind.
The quickness with which the im pression fades is the remarkable
part o f it.
These two tests are open to every student of this work.
I f you dream, note the character of the dream. I f it hasvalue
to you, not as a warning or other emotional affair, but as an inspira
tion to some duty, some discovery, some invention, some idea for
business, or in your profession, or otherwise, you can measure the
depth of the sleep out of which it was born by that value. A n d this
will show you how speedily it w ill fade when you awake unless you
hold to it by w riting it down. These three characteristics should not
be forg otten :
1. The sleep is profound.
2. The dream will hold matters o f value.
3. The dream w ill vanish on awakening.
In another com bination we have these three characteristics:
1. The sleep is ordinary.
2. The dream w ill be ordinary.
3. The dream w ill not vanish im mediately on awakening.
Then there are these three characteristics:
1. The sleep is very light.
2. The dream is valueless and generally fantastic, or rough, or
o f the nightm are order.
3. The dream will not vanish at all, but w ill stay with you longer
than you have any use fo r its memory.
In this latter com bination come the many things that frighten
people and make them study dream books fo r interpretations or
what m ay be ascribed to a bad diet.
Then there is the final com bination of characteristics:
1. The sleep is very deep and profound.
THE TURNING POINTS
2. The Other M ind is in fu ll control all the time, and its knowl
edge is so valuable that, if it could be obtained, it would open the
doors to the whole universe.
3. T he dream will not be echoed in the conscious m ind at all, and
so w ill not involve the question o f fading, fo r the Other M ind has
such complete and absolute possession that there is no opportunity
fo r the conscious m ind to enter the arena. But, as has happened
in some cases, if a sudden alarm should awaken the sleeper, there
w ould be some echo in the wakened conscious m ind of the presence
o f the Other M ind. T h is would begin to vanish at once. A case
has come to our positive knowledge o f a man who, after w orking fo r
tw enty-two consecutive hours on hard m ental labors, fell asleep in
his chair, and the sleep was so sound that shaking would not
awaken him. H e was let alone fo r three more hours, and it was
now fu ll daylight. A man being close by noticed the movement
of his hand towards his pen. A half glass o f very cold water was
thrown into his face over the eyes, and he awoke in less than a
second. H e grasped the pen and wrote down a series of discon
nected w o rd s; then added more words to these as he repeated them,
until he had secured the idea.
“ I have struggled ten years fo r that one idea,” he said, “ and it
is worth more to me than all the rest o f m y life.” A fter events proved
the truth of the remark.
These grades of sleep are im portant in their relation to the grades
o f presence o f the Other M ind. The latter is probably always fu lly
present when the conscious m ind is fu lly away.
B y referring back to the degrees o f hypnotism it w ill be seen that
the Sixth Degree is unm ixed, the patient having no m em ory o f what
occurred in i t ; while the F ifth Degree was like a dream that was
hazy and vague. The other degrees were more m ixed as they came
to the First which was a grade of control where there was fu ll con
sciousness. This m ixin g is not to im ply the presence at the same
tim e of both m inds, but the exchange o f intervals.
In the First Degree o f hypnotism , the conscious m ind is always
there, but as the suggestions and ideas change, the Other M ind
enters at the intervals, and always at the turning points in the use of
ideas.
In the Second Degree the intervals are more frequent, and this
kind of m ixin g occurs up to the final degree, when the depths o f the
control is like a deep sleep such as we have just described.
OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MINIt
In the Sixth Degree it is proved that the Other M ind is always

and fu lly present and in complete co n tro l; and this has led to a
higher line o f study as is stated in the F irst Cycle. There is positive
proof o f the fu ll presence o f the Other M ind in that degree; and there
are many reasons fo r believing, and some fo r knowing, that the OtheT
M ind is likewise fu lly present in the deepest natural sleep.
The Sixth Degree has been tapped and the Other M ind found
there.
The deepest natural sleep has been tapped and the Other M ind
fou n d there.
The Sixth Degree and natural sleep are both prolonged intervals.
It w ill later on be seen that intervals are o f all lengths in the
duration o f tim e ; and yet, on the other hand, they m ay furnish
an immense outpouring o f knowledge from the Other M ind in a very
brief second.
The shortest and the most im portant fo r practical everyday pur
poses are those intervals that occur in a run o f scattered thoughts
whether spoken or merely allowed to range through the m ind.
I t must n ot be forgotten that the length o f the interval m ay be o f
no consequence, as the Other M ind knows nothing o f time. I f
years of one’s past life can be reviewed in a few seconds, and lon g
transactions be experienced over again in minute detail in that
brief span, it would make no difference how short the interval is as
far as its usefulness may be concerned.
In a train o f thought one idea leads to the other and an interval
is not possible there. B ut in scattered thoughts, one idea must com e
to an end, and another idea be taken up, and it is a physical im
possibility fo r this to be done w ithout some interval in which the
m ind is in “ no-m an’s-land,” or the deep, dark cavern shown in
our diagram in the cycle preceding this.
It is like putting something out of your hand and taking up
something different in the same hand. One must be dropped before
the other can be grasped. iSTo m atter how quickly you drop one and
take u p the next one, there is some space o f tim e between. B ut i f a
stream o f water, or sand, or separate articles in succession are run
n in g through the hand, that is a train of thought in comparison, and
no interval need occur.
M ost o f our students w ill put into actual practice all the teach
ings set forth in this work, and to those who decide to do this we
wish to urge the necessity o f thoroughly mastering each cycle as you
I
THE TURNING POINTS
proceed. There is m uch in every one o f them to do, and they should
be studied lon g enough lo r the science laid down to be understood
and then the art taken up.
In this line o f practice, no progress w ill be possible i f the fu ll de
velopm ent o f devitalization is not insisted upon.
A fter that, the m ind should be trained by self-practice to recog
nize the follow in g activities:
1. Y o u m ust learn to know in a flash when your own m ind is
thinking in a train o f thought.
2. A lso when you r m ind is thinking in scattered thoughts.
3. W hen you are speaking to other persons in a train o f thought.
4. W hen you are speaking to other persons in scattered thoughts.
5. W hen others are speaking in a train of thought.
6. When others are speaking in scattered thoughts.
There is not one step in this w ork that is difficult. I t is all easy
and even fascinating. I t soon becomes satisfying, and you w ill
en joy follow in g out these details. Y o u w ill analyze m en and women
by a habit. I t is vastly to your advantage to not make these facts
known, as they place other people in the rank o f unnecessary com pe
tition to yourself, and to your loss.
The m ost gratifyin g thing about this procedure is the readiness
with which the m ind w ill take up the habit o f analyzing your own
thoughts and those o f others. I t w ill be like the errors o f grammar.
I f you are acquainted with the rules o f speech and break them, then
learn that you must watch your conversation and detect your own
errors', you w ill in an incredibly short tim e acquire the habit, and
you w ill know in the instant when you make an error o f speech; and
a little later you w ill know when you are goin g to make an error.
This same law o f the m ind holds true, even with greater force, in
recognizing how you are thinking, how you are speaking, and how
other persons are speaking; whether in trains of ideas or in scattered
thoughts.
In a short tim e you w ill involuntarily, which means by sheer force
of habit, take in this recognition like a flash, and then you will be
the master o f others about you. N~o man or woman can shape your
thoughts or exert an influence over them. On the contrary you w ill
be in a position to achieve two great en d s:
1. Y o u w ill direct the m inds o f others.
2. Y o u will be able to know the m inds o f others even when they
are seeking to keep them from you.
FOURTEENTH CYCLE
PITFALLS OF THE MIND
O T O N L Y in the fields
A n d on the highways hide
The pitfalls fo r our feet,
B u t in the mind as well
T hey lurlc and bide their time
T o catch us unawares.
A V IN G conclusive proofs o f the occurrence of the in

terval in the operations o f thinking, and that the inter
val happens when there conies a turning point in the
line o f thought, due to scattered thinking, it would
seem that the wise man and woman w ill look out fo r the
pitfalls known as w andering ideas, fo r these lead to an abundance of
other pitfalls. Y e t there are two sides to this question:
1. B y using the intervals under control it is possible to seize the
thoughts o f other persons.
2. B y perm itting the intervals to come involuntarily, the m ind is
always approaching pitfalls that cause the many troubles o f life.
It w ill now be supposed that you have carefully studied and prac
ticed all that has gone before in the course o f training, and that
you are able to recognize by habit, rather than by attention, every
series o f ideas that come to your mind.
A re they trains o f thought?
Or are they scattered ideas?
The latter are usually wandering and serve n o useful purpose
unless you are m aking intervals voluntarily. Scattered thoughts
are in three classes:
1. Those that come to you by your own aimlessness.
2. Those that other persons thrust upon you either by design or
by accident.
3. Those that you yourself make in order to receive the thoughts
o f others. These are always held in leash and may easily be swung
back into trains.
The first class leads to all sorts o f ends. As a rule the train is
made weaker, and the power o f reasoning is lessened. T he law o f
cause and effect is laid aside. Y e t it must be said that, in the m o
ments and often the wasted hours o f dreamers, inventions, dis
coveries and inspiration have flashed in to the m ind. B ut it does so
in about one case in a m illion. T he boy or girl who is allowed to
entertain w andering thoughts w ill follow the bent o f almost any
influence, be it good or bad. L et us look in to some o f these
instances.
A m other is at work. In the next room her daughter is doing
nothing. The mother suspects that this is the case and asks:
“ What are you d o in g ?”
“ N othing.”
“ W hy do you not p la y ?”
“ I am tired o f play.”
“ W h y do you not do your lessons ?”
“ I am tired o f lessons.”
“ Then why do you not sleep fo r aw hile?”
“ I did. I am tired o f sleep."
I t was at this point that the m other's care was needed, fo r the child
was sure to take a w rong turn in the activities o f the m ind. The
world is so constituted that evil is fa r more attractive than good.
It is possible to be good, but, as the old saying goes, you cannot
have such a nice time. V ice is below, and goodness above the aver
age walks of li f e ; and the m ind, like anything else, left to itself,
follow s the law o f gravity.
1. Scattered thoughts tend downward,
2. Trains of thought tend upward.
3. I t is when trains o f thought becom e partly scattered that they
tend backward.
4. T o guard against the dangers o f wandering thoughts every
boy and girl, every man and woman in middle or adult life, and
every old person should have a fixed daily goal and a fixed life goal.
I t is quite true that these things are n ot adopted even to a slight
extent by the average p e o p le ; but a very few have done so, and with
the m ost remarkable results.
W here there is a goal ahead, the thoughts, when left free, always
turn toward it. This is a m ost w onderful law. I t has been taught
in some o f our earlier works, but not as a system ; and, where it has
been adopted, it has seemed to bear out the very ancient saying that
what a person resolves to do in this world, no matter how difficult, will
come to pass. N oted cases were cited o f such successes against all
od d s; and they served to inspire some of our students to make the
trial. B ut they did n ot have the anchorage to persist, and this is
the way one, whose views seemed to stand fo r all those who failed,
put the m a tter: “ It is all right to say that a person will accomplish
in life whatever the m ind is made up to d o ; but a person cannot go
about all day resolving to do some particular thing, fo r he w ould have
his attention distracted from his daily duties.”
Such a course would be the supplanting o f the required attention
o f each day with a mere dream. The lad who made up his m ind
to become a great banker, but d id n ot let the thought of it interfere
w ith his studies; yet, whenever his time was free or he had nothing
else to ponder over, he reverted to that subject, and it kept him from
w andering thoughts. I t is like an elastic band which, no matter how
far it may be stretched, returns to its base when free.
There is nothing so dreary, and so dangerous at the same time,
as the em pty m ind, whether it conies empty in brief intervals of scat
tered thinking, or in lapses which are prolonged. I f you have a
goal fo r the day, there will be the constant rebound to that g o a l; o r if
fo r life, then in the deeper trend o f the m ind, hovering over you as a
lifted guide to light the way. I f you have no goal o f any kind, then
each interval is a restless void in which you lon g fo r something
to do to pass away the hours. Y o u are dull and all about you is
dull, and you seek diversion. The m onotony o f it is awful. T he
cry o f the nerves is fo r something to do, to be goin g on, or a means
o f entertainm ent and excitement. The busy m ind is never alone. I t
knows nothing of the dragging hours. L ook out on the street at
night and see the thousands of people filin g in the theatre to be
given some diversion that w ill help to kill time. T o the gallery
are going a stream o f young m en earning eight dollars a week and
m ore, who w ill never be worth m ore than they are paid, and who
find the day dull and the night a bore unless they can be amused
and excited. They would scorn a book and an hour a day o f read
in g and study, because it is tiresome and they do not need it
to get along in the world. In the m ain body o f the house are many
persons who have been bored by the m onotony of life and who fly out
to be amused. They have funds fo r one night a week, which they
PITFALLS OF TEE MIND
really cannot spare; and the other six nights the man is at home
reading the penny paper through and through, and his w ife lolls over
her novel which she secured in a library. B oth these humans need
more knowledge than they possess. I f the woman were to prepare
herself fo r a high salaried position in case she is suddenly thrown on
her resources, she would be a nobler type of life and have an invest
ment that could not be stolen from her possession. I f the man were
to get some real, genuine grammar in his head, and a knowledge
o f rhetoric which he regards as slush, and a more accurate idea o f
English, as well as other accomplishments, he m ight rise in his
position. As it is he is paid more than he is worth no matter what
his wages are. H e may be in the em ploym ent of the government or
in some office where he is vastly overpaid; and there he w ill decay.
The world is fu ll o f such people. N o goal fo r the day. N o goal for
life. A dream o f something wholly out o f their atmosphere. A
circle o f cigar smoke, and that’s com fort, while the feet are being
toasted by the fire which they owe the coal dealer for. The w orld is
filled to the brim with young men, young women, grown-up, and
mature folks, who sneer at progress, at better brains, at getting ready
for a higher rank in the w o rld ; and who w ill waste their golden
hours when opportunity is rich in promise and lounge away their
prospects. Y o u cannot change them. T heir minds run in down
grade thoughts, and will so run until they ask aid from, the public
charities or end their lives as thousand like them are doing every
year.
B ut there are some men and women who have ambitions to get
on in the world, and who grasp at suggestions that will help them.
T hey are quick to see the power of a natural law and to take advan
tage o f it. I t is to them we are speaking. I f you should be one o f
the com m on run o f people and have the self-force to rise out o f your
self, you may avoid this pitfall.
Y ou r life should have its one great goal toward which you stead
fastly steer; and your day should have its smaller goal. Then you
cannot be unhappy, and you will n ot be restless. Tim e wfill not have
to be killed. A nd , better than all, your thoughts, when they cease
to run in trains, w ill always rebound to the light o f something that
is w aiting to receive their attention. It is ju st as if a man had a
home and in the home a w ife and with the w ife a c h ild ; and when
duty released him from its daily chains, he looked over to that home
and hastened to be greeted there. H ow lonely is that other kind o f
OPERATIONS OF TEE OTEER MIND
man who has no m agnet in a home to attract him to its d o o r s ! A nd

how lonely is that individual whose thoughts, when they com e to
waiting places, find on ly the vacancy o f “ no-m an’s-land I”
Great men walk by pitfalls and not a few o f them drop in.
W hen a man has the m ental acumen to bu ild up a colossal fortune,
it would seem that he ought to have enough good sense to look after
him self in other ways. B ut as soon as his goal, wealth, has been
reached, he has exhausted his ambition, and the intervals then are
filled not by a rebounding hope o f higher ends in life, but by tempta
tions from the weaker sex. One o f the m erchant princes o f the west,
after amassing a giant fortune, having had the blessings o f a w ife and
being, n ot alone but m erely wifeless, thought it a wise move to wed
again. ISTo old man has the vitality to endure late wedlock. P hysi
cians who knew o f this case, said it was su icide; and the result was
that a man who ought to have had twenty years before him , died in a
few months. H is case is only one of thousands ju st like it.
The woman is always the active party when a m illionaire old man
is led into m arriage. She has laid her plans well. She knows how to
take advantage o f his friendship. W hen once, in that fatal interval o f
the m ind that comes to all who are not on their guard, she has caused
him to com m it him self, then he, as a man o f honor, a gallant, cannot
take a backward step. I t is all over so far as his independence is
concerned.
“ I have com m itted m yself, and cannot now withdraw,” is the
constant excuse.
Y es, but it was in the m ind’s interval that you com m itted you r
self. T hat interval was a p itfa ll and you entered it. I t is far better
to turn back dishonorably than to go on dishonorably. M any a man
has been caught in an interval and w ill not hedge. H e lets a bad
beginning make a worse end. H e promised, to get rid of a man, to
endorse his n o te ; and, as he prom ised, he cannot now back o u t ; and
so he puts his name to a piece o f paper that causes him later on
to pay five thousand dollars, and the home that he had built about the
heads o f his w ife and children has to go. W h y ? Because this man,
in an interval o f thought, Avas caught and gave his w ord which he did
not wish to break ; so he broke up his home.
This is the most com m on p itfa ll that awaits the steps o f well-
m eaning men and women.
Here is how it works.
A m an who was really an accomplished and a very m agnetic beg
gar, approached a man o f wealth, and tried to interest him in some

enterprise that he him self had n o interest i n ; and, when he had
aroused a vivid degree of attention in what seemed a grand oppor
tunity to make m oney, the beggar suddenly swung in to the fa ct that
he him self was trying to do something else which needed a few
dollars, and in order to get the few dollars he would dispose o f some
small property o f value which he had with him. B u t fo r the cleverness
o f the beggar, the m an o f wealth w ould not have been caught, as such
preliminaries now are very com m on, and the swing about o f the
conversation is expected in this era o f sharp dealings. B u t this
man’ s m ind entered the in terval; and, before it had emerged, he
had merely said he would certainly help the matter along by a small
contribution of ten dollars. In less than five seconds afterward he
regretted saying i t ; but, as he had com m itted him self, he stood
by his word.
A n aged Senator worth m any m illions in money, and presumably
an able man, had been kind to a young lady who was poor but ambi
tious. T he friendship ripened, not in to love, but in to confidence;
and each step from the very first was taken by the p itfa ll o f an
interval, in w hich he com m itted him self, and made it so difficult to
retrace his steps that he went on in to deeper entanglements. I t is
even claim ed that a marriage took place on sudden im pulse, but the
facts are now known to very few persons. The beginning o f this
romance was the merest trifle ; it m ight have been a small act,
entirely w ithout sincerity as an intended offer o f personal reg a rd ;
yet it made retracing very hard.
A Senator who had been m arried and raised a fam ily, had m il
lions o f dollars to spend in honoring his station; but in an idle
m om ent o f the m ind com m itted him self to a young g irl who had
never seen society and whose am bition is n ot in the same direction
as that of the husband; thus handicapping him and his first fam ily,
and sending them in to social seclusion. H e was altogether too old
to m arry his latest w ife, and would not have done so i f his m ind had
been deliberate.
A man who had piled up m illions and who had built palaces all
over the civilized world, spending m oney with a hand m ost lavish,
having a good w ife and fam ily, thought it a simple thing to chuck
a little girl under the chin. H ad he stopped to think, he would not
have done it. B u t having done it, and the litle girl having been in
the world lon g enough to know the value o f the friendship o f a man
who had more m illions than he could ever spend, asked him one day
fo r a small favor. She was pretty, exceedingly pretty, and he knew
it. W hen she asked h im fo r this favor, his thoughts flew to the
fo u r winds and did not come back to him until he had promised. H e
was a man o f the world, keen and deep in all business affairs when
his thoughts ran in regular channels; but when the pretty miss asked
him for the favor he was beside him self with delight. It was a
mere nothing, and she made it so. Then he came to him self and
asked his own judgm ent, “ Is not this little beauty a designing young
girl who is after m y m illions, or some o f them ? I w ill see.” -— H e
saw her the next day and asked her age, and fou n d it was seventeen.
W hat had she learned about the world ? V ery little. She was a pure-
m inded, innocent angel. Then he wanted to know if she had learned
m uch o f his financial condition, and so she was asked about that.—-
“ Y o u are the kin d gentleman who sells papers at the stand, are you
n o t; very poor, but very honest and trustworthy.” — It seems that
one m orning he had gone behind the news counter and helped him
self to the papers that he wanted, as the vendor was away fo r a
mom ent, and the little girl had seen him there. She, as events after
ward proved, had known him to be a m illionaire, and lon g before the
newspaper episode, she had known this. H er wom an’s wit, active in
one so young, had told her that i f he suspected that she was after
his money, he w ould spurn h e r; so she pretended that she thought he
was poor and that she liked him despite that fact. The idea of
being a newspaper seller, suited him and he thought he would keep up
the disguise. H e was deceiving her. She was deceiving h im ; but she
knew o f his deception, and he did n ot know o f hers. One day she
asked him fo r some little favor, never money, and as she was ill her
request was written. T he messenger, an older sister, had but a half
a m inute to spare, and the m illionaire, in another interval o f mind,
sent a note, not signed, but clearly in his handwriting. Matters went
on until som ething else happened, and it cost him an enormous sum
o f m oney to settle with the petite maiden. In the business world
such a victory over him would have been impossible.
Another man, having been fo r a mom ent captivated by the charms
o f a fa ir you ng lady, wrote a brief line, and she g ot away with it.
I n five seconds after she had gone, he w ould have given a hundred
thousand dollars to have had it back. It cost him more than that, a
broken home, ill health and shortened li f e ; fo r he never stood as well
before the public after that. I t was the p itfa ll o f the interval.
A young man, having a mother whom he loved and fo r whom he

w ould have sacrificed all his property and his existence too, in an
interval— during which a practical joke had angered him , struck
her and felled her to the floor. The horror of it never le ft his m ind.
Clergymen who go wrong, and many do and always w ill, are more
or less emotional and trusting. T o them the hypnotic interval works
the greatest m ichief. They are bound to believe in humanity. T hat
is what their religion teaches them. So when the maiden or the
grown woman comes fo r advice and is em otional also, the one slight
act that sets the world aflame, is comm itted. A kiss of the hand or
brow, an arm around the waist in tender sympathy, or some fam iliarity
that undoes the man’s nature. Then it is too late to turn back.
H e is lost if the facts ever leak out. H e must carry the secret alone,
except when she is with him sub rosa, his wife and fam ily may know
o f it after his death, and his church w ork is all a mockery. One small
interval does the damage. W e were personally acquainted with
H enry W ard Beecher, and knew him in his great trial. Hie had been
indiscreet. In an interval he had written a sentence that was to out
live him. In an interval he had kissed the lips of a woman not his
wife. B u t that he had done more, we do n ot believe, as the man’s
character was a living denial o f that allegation. H e was fu ll of sym
pathy, fu ll of emotion, and capable o f arousing the emotional nature
o f his hearers through the deepest power. A m on g those who knew
him as he really was, Beecher was a mere child in his m ental sympathy
for others; but if you tell this to people who cannot understand the
man, you get back a derisive chuckle o f derision. The great are m is
ju dged by the m inds o f wasps.
In court trials the effect o f the interval is often seen. The best
means o f studying m ental processes is to be present in a big trial
where able lawyers clash with themselves and with able witnesses.
Beecher was cross-examined by Judge Fullerton, the most skilful
attorney in his day in this work. H e laid many traps fo r Beecher
of the same kind that thousands o f the keenest minds had fallen in to ;
but the divine did not walk into one o f them. F ullerton said that
Beecher’s m ind traveled ahead o f his in all the questioning. The
lawyer shifted his inquiries often, as the reports w ill show ; but the
fam ous pastor injected his own ideas and never lost track of one
idea, and that was the intention o f the lawyer to entangle him.
I n another fam ous case Judge Fullerton fou n d a very capable
witness who could not be lead into any o f the traps of cross-examina
tion, and he was about to give up in despair when the idea suddenly
dawned on him to ask a variety o f assorted questions. N o two were
on the same subject and not in train. This was too m uch fo r the
witness. The shifting of the line of thought broke up the power o f
resistance in the m ind of the witness. The man spoke o f the matter
somewhat as fo llo w s : “ I knew before the trial began that the Judge
was to be feared. So I braced m yself fo r his questions. I was
on the lookout all the time. A s soon as he had been answered one
question I felt sure what was com ing next, and I was ready fo r it.
B ut when he put one fo r me to answer, and g ot his reply, and went
around a m ile fo r another piece o f inform ation that had nothing to
do with what had been asked ju st before, and kept this thing going, I
was in profuse perspiration in three minutes. I could not think.
A ll I could realize was that he was talking and I was talking in
return. This broke me up.”
In a conflict that took place in the last year between a man who was
a sharp financier and a lawyer, the battle was with the witness as
long as the questions ran as fo llo w s :
“ Y ou saw the man en ter?”
“ I did.”
“ D id you see him at any tim e with a paper in his h and ?”
“ I did.”
“ What was the paper?”
“ It was a m orning newspaper.”
This reply angered the la w yer; but good advocates know that when
they lose their tempers their cool judgm ent is gone. So he went o n :
“ D id he have any document, or other paper, legal or otherwise,
that m ight have contained figures or w riting or tabulated accounts,
or anything similar ?”
“ I f he did, I saw nothing o f the sort.”
“ Where were you when he entered?”
“ I sat in the room used fo r the Directors’ meetings, in the farther
corner o f the room.”
“ Where was the door, at what part o f the room ?”
“ B ight opposite me but d ia g on a lly ”
‘ W ere you in a position to have seen what he carried in his hands
such as documents or reports or accounts?”
“ Y es, I could have seen.”
“ W hat did he have in his righ t h and ?”
“ A m orning newspaper.”
“ W hat did he have in his left h a n d ?”

“ A cane or walking-stick.”
“ A n d you w ill swear that he carried no papers in his hands?”
“ I w ill.”
I f the student w ill notice the various subjects touched upon in
this cross-examination, he w ill find that every idea was in train.
The witness had a natural stimulus to his own m ind by the connected
run of ideas. H e was not com pelled to take care o f him self, as
these ideas led from one to another, and left him no gulfs to leap.
The first inquiry related to seeing the m a n ; the second to a paper
in the man’ s hand, and this called up the mental vision o f the man
and what he had with him. The third inquiry related to other kinds
o f papers than the m orning newspaper, which had produced laughter
at the expense o f the attorney, who was thirsting fo r revenge. The
next inquiry still related to the man’ s entrance, as it wanted an
answer as to where the witness sat when the man entered. Then
there was the idea o f the room into which the man came, the corner of
the room , the door, and the one hand, then the other hand of the
man, and finally the walking-stick. S till no documentary papers.
The lawyer knew there was something being held back that the
witness was not w illin g to tell unless the exact question was put to
him. M any a lawyer knows the same thing too. As Andrew Car
negie said from the witness box, “ There is one question that will
reach the point, if you know what it is.” This is very often
true.
The lawyer adopted the scattered thought process and went on as
follow s, after seeing that the witness was toying with h im :
“ W hat papers have you now in your pocket containing in form a
tion on these schedules ?”
It was almost all the witness could do to recover his thinking
cap, as he was looking fo r a further inquiry in the train. The
reply was of such a nature that it held the witness in subjection fo r
a while. A fter having made an extended answer, the witness next
had this question put to h im :
“ W hat parties did you meet yesterday afternoon with reference
to this case?’
This also required an extensive reply and confused the witness.
T h en came the next question:
“ When did you last see the book that is now said to be lost?”
H ere was a third leap in the m ind o f the witness. F rom the
room of the Directors’ meeting, to the present day, and then to

the gathering o f yesterday, and anon to the tim e when he last saw the
missing book, was a journey that kept him thinking. H e was pur
sued in this way until he let fa ll a remark that pinned the fact
that the lawyer was seeking; and, having opened the way, he made
fu ll progress very soon.
There was a p itfa ll and the witness was in it.
W hile we do not suppose the lawyers who use the scattered thought
method, know the philosophy o f the process, they have an instinctive
knowledge o f the degrees o f success that follow their many ways of
putting questions.
Some o f the most skilful cross-examiners use the trains o f thought
as a means o f m aking witnesses contradict themselves, whether honest
or not. The plan is sim ple enough in itself, but must be handled
by a very shrewd m ind. It consists in leading the witness by a
connected series o f ideas to a given p o in t; then g oin g back to
another series and brin gin g u p at another point, the two points
being exactly opposite to each other and a palpable contradiction.
This has won many a case. B ut the cause is not in the thinking
interval, and is rather a trick than a fa ir process. In some o f our
m eetings we have had the same thing tried as an experim ent and
it can be made to work in many instances where the witness is not
inform ed in advance o f what is being done. I f he has inform ation,
he w ill begin to compare his answers some ways this side of the end,
and so save him self or effect a compromise.
The use o f the interval has been very effective in unfair demon
strations, as where a lawyer was addressing the ju ry, and had reached
a place in his argument when the lawyer on the other side very
kindly said,
“ Excuse m e, please, but a paper o f some im portance fe ll from
your pocket.”
I t was a paper that belonged to the opposing counsel, that had
been picked up some tim e before and held fo r this purpose. W hile
the use o f the interruption was a trick, the actual cause that closed
the m ind o f the speaker was the interval that the paper episode set
up in his m ind. H e could not help thanking the lawyer who in
terrupted him , nor could he scold him fo r the intrusion. B ut it
broke up the m ost effective part o f his speech. This is a very old
method, and is usually em ployed by m erely objectin g to something
that is being said. However, when this is done in the m idst of a
very strong appeal to the ju ry, the purpose is so plain that it reacts;
while the kindness in handing the speaker an im portant paper is
looked upon as an act o f courtesy.
Another lawyer who felt that his case was being argued away by
the intensely pow erful clim ax being made by an opposing advocate,
could not find an opening whereby he could interrupt the speaker;
so he accidentally upset the ink, causing a big com m otion about
the table, which ended in laughter. The address to the ju ry had
reached a m ost solemn and pathetic state. There was a suspicion
that this accident was due to d esign ; and the judge said to a fr ie n d :
“ I f I had p roof that the ink was spilled to break in upon the
argument o f the counsel, I would urge the disbarment o f the lawyer
who did it.”
In order to cause an interval the interruption must be serious
enough to drive the pending thought out o f m ind, and pu t the whole
attention on the new idea.
There is some danger in a false train o f thought. I f its connect
in g links are untrue connections, then it leads to almost any end
that m ay be designed. Such false trains are forced upon the minds
o f others when the latter are in the interval. T hey then become
pitfalls that should be avoided. T he remedy fo r this error is in
the “ I don’t believe” status of the m ind, as has been so thoroughly
taught in a previous cycle o f this book. A fam iliar example is
the fau lty conclusions referred to at the b egin n in g; where a person
who seemed to have p roof o f the m oving o f a table w ithout any
apparent cause, or knocks, or other phenomena in physics, im me
diately concluded that the cause was a spirit. H ere is the usual
fo rm u la :
I am sure that I heard knocks on this table.
The knocks could not have been made by any hum an being.
Therefore they must have been made by spirits.
The train is fau lty fo r tw o reasons; first the statement that they
could not have been made by any human beings is easily challenged
and disproved. B ut if it were true that the knocks could not have
been made by any human being, there is no reason to connect the
final statement, that they must therefore have been made by spirits.
There are a hundred ways in which knocks can be made by agencies
not human, and yet not be the work o f spirits. A nd there are laws
that are not fu lly understood.
Then here is another faulty fo rm u la 1,
OPERATIONS OF TIIE OTHER MIND
I am sure I saw the ghost o f m y brother standing before me here

a second or more ago.
I know it was my brother because I knew him all m y life.
As he has been dead fo r several years, it could not be his livin g
form .
As it was a form , it must be the spirit of m y brother.
H ere the conclusion is faulty because the train breaks into an
erroneous connection. I t is n ot necessarily true that it was a form .
I t m ight have been a picture, or any one of a score or m ore o f things.
N or is it true, supposing it to be a form , that it is a spirit. Forms
may live in the m ind. A ll ghosts so dwell. A drop of fluid from
the blood, lod gin g in the fine brain-nerves where sight is created,
may stand forth in the outer air as a fu lly fledged individual or
anything else that the m ind sees through the veil o f its many halluci
nations. A s ideas live in the other m ind in the form o f worded
thoughts, so they may exist there in the form o f pictures, or sounds
or smells, or other methods of recording. W hat has been in the lon g
past, may have fou n d its way into the Other M ind and there re-
Inained until something called it forth or it chose to com e o f itself,
A man says: “ Do I believe in ghosts ? O f course I believe in what
I see. A n d I have seen ghosts.”
This train is faulty because he says he has seen ghosts. He
thinks he has. More than this, he thinks he ought to know what
he has seen. On the face o f the assumption his contention seems
correct; but when he thinks he knows what lie has seen, someone
else must be called in to tell him . The ghosts he has seen are the
records o f the Other M ind that break in on him during some interval
in his own conscious m ind. Then is the time they select fo r m aking
themselves manifest.
But the interval plays havoc in some cases. A real estate agent
was quite tired, and fell asleep at his desk. H is partner and tw o
clerks in the same office heard him snore. W hile he slept he
dreamed that he was asleep, that he w'oke up, and wrote down on
a piece of paper his promissory note in favor o f a certain party, gave
it to his partner to deliver, and then went to sleep again. Soon
he awoke, and did not even know that he had slept. H e made the
assertion that he had executed the note, and told his partner to
deliver it that m orning. On being denied the fact, he told what
he had done, and the very paper on which he wrote the note, being
taken from a book, and that he made the entry on the stub. The
PITFALLS OF TEE MIND
latter was still empty. W hen they told him he had slept and dreamed,
he said, “ I wonder how many m en have gone into court and made
oath to what they have done, and been contradicted by other men,
leaving the court in doubt as to which side was telling the truth."
It is true that sleep comes over the m ind very suddenly and leaves
it very suddenly, with no trace of what has occurred. In a banker’ s
private office, one of a firm of private bankers fell asleep, dreamed
that he had signed a check, and when he woke up he raised a fuss
in his determination to find out what had become o f it. H e said,
“ I have been right here all the m orning and I know what I have
done.” A gain the blank stub saved some clerk from discharge.
“ I have not been asleep,” is heard often from the lips of people
w ho have just awakened from a five-minute nap.
“ W ere you drunk on that d a y?” was asked of a witness.
“ I object,” said the lawyer on the other sid e; “ on the ground
that a drunken man is not able to say whether he was drunk or n ot.”
Likewise when a man has been snoring loud enough to make the
windows o f the office tremble while he sat in his chair pen in hand,
as has occurred numberless times, he is not qualified to tell whether
he was asleep or not.
In court trials there have been thousand upon thousands o f men
and women on the stand under oath who have sworn to a negative
by saying that something did not occur because they were in the
room all the tim e and would have seen it had it taken place. N ot
fou r weeks ago a young lady whose word could not be impeached,
swore on the stand that a certain transaction did n ot occur in the
sitting room of her house, because she was there in her easy chair
reading a book, and had not arisen from two to fou r o’ clock. The
transaction had been alleged as occurring at about three. Several
witnesses were required to show that this selfsame young lady always
read herself to sound sleep when she had been reading fo r an hour or
so. She indignantly denied it, but her m other, at the risk o f losing an
im portant case, admitted the fact.
A certain woman, who was charged by her husband with going
to sleep every Sunday when he was at home to be entertained by
her com panionship, denied the allegation m ost hotly. So he took
several camera views of her, one o f which, by being in a favored
position with references to her wide-open mouth, made that organ
look all-inclusive and the ears fade away into a distant perspective.
This was a work of a rt; but the w ifes on seeing it, arranged with her
husband to have it destroyed on the promise that he was to wake

her up at any tim e in the future that he wished to be entertained.
“ I did not think I was in the habit o f goin g to sleep in the day
tim e,” she said. She was honest, and so are others, fo r dishonesty
is an intended wrong, and the man or wom an who sleeps a few
minutes in daylight is wholly oblivious o f the fact.
Here is another pitfall.
Its danger is in the w rong that m ight be charged against some
person who plays a part in one’s dreams.
A great trial has ju st ended in V irgin ia, in which a m ost estimable
you ng lady had a wealthy dentist arrested on the charge o f crim inal
assault. T here is no doubt that she was honest and sincere in the
belief that she had been assaulted. T he defence was that, as she
had taken an anesthetic prior to having a tooth extracted, she awoke
in a state o f hallucination. Em inent experts bore out that theory,
and the dentist was acquitted.
H um an testimony is not the safest guide whereby to ju dge one
another. So much depends on the vicissitudes o f the mental processes
that pitfalls abound everywhere. It is hard to say that a thing is so or
is not so, under many circumstances.
A n em otional m ind, like the average fem ale’s, is guided by what
it wants to believe; and belief in a short tim e becomes the most
certain knowledge. I t is to w ish ; to believe; to k n o w ; and then
the oath on which some one is pinioned in court. Judges are aware
o f this peculiar phase o f the fem inine mental n atu re; and they have
recommended that all wom en who have the slightest emotional nature,
should depend wholly on what they write in ink and never change.
One ju dge recently said : “ The testimony o f women is always to
be taken with care. M any make themselves believe things they,
at the beginning, know are not true, but which they come in a short
time to believe must be true.”
So there are pitfalls all around the hum an m ind that should be
studied in order to be avoided.
It is better to suffer than to make others suffer who are blameless.
FIFTEENTH CYCLE
IN NO-MAN’S-LAND
0 D A R K E R land exists
I n all the universe
Than the deep cavern sunk
Beneath the em pty vault
O f nothingness profound
I n black oblivion.
S T H E R E are tw o sides to every operation o f the Other

M ind, it follows that, in reverse o f the influences that
make pitfalls fo r you by the intervals through which
your own m ind passes, you yourself can make intervals
by which you may draw in the thoughts of other
minds. T his is close to m ind reading, and is direct physical
telepathy.
In order to understand the steps by which this process is reached
and proved, you should re-read every word o f the several cycles that
precede this part o f the work. It m ight serve some purpose to go
over the explanation again h ere; but we have repeated it enough
in the past cycles, and the review o f the philosophy is now in your
own charge.
There are two kinds o f m ind reading:
1. The kind that is employed in public exhibitions, when it is
honest and based upon optical telepathy.
2. The kind that is com m on in the life o f every individual.
H ypnotism is also used fo r public exhibitions and fo r private
healing. As a public show it is a natural crim e, and is so made by
law in most countries to-day. M ind reading o f the kin d known as
optical telepathy is an accident only, and is fou n d in about one
person in a m illion. I t is often faked in shows, and is then based
upon some sign system. I f it is genuine, it is merely the magnetic
power o f a person to see the scenes about him when he is blindfolded.
Several of these cases have been investigated and fou n d true. One
was the ability to drive through the streets o f Chicago, while so
com pletely blindfolded that there was no possibility o f seeing any
thing. T he man directed the horses amid the crowded streets at
high noon when there were thousands o f wagons to be passed and
many turns to be made. H e drove as accurately as if he had not
been blindfolded. The case was a genuine one.
Eecently in another city, but many years after, another man did
the same thing under greater difficulties, and w ithout accident. The
officials took care that he could not have been faking. I n both these
instances, we took an experimental interest fo r the sake o f testing
the truth of the affairs; and there is n o doubt that each was a
genuine case o f optical telepathy.
A large sum of money has recently been offered i f any person
can count the number o f oranges in a pile w ithout seeing the pile
w ith the eyes. T he latter must be covered, and the oranges counted
correctly. I t is not assumed that in optical telepathy the sight is
im proved by being covered. I t all comes to the brain cells where
the optic nerve transmits its knowledge. W ith the opened eyes, no
person can count a pile o f oranges, unless he is permitted to take
them away and count them as they are shifted. T he outer oranges
hide those in the heap that are not visible until the form er are moved
away. W hat cannot be done by the uncovered eyes cannot be done
by optical telepathy.
These facts prove that this kind of reading is m erely an accident
o f the conscious brain, and is aided by magnetism. W e have met
fou r genuine readers o f optical telepathy. T here are n ot many m ore
in this land at a time. They are very scarce. A ll these could read
when blin dfolded the same things they could see with uncovered
eyes. T he ether, or inner atmosphere, carried the sight through
solids and transferred it to the brain cells, where all sight is inter
preted to the mind. T hey could read prin t, and tell all that was
before them, as easily as they could do under ordinary circumstances.
B ut m uch depended on their m agnetic condition. W hen this was
low they lacked the power o f optical telepathy.
T heir w ork showed the operation o f the inner ether that plays so
im portant a part in the development and practice o f m agnetic powers,
as w ill be seen by reference to the various works on magnetism
in the series o f studies in the P sychic Society. A ll through the
world to-day where investigations are being carried on by experts,
IN NO-MANS-LAND
and learned m en in various ways, there is ever com ing an increasing

volume o f proofs o f the power o f the inner ether. W ireless telegraphy
is one example o f its usefulness, and the x-ray is another.
L eaving optical telepathy as the mere accident o f the conscious
m ind we com e to genuine telepathy as a fu n ction o f the Other M ind.
M uch has been said about the steps necessary fo r em ptying the
conscious m ind, and these are fou n d in the last three cycles. They
should all be mastered before the work of this cycle is attempted.
There has never been a case where one who was g ifted with the
accident known as optical telepathy, could take thoughts ou t o f the
minds o f other people. Y e t this feat has been accomplished many
thousands o f times by the operation o f the Other M in d by m aking
the proper effort to accomplish it. O f course it is one o f those
com m on things that life is fu ll o f when done automatically, or in
flashes. B ut to do it as a science and an art, is quite a different
thing. T hat the righ t method has been evolved is now certain.
I t consists, whether as an accident o f nature, or an autom atic process,
or a flash or a studied operation, in the follow in g essentials:
1. The m ind o f the person receiving telepathic knowledge must
be emptied, or be made totally inactive in conscious thinking.
2. There must be a devitalized state o f the general body.
3. T he degree o f success to be attained after the tw o foregoing
essentials have been met, w ill depend wholly on the drawing power
o f magnetism. A s some persons have magnetism naturally, they
have the power of drawing thoughts fro m other minds when they
meet the tw o first essentials, which are em ptying the m in d and
general devitalization. T he way to do these things and the relation
they have to the activity o f the Other M ind in telepathy, are fu lly
stated over and over again in the preceding cycles. D o not try to
begin at this stage of the work. I t is uphill effort and conscientious
practice that w ill bring results.
I f it is an accident o f nature that you draw thoughts from the
minds o f other people, all these three essentials are present; and in
hundreds o f cases o f the same kind this fa ct has been proved by
close observation.
I f it is as an automatic process or by the flash o f a thought that
you can draw knowledge from the minds of others, then all three
essentials are present.
So as a studied operation the three essentials must be met. It
makes no difference whether you are g ifted or work fo r your achieve-
IN NO-MAN 8-LAND
2. W hen you seek to draw knowledge from the minds o f those

who are engaged in conversation with you.
3. W hen you are in reverie.
The first and the last o f these occasions are degrees o f each other.
B ut the intervals are different, and hence the separation of the
occasions.
In the first instance, when you are alone and seek to draw some
knowledge from the m ind of another person not present, you must
have the three essentials under m astery:
1. Devitalization.
2. The emptied m ind.
3. Magnetism.
The latter is the power, as was so carefully and thoroughly ex
plained in the First Cycle. Power is required in everything. The
object o f devitalization is to assist in relaxing the flow o f nervous
energy to the brain. A ll vitalized bodies have great brain activity.
A ll devitalized bodies have little or none. These are com m on phases
o f human nature. A lazy body, a lazy m ind. A sleepy body, a
sleepy mind. A sluggish body, a sluggish m ind. A tense body, a
tense mind. A wide-awake body, a wide-awake m ind. These are
axioms o f everyday existence, and they explain an immense amount
of human conduct. T hey show why some persons cannot sleep at
night and others can sleep at any time, night or day.
They show why some persons are dull in m ind, stupid in thought,
or active and keen in execution. They stand close to all the phe
nomena o f the so-called occult, hypnotic, trance, and a dozen other
states.
Can there be power o f magnetism and devitalization o f the body?
Y es, it is a wonderful thing, but it has been done thousands of
times and can be done m illions more. M agnetism by devitalization
is not lost, but saved. I t is stored. It is sent back into the gangli
onic cells and there held in great force. W hen a wide-awake man or
woman devitalizes the body, the magnetism is like a great head of
steam in a m ighty locom otiv e; it is all there, but the wheels are idle.
The study and development o f magnetism in its various classes fo r
human use, is very simple and easy; although the uses are as broad
in their scope as life itself. I t is life, and therefore cannot be made
a small and contracted thing. This is the reason why it is contained
in several volumes o f great size and still greater cost.
The study o f telepathy is intricate, but is not hopelessly hard.
A ny man or woman who has average intelligence can read and master
these cycles. They are both plain and practical. Y e t telepathy
is vastly m ore com plicated than magnetism, and the two extend
together through great breadths and into profou n d depths, as com
panions in the tw o m ost useful studies o f life.
W e say this because people think that magnetism must be born in
a person and cannot be developed. W hile the power is born, it
is dormant in nearly all cases, and experience shows that the de
veloped magnetism is more pow erful because it is founded on practical
laws that must be understood before great progress can be made.
The grandest conception o f a human being is when the power o f
magnetism has been called to the ganglionic cells or nerve centers
by devitalization. Then the m ind is ready to be emptied, and the
condition is complete.
T he process of em ptying the m ind is fu lly taught in the T w elfth
Cycle. I t has been thoroughly tested and fou n d to be effective at
all times. The thoughts are lost by vanishing backward. T hey pass
backward through to-day, then backward through the last twelve
months, and still backward through the years o f life, and finally are
emptied in the deep, dark, black cavern o f absolute nothingness,
called “ no-m an’ s land.” Review the T w elfth Cycle fo r this line o f
instruction.
The process ±s double-backward
It is backward through the five ch ief events o f the day, then back
ward through five chief events o f the year o f twelve months, then
backward through the five chief events o f the life of years; thus
being three series o f thoughts, each backward in the series, and the
latter themselves backw ard; thus m aking the double-backward process
of the m ind until it tumbles into oblivion.
C areful experience proves this to be a wonderful procedure, when
it is made automatic.
Y o u cannot realize its value u ntil you have mastered it. A t first
the m ind w ill work in a dull manner because of lack o f flexibility
in thinking. I t may require days or weeks o f steady practice to
make your m ind flexible; but when it is accom plished this flexibility
w ill serve in hundreds o f other w ays; as you can throw your thoughts
at w ill, invite sleep at w ill, and control all conditions o f the m ind
and nerves by its use.
Y o u may have been trained fo r some physical effort, as fo r fo o t
ball at college. I f so, you w ill recall how stiff the muscles were at
IN NO-MAN 8-LAND
first, and what a slow process it was to make them flexible. B n t

tim e and persistent practice won at length. T he pugilist, Dempsey,
who has won the w orld’s cham pionship, and has rested on his laurels,
i f he shall come out o f his retirement to enter the arena again, must
go to his training camp and begin his practice all over again. Hia
muscles are stiff, and lack flexibility. It w ill take weeks to bring
them in to condition. So the human m ind is a very stiff thing and
m ay stalk awkwardly through those backward thoughts fo r some
weeks, but in tim e it w ill become flexible, and once so it w ill remain
so fo r a lifetim e i f the practice o f the art as shown in the present
cycle is m aintained as a habit, which is very easy to do.
W hen the m ind is at length trained to go into “ no-m an’ s-land”
in the flash o f a second, and you are able to devitalize your body while
concentrating your great fu n d o f magnetism in the nerve centers,
you w ill find yourself possessed o f a tremendous power. I t will
surprise you by what it can accomplish.
T his process opens up the Other M ind, and it can be done in a
flash or in a reverie. T o be able to catch what is at hand, the
conscious m ind must come back. T his is a matter o f habit also.
B ut as it comes back, it catches only the echo of the departing mind.
T he two minds are not present together, each in fu ll sway, fo r this
is contrary to the purpose o f nature.
Three things are to be recognized:
1. The Other M ind does n ot speak in words. I t uses all the
means o f conveying knowledge that the conscious m ind employs,
but has no words, no figures, no signs. I f words are ever transferred
they are the interpretation o f the conscious m ind, not the message
from the Other M ind. I f you seek to get from the m ind of some
person who is not present, the knowledge therein contained, and
i f you expect sentences to walk into your m ind, you w ill be mistaken.
T hey m ay come, and do come quite often, but only as secondary.
K now ledge existed before letters or words were known. N othing
can be more transitory in history than the language o f people.
W ords vary as you travel over the earth. I f you were in Japan
you m ight be told many things in that language and n ot understand
one o f th em ; yet the things w ould exist ju st the same.
2. The feelings are generally the first kin d o f knowledge that
w ill come to you i f you succeed in drawing from the m ind o f another.
T hey are stronger than mere ideas, and are caught by magnetism
in a more ready manner than mere inform ation. M agnetism is
based on the power that is naturally lodged in the feelings, which

are the offspring of the nerves, ju st as magnetism is.
3. A fter you have succeeded in drawing knowledge from another
at a distance, you must learn to interpret it in the language o f the
conscious mind. This is often a very beautiful experience, and one
that has proved fascinating to many students in our experimental
class.
The three occasions require three different uses o f the interval.
1. W hen you seek to draw knowledge from a person with whom
you are talking, the interval must be a flash.
2. W hen you seek to draw knowledge fro m one not present, the
interval must be longer than a flash, but shorter than one would
think necessary, as w ill soon be explained.
3. When you seek help while in a reverie, the interval is prolonged.
I f you can see the difference between the presence o f the conscious
m ind in ordinary thought, and the part-presence o f the Other Mind,
as in a reverie, or sometimes the complete presence o f that giant
fu n ction , you w ill then be better prepared to understand the passing
in and out o f the arena o f thought o f the tw o minds.
Y o u r avocation will determine whether or not you have ever used
the reverie. I f you have you w ill recognize the follow in g account
of i t :
Y o u go to your desk or table, and it is evening. Y o u wish to be
left alone as weighty matters are pending and you must cope with
them.
T hrough a process o f thinking, known to every man or woman
who has ever accomplished anything in this world, the conscious
m ind gradually drifts away and on comes the reverie. T he line o f
crossing is very distinct. Here the interval is prolonged.
The flash interval is one that skill and lon g experience is able to
invite with accuracy. The Other M ind delivers a general fu n d of
knowledge by the echo principle, which is worth studying. It has
been referred to, and is seemingly com plex fo r the reason that it
deals with a set of laws not applicable to physical thinking. This
proves that the Other M ind is the agency o f another life that is
not physical, and that is im m ortal, or at least that survives the
Wreck o f the physical. The two points o f difference between the
physical and the psychic existences, are:
1. Language.
2. Interpretation.
[
IN NO-MANS-LAND fW P
I f you were to die and go to another w orld, as most people expect
to do, what language would you speak there ? In this world we find
a language fo r every nation, and in each nation a dialect fo r each
section unless, as in the U nited States, there is no exclusive part
of the country shut off m uch o f the tim e from other parts. In
such a country as E ngland, there is almost a separate form o f E nglish
for each country.
B ut would you speak E nglish in heaven?
I f not, what language ?
It has been guessed that music is the universal means o f com m uni
cation, because in this w orld the only thing that does n ot change is
the scale. Every whole-note has a relationship to each whole-note
above and below it that n o nationality can affect; and the same is
true o f every half-note. This is due to the law o f fixed vibrations
which make a sound in music. In spoken sounds, as in words, the
act of speech causes a slide off every note, either up or d ow n ; but
the slides are controlled by the law o f the musical scale, and cannot
be changed. W hat makes a w ord is its com position o f vowels and
consonants. 'Vowels are shapes of sound made by positions o f the
lips, m outh and throat, and consonants are interruptions o f the flow
o f sou n d; a w onderful economy o f nature. There are very nearly
the same alphabets all over the world, fo r the reason that there are
three basic vowels, ee, ah, and oo, which must appear in every tongue
on earth. Then there are three basic consonants, b, d, and hard g.
P rom these six bases all else is built and every language shows this
fact.
The different languages o f this planet are due to some slight
variations in the secondary vowels and consonants, and to the acci
dental building up o f words. I f there shall ever be a general language
in this world, the basis must be the three vowels and three consonants
referred to. T ry to see how many words you can build from these
six. Then the vowels open gradually to shades o f sounds, which
seem different as the ear learns to distinguish th em ; and the con
sonants give rise to all kinds o f variations. D id you ever stop to
think that d is easily changed to t, 1, s, th, dh, as in the word then;
z, sh, tsh, as in the w ord ch in ; zh as in the w ord azure, all being
on the forw ard part of the ton gu e? I t is in these variations that
the difficulties of foreign speech arise as fa r as utterance is concerned.
B ut words that mean one thing in one tongue, mean something
else in another. L ook at any page you please o f a book o f Prench,
German, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Greek, Japanese, Chinese, or other

tongue that you are not able to speak, and you w ill see why there
is no one preferred language in heaven.
The Other M ind is free from all earthly language.
B ut ideas are the same, no matter how they may be expressed in
w riting or in tones. I f you burn yourself, it is a burn even in
Portuguese, whether you can utter the word that w ill make it known
or not. I f you slip on the ice, it is a slip in all the tongues of earth.
Pacts are facts. Ideas are ideas. Feelings are feelings. These
pass through the wall of the two minds, but words do not. W ords
are often fou n d in the conscious m ind, as interpretations of the
echo from the Other M ind, after the latter has been in and o u t; but
they are creations o f the form er, which is often referred to as the
language-m ind, because it is the only one of the two that carries a
language.
M usic is founded on the number of vibrations per second o f the
molecular waves o f the air. I t is a fixed language, as it cannot
vary. The shape o f a consonant or vowel may be shifted by the
way the muscles are w orked; but any musical note is the same the
w orld over and in all other worlds where they have atmosphere.
I f it is sharped or flatted, the note passes into another one of fixed
vibrations. Song and instrum ent are agencies of beauty and ideal
enjoym ent, such as we m ight expect in a better world. B ut they
are active only in an air that can be vibrated, and have their lim ita
tions on that account. The solution of the problem, is in another
direction entirely, and we w ill leave that part of the subject.
What concerns us here is the fact that words are not the language
o f the Other M ind.
Many persons refer to the visitations o f that m ind as impressions,
others as inspirations, others as intuition, o f which woman is the
m aster-force, and others as revelations. A ll these are part of the
great study of magnetism, and it is not wise here to intrude on a
work so m uch larger than this, as it would defeat the present line
o f instruction. These visitations cover an immense ground, as will
be seen in other works in the Psychic Society.
B ut what is called an impression is a leap out o f the Other M ind
into the conscious mind. I t comes in the interval, and is at hand
when a turning point occurs in a line o f thought. I t w ill help
us to understand two th in gs:
1. W hat telepathy in its simplest stage is like.
IN NO-MANS-LAND
2. T he way the Other M ind acts in the first development.

On the physical side, and w ithout intruding on the m agnetic
side of impressions, let us see how they happen and to whom.
T he im pression is a com m on, everyday occurrence. W e know
m any thousands o f wom en, and have never yet seen one that we
broached this subject to, who had n ot had many impressions. Some
women have them daily. A ll men have had impressions at times,
but not as frequently as women.
A n impression is the simplest form o f telepathy. I t happens, as
has been said, in the interval which attends a change o f thought
from one subject to another. I f a wom an is talking along on one
line o f ideas she w ill not receive an im pression until there is a sharp
break in the run o f thoughts. Then it may come or not, depending
on several contingencies; the most im portant o f which is her ability
to know it when it comes. Even m en o f stolid, phlegm atic tem pera
ment, all lacking in emotions, have the knowledge frequently from
the realm o f the Other M ind, but do n ot know it, and have rarely
ever recognized it. The presence is there, and not different enough
to attract attention. There is no loud knocking, but the echo only
o f the recent visitation of the Other M ind.
It is well known that women whose em otional nature is keenly
developed, are the constant receivers o f impressions. There must
be a finely strung nervous organization. T his is developed in such
a study as Advanced M agnetism , and can be carried to any lim it, all
the while increasing the health, the power o f the m ind, and the
usefulness o f all the faculties fo r the grand w ork o f life in every
way.
The im pression is never a message in words.
It uses no language, and so is clean cut from the Other M ind. It
leaps into the conscious m ind, as has been often said, and yet enough
is now known to enable us to state with absolute certainty that it
is merely an echo, n ot a direct com m unication. L ook back to a
preceding cycle on the subject o f echoes, and note how they act.
T he exam ple was given o f the hearing of the remark made by
another person when you were not paying attention; yet if you are
asked what was said, and the delay has not been more than tw o or three
seconds, you can repeat the last words exactly. As high as fifteen
to twenty words have, b y fixed experiments, been repeated from the
echo o f the mind.
This is what impressions are; ju st echoes.
The Other M ind has come and gone, and in the brief second or
two that follow s the visitation, you catch the echo and a feelin g of
something out o f the ordinary comes over you. “ I have ju st had
an impression that I am goin g to hear bad news,” may be your
remark. There are no words, no message, nothing but the feeling.
I f it has come from the other m ind, it will be follow ed by the bad
news. I f it is a form o f hallucination o f the conscious m ind, it
w ill be nothing at all. Only careful experience w ill be able to dis
tinguish the difference.
The impression must be translated. I t is not in words.
I f it presages bad news, it w ill produce a heavy feeling akin to gloom
and disappointm ent. I f good news, it w ill make you bright and
elated. The experiences are very com m on. A n d they prove true.
Sometimes there is an im pression that a person is calling, and is
on the way, or is preparing to c a ll; and this is verified by the actual
visit. I f on some unpleasant errand, there w ill be the double im
pression o f the two phases. W e heard a woman say, “ I have an
impression that M r. II. is to call this evening and that he intends
to make trouble.” The man came and did try to make trou b le; but
the w ife and her husband had talked the m atter over and decided
how to attend to it, and the trouble was averted. The name o f the
man came by telepathy, and it reached the m ind, not as a word
or name, but as a feeling that such a person would call. The feeling,
or impression, m ay include the picture of the man, but as a matter of
fact it is the idea of the man him self, n ot anything that can be
written down or spoken. The conscious m ind makes the interpreta
tion, after having an idea on which to base it.
H ere we see how the Other M ind brings knowledge and how the
inform ation is converted into words.
When throw ing the m ind into “ no-m an’s-land” fo r the purpose
o f m aking it receptive, the first sensations are impressions, and the
next are direct influences which it seems are being experienced by
persons who have some aggressive feeling or purpose towards you.
A n example o f what reached a man o f some wealth who had moved
into a town, and whose attention had been called to the methods
herein em ployed by some o f our members, is told below. This man,
after learning what our experimenters were doing, asked to be in
cluded in the local party. H e had therefore been a student o f the
process and had put it into practice.
IN NO-MANS-LAND
One evening, before he had settled in a new boarding place, he was

reading the paper first fo r the news, and second fo r some advertise
ments concerning real estate. The room about him w -s in confusion,
and his w ife was helping to straighten out some o f the things. The
m an looked up from his paper, and said,
“ W hen did you say H ackett was to c a ll?”
“ I did n ot say he was to call at any time. W ho is he ?”
“ W hy, you ju st told me H ackett would call and you named the
time, but it slipped my m ind.”
The woman thought her husband was in a dream and so told him.
H e had really heard, as he believed, her say that H ackett would
call. H aving dropped the matter as a sort o f hallucination, he
took u p his paper again and soon after turned sharply to his w ife
and s a id :
“ I thought you did not know H ackett.”
“ I do not.”
“ Then how could you advise me to not have any dealings with
him as he was a land shark?”
The wom an suggested that her husband go to bed and sleep o il
the effects o f his supposed dream. B ut in five minutes m ore the
card o f H ackett was at the door and a conference follow ed. I t
turned out that the man was unreliable and his methods were soon
laid bare by one who knew the world. T he telepathic message served
a good purpose. It was often talked over afterw ards; but still
greater results from the practice follow ed to the advantage at all
times o f the man. H ow the name H ackett came to his m ind he
did not k n ow ; but it is probable that the name was seen by him
in the paper, and as it was that o f a real estate dealer, it m ay have
entered his m ind and there been left u ntil the occurrence o f the
interval, when it was connected w ith the purpose o f the man him self
to call.
This is one o f the cases where the message is made to convey a
word. Many others have occurred, but they are exceptions to the
general rule, and there is some way o f accounting fo r the introduction
o f words in telepathy outside o f the process itself.
P rom these sim pler acts called impressions the next step is some
what m ore intricate, and applies to the use o f the emptied m ind
when in the presence o f others to whom you are talking. It is
frequently the case that some representations are made to you that
you would like to have verified, or that there are things held back
IN NO-MANS-LAND
One evening, before he had settled in a new boarding place, he was

reading the paper first fo r the news, and second fo r some advertise
ments concerning real estate. The room about him w »s in confusion,
and his w ife was helping to straighten out some o f the things. The
m an looked up fro m his paper, and said,
“ W hen did you say H ackett was to ca ll?”
“ I did n ot say he was to call at any time. W ho is he ?”
“ W hy, you ju st told me H ackett would call and you named the
time, but it slipped my m ind.”
The woman thought her husband was in a dream and so told him.
H e had really heard, as he believed, her say that H ackett would
call. H aving dropped the matter as a sort o f hallucination, he
took up his paper again and soon after turned sharply to his w ife
and said:
“ I thought you did not know H ackett.”
“ I do not.”
“ Then how could you advise me to not have any dealings with
him as he was a land shark?”
The wom an suggested that her husband go to bed and sleep off
the effects o f his supposed dream. B ut in five minutes m ore the
card o f H ackett was at the door and a conference follow ed. It
turned out that the man was unreliable and his methods were soon
laid bare by one who knew the world. T he telepathic message served
a good purpose. It was often talked over afterw ards; but still
greater results from the practice follow ed to the advantage at all
times o f the man. H ow the name H ackett came to his m ind he
did n ot k n ow ; but it is probable that the name was seen by him
in the paper, and as it was that o f a real estate dealer, it m ay have
entered his m ind and there been left u ntil the occurrence o f the
interval, when it was connected with the purpose o f the man him self
to call.
This is one o f the cases where the message is made to convey a
word. Many others have occurred, but they are exceptions to the
general rule, and there is some way o f accounting fo r the introduction
o f words in telepathy outside o f the process itself.
P rom these sim pler acts called impressions the next step is some
what more intricate, and applies to the use o f the emptied m ind
when in the presence o f others to whom you are talking. It is
frequently the case that some representations are made to you that
you would like to have verified, or that there are things held back
IN NO-MANS-LAND
into w ord s; but the conscious m ind does this very often. We do not
think words actually originate in the Other M ind, as that has
110 language like ours in which to clothe its knowledge.
In a com m on transaction where a prospective buyer seeks to
pay m uch less than property is worth, and the owner is compelled
to sell at any price, it is very im portant fo r the latter to know how
far it is safe for him to refuse the offers o f the buyer. W e recall
the case that occurred not fou r months ago where real estate was
offered fo r $32,000, but the owner had to sell at the best price he could
get, fo r his creditors were close upon him . I f he sold fo r less than
$26,000, he would lose m on ey; all above that being profit. A lon g
came a man who wanted the property, but was determined to get it
at the very lowest possible price. H e had several talks with the
owner, and repeatedly asked him what he would take and make a
sale, saying, “ I f you name a price too high, I shall not give the
matter further attention, but w ill accept an offer now pending else
where.” This frightened the ow n er; but he caught from the m ind
o f the other m an the one thought, not in words, but in a strange
feeling. “ I w ill take it at your price if I cannot do better.” The
owner, by a sudden impulse, replied, “ I cannot tell you that someone
has offered me m y price, fo r that would be a falsehood, and it would
not deceive you. Men in your position know the tricks o f trade.
B ut I w ill be honest with you and say that I have not yet had any
offer near m y asking price. N or do I know that I w ill have. B ut I
am goin g to stick to m y asking price fo r aw hile; then, if I cannot
sell the property, I w ill make a reduction o f five hundred dollars,
and take $31,500.”
This was too m uch fo r the buyer, as so slight a reduction was o f
no consequence when he had hoped to get at least ten thousand
dollars off. The result o f that m eeting was that the price of $32,000
was paid, giving the owner a handsome profit o f six thousand dollars,
not one cent of which he expected. H ad he tried to bluff by saying
that he had been offered certain sums fo r it, the buyer would have
looked upon it as a falsehood.
Hundreds o f sim ilar cases, showing the value o f drawing thoughts
from the minds o f other persons, have been called to our attention,
and confirm the fact that study and practice w ill slowly and surely
increase this faculty.
The one basic fact should not be forgotten, that thoughts are all
the time com ing into the m ind, but are not recognized.
THE REVERIE
T he idea o f an open grate fire, with red colors fading into fantastic
shadows, is good enough fo r the stage, and would be very pleasing
were they realistic in life. The m an who planted a garden, and in
the shade of trees, around w inding paths girt with flowers and
grasses o f beautiful effect, deemed that the spirit o f his genius would
move him to great thoughts, fou n d that the good goddess cannot be
coaxed in to hidden byways m erely because they are nicely suited to
her visits. The other man, a poet, who wanted the architect to make
him a great fireplace in his study, where dim red lights could throw
their glow on his fevered brow, got what he sou ght; but the charm
o f the place was so great that it brought the whole fam ily there every
evening to participate in the en joym en t; and where the whole fam ily
is, there can be n o reverie.
Better still was the old, worn, cheap standing desk used by L o n g
fellow , who fou n d it placed against the wall of his room , and there
he got his inspiration and had his reveries, looking ou t on the
distant River Charles, which he saw not when his eyes were fixed
on the beyond. One afternoon a friend from H arvard University
dropped in to see him by appointment. H e entered the house and
was shown the room where the great poet was sitting looking at a
piece o f paper on which were five lines in pencil. T he caller ad
dressed him by n a m e; but L ongfellow seemed not to hear him . H is
eyes were fixed, and seemed to look miles beyond the paper. H is
face was lighted by a sweetness and glory that would beggar words.
N ot a muscle moved. T he visitor took a seat and waited. Ten
minutes passed, and then the pencil wrote more lines with rapidity,
and the w ork was over. A n im m ortal thought had gone down on
paper where it could not be lost. T he poet turned slow ly to the
visitor, saw him , rose and took him by the hand and said, “ Have
you ju st com e?”
T he poet, M arini, when absorbed in a reverie that produced great
thoughts fo r his adm iring countrym en and the w orld at large, was
severely burned by a fire and seemed to have no consciousness of it
until he was dragged away.
One day Napoleon before the battle that made him stand out as
the greatest general o f all times, was alone in his tent. Officers passed
and paused, and did not enter. T he warrior’ s head was bowed, and
his chin seemed to rest on his coat, while his b ig eyes were glaring
at a chart that he had drawn. “ H ere the Austrians w ill advance.
They w ill be broken in halves here.” A n d he went on through a maze
o f com plications that were understood only by him self. So the

battle went. So the enemy lost. Every detail occurred as he had
planned it. This was not the prediction of some transaction that
would suit the fortune teller, but it was based on the follow in g
p rocess:
There were many movements offered the Austrians. T heir general
would look over the field and decide what seemed to be the best, and
that he would adopt. In such case the French would m eet the
action in a certain way. Then the new choice would arise, and
the enemy w ould make it by a certain movement. This would invite
a check from the French by a shifting of their p ositio n ; and so the
form ations were seen in advance, not as they would be, but as they
would most likely b e ; and the reverie proved correct.
T o foresee a fact and to foresee a probability are not the same
thing. W hat a man will do in nine chances out o f ten, is not fortune
tellin g ; it is an inspired guess, or the fru it o f careful judgm ent, or
the drawing o f an almost certain probability.
It is said of A ngelo, the greatest architect, poet, painter and
philosopher, all in one, that ever lived, that he conceived all his
achievements in reveries. H is biography, and that o f every genius
who has trod the earth, is the story o f a life-lon g reverie.
B ut history is fu ll o f such episodes.
It is the practical, everyday side o f the subject that is most im
portant to the students o f this work.
A trance, in one case in a hundred or so, may be gen uin e; but it
is not a reverie. It is hypnotism , either self-induced or brought on
by an operator. T he conscious m ind is all gone, and cannot connect
with the Other M ind. The same is true o f all hypnotic sleeps that
are deep, and those that are not deep are dead lapses, which are
the opposite o f reveries.
One of the most remarkable instances of genuine reverie occurred
on Decem ber 31, 1917. A man who two years before had returned
from India under an assumed name, stated that he had been com
pelled to separate from his father and m other, and his w ife and boy,
follow in g a shipwreck. H e would not give his true name nor the
reason fo r concealing his identity. B u t he was a man o f education,
of culture and some wealth. H e wanted to find his father and
mother, and his wife and boy. In a letter he wrote as fo llo w s :
“ There is no sentiment in m y nature. I am a practical man. I
do not believe in the occult sciences, and do n ot want to. Telepathy
THE REVERIE
is undoubtedly a fact. I know nothing one way or the other about

it. I want to find m y fam ily, and cannot locate them. I have tried
ever)'- means at m y disposal. W hat can be done fu rth er?”
H e became one o f the experimenters, starting with n o experience
whatever, and having little faith in the results. B ut he enjoyed the
tests. In a few months he learned to devitalize so that he could
drive all his nervous currents to their centers and thus release the
m ind from its own thoughts in a second o f time when follow in g the
plan to produce the interval. A fter further experiments he was able
to enter a reverie. A t first, in this branch o f the work, he was
afraid of goin g into a trance, but one reverie proved to him that it
was the opposite o f a trance. H e was never sleepy in the reverie,
nor in any m ood like the trance. H e said he was never before so
wide awake.
In the night o f December 31, 1917, he was alone in a lonely house,
where there were com forts, but no companions. H e had fitted up
a room for his own use, which adjoined his sleeping room . This
was on the second floor o f the building, and it was fa cin g to the
Dortheast. In a square tower there was a fireplace which gave out
warmth sufficient to keep the temperature m ild, while the winds out
o f doors blew a gale and a heavy fa ll o f snow was in progress. H e
always loved to watch the snow com ing down, especially as he had
spent so m uch o f his life in In dia, where such storms are fou n d only
in the high mountains.
W ith all lights out and with his back to the dim flames that were
flickering on the hearth, he turned his chair to the b ig northeast
window against which the snow was being driven in fierce gusts.
There was ligh t enough in the fireplace to illum ine the scene out of
doors. This seemed to grow fainter within, but to be more and
m ore visible without. H is m ind was opened to a reverie. W ith
pencil he noted the thoughts that came to him. There was the old
scene o f the shipwreck, the cries o f all on board, the struggle fo r
safety, and the wide separating o f all the members o f his fam ily.
F rom the waters he saw them picked up by a great ship, the view
o f which was so clear that he drew a picture o f it. This brought
the reverie to an end fo r a while. B ut he had the satisfaction o f
having a drawing o f a ship that he had known and could probably
have traced, w ithout revealing his identity. H e again fell into a
reverie. In this he visited the great cities o f Europe, one after
another, and reached one where the signs told the n a tion ality; bui
it was unknown to him. H e wrote down the names o f the signs

and the name o f a street there. This was all. The excitement o f
the experience kept him out of further reverie fo r several hours. A t
the point o f fa llin g asleep in his chair, he heard the chimes of distant
bells announcing the birth o f a new year. In the interval that
follow ed he saw his son, now grown almost beyond recognition,
standing by the side o f a newly-made bride.
D u ring the weeks that follow ed he set in m otion a series of
inquiries concerning the city the signs o f which he had seen so
clearly. H e was inform ed at last that it was o f a certain name. T o
this he traveled, hired a conveyance, and asked to be driven to the
street. H e walked along the buildings, after alighting from the
carriage, until he came upon the very scene that he had witnessed
in his reverie. In the course o f the afternoon he fou n d his son
and the bride, and from them he learned o f the place o f residence
o f his father and mother, who were now quite aged.
H e is sure that these results were ascribable to telepathy, n ot as
a g ift, but as an acquired power.
A woman who was among the experimenters fo r two years and
who had never had any experience in this work p rior to her own
cultivation of the habit of em ptying the m ind, was accustomed to sit
in the tw ilight every evening. She would n ot allow the lights to
be brought into the room as lon g as she could see the figures on
the carpet, as she stated. The result of this love of the tw ilight
was the habit of reverie. On one occasion, she saw nothing, heard
nothing, and felt nothing, but a sense o f chilliness came over her
as soon as she entered the reverie. This she spoke of to her fam ily.
T he next evening she again had the same sense o f chilliness, and
something seemed to denote the idea o f snow and ice. This was more
fixed the third night. On the fourth, she thought she heard the
sound of gold, and that it was still cold er; all chill and snow.
Later on she left the reverie, as it seemed to be of no value to h e r ;
and as soon as she fou n d herself approaching the state, she had
the lights brought in.
A bout a week after that, one evening the m oon was rising in its
fullness in the east over the tops o f low trees, and the scene was so
entrancing that she sat long after the tw ilight had departed. In a
deep reverie she began to think o f a man who was playing as a boy
with her m other, and who suddenly became a full-grow n old man.
In his hand he held out gold, and he stood in the deep snow. Tnese
THE REVERIE
incidents fixed in her m ind the fact that she had, on previous even
ings, had suggestions o f gold and sn ow ; and she placed all these
incidents before her fam ily. They soon agreed that, unless it was
all a mere fancy, there was some relative in the fa r N orth who
had gold fo r her i f she could find him . H er parents were dead,
and she had never known o f an u n cle ; yet this reverie seemed to
point to the fa ct that the boy playing with her m other, and then his
sudden change to an old man, indicated an uncle who had never
been known to her. The m other had died when this daughter was
quite young, and the fam ily had been separated ever since. This
would account fo r the possibility o f there being an uncle.
T he next day her husband began a searching in q u iry ; looked up
the record o f b irth ; and in the course o f a few weeks fou n d that
there had been a brother, and his name. The inquiry was then
carried on in a very simple manner. Letters were addressed to
every tow n in the gold m ining regions where there was a snowy
clim ate; and in the course of tim e com m unication was opened with
the lost uncle. H e had his side of the story to tell, which was that
he had acquired a fortune in gold hunting and wanted to leave it to
the child of his sister, the only relative he knew of, and she had been
lost to him for most o f his lifetim e. H e used to think o f her every
night. T o repeat his w o rd s: “ I would think, and think, and think,
night after night, would I ever see m y sister’ s ch ild ? I wanted to
make her happy. I did not know that she lived. It had been many
years since I had heard o f her, and I would think if she lived I m ight
find her. Then the letter came and m y wish was answered. When
the letter came I was afraid it was a dream or ghost, it seemed such
a strange message. M y thinking won out fo r me. I t was that.”
H e was right.
I f you go into a reverie, you w ill pick up out o f the infinite knowl
edge o f everywhere, some intense thought that is seeking you. Tim e
and distance are not always barriers. Such intense thoughts have
been picked u p by a reverie from over the other side o f the w o rld ;
and some have come up out o f a lon g past.
It is all wonderful. Every reverie has its experience. W e have
never known of one that was a mere blank. I f it were, it would be
classed merely as a drowsy affair, and lacking that central intensity
that is so needed to its life.
In a true reverie there is no sleepiness. A ll is wide awake. The
m ind starts with excessive activity and the seeming im possibility
o f sleeping. T hen conies the deliberate attempt to break in upon

the thought by a sharp change o f subject that is in no way connected
with what has been in the m ind. The devitalizing o f the body drives
the m agnetism in upon the nerve centers, where it is greatly intensi
fied ; and the m ind at this juncture is throw n quickly in to “ no-
man’ s-land.” It is all a w ork of purpose, with no d riftin g or lagging.
W e have always taught the im portance o f having an object in view
at all stages of the day or year. The lack of a definite purpose in
what you do or think is exactly as disastrous as the lack o f a port
to a sailing vessel, or the lack o f aim in a war. The useless army
goes forth to the field, w ithout general, or organization, or design.
I t drifts. I f life is carried on in such a way, there is bound to be
failure. In the use of the reverie, which is capable o f being made
the best frien d a m an or wom an ever had, there is the opportunity
o f w in ning w onderful success i f there is any point in doing so.
H eaven helps those who help themselves, which means that it does
n ot help the aimless individual.
E very blessing should be turned into fruitage.
The reverie, in which the two minds stand on the threshold o f the
same realm, brings knowledge o f the best ways to proceed in every
phase o f existence. N othin g is too small or trifling fo r its attention.
B u t there must be a power to draw it, and that power is purpose.
I n the absence o f such a magnet as purpose, the reverie is receptive
only o f the intensity o f others towards you. I t is to show these
opposites that the two cases were included in this cycle. L et us
compare them.
In the first case o f reverie, the man who had n ot seen his fam ily
fo r m any years, had in m ind the deliberate and intense purpose
o f finding them. H e thus drew the facts to himself.
In the second case the wom an in reverie had no wish or purpose;
and this left her m ind open to the intense wishing o f someone of
whom she had never heard, and of whose existence she could not
have given a thought.
These are directly opposite types o f reverie.
The second draws the intense mental activity from another person,
no matter how fa r away. There are abundant proofs o f this kind
o f action to establish the law under which it works. I t is seemingly
a haphazard process, but obeys fixed laws o f life.
The first is by far the m ore valuable type o f process in the lon g
r u n ; for it need never fail, and is a constant agen cy; while the
THE REVERIE
second must have a counterpart, and this is not always available.

I t is not a probability that some one is seeking to send an intense
thought to you every time you sit down to a reverie.
W e believe in the practical side o f everything that pertains to
this life. Sentiment has its place, and may serve a fine purpose,
but livin g is a real thing that must make the first demands on
one’ s efforts. I t is the m ost practical thing in this w orld to have
tangible answers to the follow in g questions:
1. W h y are you in the w orld ?
2. D o you want to be a livin g being, or is life o f little use to y ou ?
3. I f it is o f genuine use to you, in what way is it useful-?
4. Is your life of genuine use to anyone else than yourself ?
5. Is your livin g on earth o f any g ood to the w orld outside o f
those who are connected with y ou ?
6. W hat occupation have you now that is o f a high value to y ou ?
7. W hat do you have each year over and above what you earn?
That is, what is your net gain at each years’ end?
8. H ow lon g w ill your present occupation and earning capacity
remain with you, in your opinion ?
9. I f you were to be stricken with a lon g period o f sickness what
have you to fa ll back upon fo r the support o f yourself and those
who are dependent on your h elp?
10. I f you were to lose your present earning opportunities, either
in business or em ploym ent, to what could you turn fo r other earning
opportunities ?
11. A t the present rate you are saving each year, what amount o f
m oney or property w ill you have when the tim e comes fo r you to
retire or suffer a breakdown that w ill throw you upon you r savings?
12. D o you believe in h idin g your talents and letting them rust
with non-use?
13. D o you believe that i f you advance into the years that are
weighty w ith age, and have your lamps not trim m ed, and no readi
ness fo r that era, you can spend the declining period o f your life
in peace and com fort?
14. A re you one o f those persons who, by a w rong interpretation
o f the precept, “ take n o thought o f the m orrow ,’ ' let things go
as they w ill, and believe in not crossing bridges u ntil you get to
them ? A n d do you know that these two monstrous m isinterpreta
tions have led to m ore deaths in the poorhouse, in misery and abject
suffering, in suicide and the horrors of self-debasement at that time
in human existence when the call w ill b e : B rin g forth the talents
entrusted to you and show what you have done with th e m ; or, in
other words, how have you spent the days and years as they passed
by with fleeting feet?
15. D o you know that to-day is all that is yours ? That to-m orrow
is the accum ulation o f all the to-days that have been yours to
im prove? T hat to-m orrow is the sum total o f to-days? T hat your
to-days make the new opportunities fo r other to-days? D o you
know that it is N O W , and no other tim e, that you are endowed with
privilege, opportunity, and h elp ? That the person who lets N O W
go by in uselessness w ill pay fo r the default sooner or la ter; and
that there is never a chance fo r the inevitable future to wipe out the
neglect.
16. I n what way has to-day been o f use to you or to anyone else ?
17. In what way w ill to-m orrow be of use to you or to anyone else ?
18. W hat is the goal or purpose o f the com ing year in your life ?
19. W hat is the goal or purpose o f your existence on earth?
20. When your career w ill have ended, what have you gained by
it in definite purpose ?
21. D o you think that you can atone fo r days and years o f wasted
existence by religious inclination later on, or by charity?
22. D o you know that indiscrim inate charity, o f which more than
eighty per cent is to-day, is m aking a people o f degenerates from
whom is being taken the self-dependence necessary fo r true life, and
to whom is being given all the free scope o f crim inal tendencies that
vice could w ant?
23. D o you know that true charity consists in taking care o f the
needy in fact, n ot the self-m ade-needy; and in opening the way fo r
all other classes to earn what they receive, and that the opposite
method is in vogue to-day, fo r which the next few years w ill yield
a reward in blood and anarchy? D o you know that thousands of
wealthy m en and women think that all they have to do to be useful
citizens is to give when asked, and not to know something o f the
uses made with their g ifts?
24. D o you know what is meant by wasting tim e?
25. D o you know that m inutes and hours are actual property
belonging to the universal fu n d o f wealth, out o f which a share is
given to every individual to use, and that such tim e has both a
money value and a personal value?
26. D o you know that you can rob this fu n d o f m uch value by
THE REVERIE
idle waste o f minutes and hours, in which nothing is gained fo r

yourself or fo r oth ers; and that you w ill be held chargeable with
this deficit?
27. Do you know that, while m oney and property are parts of
the same physical earth out o f which you were born and should be
won in order to im prove part of the talents com m itted to your care,
there are other gains more im portant, one o f which is an enriched
m in d ?
28. D o you know that there are m any studies and m any lines of
work that enrich the m in d ?
29. D o you know that the passing o f minutes and hours in cheap
amusements, in idle reading, in flashy excitement, and in an in
difference to the good influences that attend all useful lives, is a
robbery of the values that are entrusted to your k eepin g? That
there are wholesome amusements, noble reading, and splendid am bi
tions that furnish the higher form s of pleasure?
30. D o you know that, in proportion as you ignore these bettor
things, you come into a spirit o f discontent, blame your unlucky
star, even curse or want to curse your environments, and grow mean in
every w a y ; and that the devotees o f all bad habits take their down
ward course through this indifference to the good things o f life ?
31. D o you know that there can be no success and no happiness
in this world unless you have a fixed goal fo r which you live, and a
daily purpose to g a in ; and that the rewards o f heaven in another
w orld are not the fixed goal o f th is? Three goals are necessary:
1. One for the day, to change from day to day if need be.
2. One fo r the general battle o f physical life.
3. One fo r that which follow s.
I f the first two are maintained, the th ird w ill take care o f itself.
32. W hat is your goal fo r to-m orrow ?
33. W hat is your fixed goal fo r this life ?
Here are questions fo r you to take to your reverie. They are
made to suit every condition, from poverty to wealth, from ignorance
to wisdom, and from crim e to religion. T hey w ill therefore come
into your life in one department or another. Y o u are probably not
a crim inal, and certainly not afflicted w ith abject poverty. But
whoever you are, take these thirty-three inquiries into your reveries
and see where you w ill emerge. The first result w ill be to awaken
into your m ind the necessity o f an am bition fo r each day and a
general ambition fo r life.
N ow it is a fa ct that you have no such ambition, and you do

not know what kind o f goal you could summon up fo r to-m orrow or
for a lifetim e. B ut if you are interested in that subject, take these
questions to a reverie; and be sure that you have worked your way
through the several cycles preceding this in order to be able to
empty you r m ind and find access to the overtures of the Other M ind.
'The first th in g that w ill result is the knowledge of what is best fo r
you. In the reverie, the Other M ind that always tends upward when
left to its own impulses, w ill speak in 110 uncertain terms of the
work for you to set about accom plishing. I t w ill not be the work
of giving som ething; but perhaps the task o f shaping things so that
you, if wealthy, w ill be able to aid others in finding opportunities to
do m anly and womanly duties in a spirit o f independence which is
the noblest end of all labor. Show someone how to become independ
ent, is the grandest o f all charities. B ut you may be poor yourself.
I f so, you need to see the way to store up a fu n d that w ill ward off
the dependence o f old age.
T he highest goal in life is thorough independence.
It is not the discarding o f the sympathy and fellowship o f others,
but it is discarding their outstretched hand in an unequal exchange.
I f you are n ot now independent financially fo r life, let that be a goal
that shall lead you on. It is always noble. I t tries the best temper
o f the soul to shake off the shackles o f dependence.
This is physical, but you are physical, and your body and all it
contains is the product of the physical earth. M oney, house, cloth
ing, food , jewels, inventions, com forts, all come from the physical
earth. A rt, colors, sound, m usic, beauty, happiness, all are born
of the same physical earth. E verything is good that is well used.
B ut the m ind is more than physical. I f there is a soul it is a
part o f the Other M ind, or else is revealed by that great realm ; and
the mental world demands daily attention. A grand am bition is to
learn m ore o f the m ind through its use.
Here are tw o ambitions that overtop in im portance all else:
1. T o be independent o f the charity o f others, even down through
the years o f fad ing life.
2. T o learn more o f the m ind.
Take these thirty-three questions with you to your reveries, fo r
they have been written fo r the purpose o f stim ulating the habit.
Bead them again and again and think o f their answers, as far as they
relate to you. They w ill set you to thinking deeply. L ig h t w ill
TEE REVERIE
com e to you, and it w ill be a great flood o f light, measured wholly

by your keen desire fo r its help. Learn to be consistent, to be con
servative, to be careful, to use judgm ent, to calm all your unrest,
to be steady, to be strong, to better your environment, and to rise
all the tim e in the world. This does not mean to gain power, but
to gain character. T hen you w ill be happy, prosperous and royal.
These are the nobler themes o f a reverie.
A man and woman should set apart some minutes each day fo r this
purpose. I f no other tim e is at hand, select the last period o f wake
fulness ju st before fa llin g asleep at night. B ut keep the thirty-
three questions in m ind always.
A man told us that he had acquired a daily am bition or goal which
was very simple in its e lf; and it contained a very few w ords: “ Waste
five minutes less each day.” In his reverie that was based on this
am bition he fou n d inform ation that gave him something that would
im prove the time that had been sacrificed upon the altar o f the
daily paper, and the superabundant magazine, or in cards, gossip
and fault-finding. H e took the measure o f him self and the w orld
about him , and saw where he could prepare fo r som ething higher
than had been his lot hitherto. A n d he rose out o f him self day by
day u ntil he became a surprise to him self and his friends. There
can be no failure in such a course.
I t would require a very low m ind to fa il to see the advantages o f
cultivating the habit o f reverie. There has been n oth in g accom
plished in the world except through this channel. T ry to think
how m any things in the past five thousand years have happened
to give impetus to the progress o f mankind. W hat deed has won
more fo r the world than any other ? T hat was born in reverie. W hat
battle has been fou gh t fo r freedom that was n ot the product o f rev
erie? W hat act o f heroism, o f great achievement, o f invention, of
art, o f architecture, of literature, o f poetry, o f discovery, that was
n ot the offspring o f this h abit? Im agine Columbus setting sail fo r
the new hemisphere w ithout having been given ligh t to believe that
the w orld was round. Other adventurers had thought it possible;
but this one m an gave him self up to the study o f the problem until
the Other M ind, standing on the threshold o f the brain, told him
to go on.
The righ t thing, the great thing, is flashed into the w orking in
telligence by this power.
The first architecture o f the ages was a m ou n d ; the next was a
m odification o f that sim ple pile o f dirt, and so through the centuries
new ideas crept into the m ind o f man until the dome o f St. Peter’s
rose to kiss the sky. In that sublime structure may be fou n d the
livin g thoughts that were conceived one by one in the years through
which it was plan n ed ; fo r nothing was left to accident.
T he first boat was a r a ft ; the next had sides; the third was cu rv e d ;
and out o f the elements o f sim plicity the elaborate craft o f com
merce came to grace the seas; until at last the floating palace glided
in m ajesty over the waters to unite awaiting continents.
In every im provem ent may be seen some thought that came to the
light o f life during the reverie of the m in d ; and it could come in
no other way. “ I want a new idea in this piece o f m achinery,”
says the president o f a great company. “ Give me till m orning and
I will have it,” said the man to whom was entrusted the solving
o f the problem . H e went to his stu d y; he locked the d o o rs; he
drew the shades; he shut out all distracting th ou ghts; then he took
up the matter with all the eagerness and intensity o f the hunter
whose life depended on being guided into the righ t direction fo r his
game. H e studied and thought and delved ; and nothing came.
Then he took up a com ic magazine and looked through its pages fo r
five minutes. Then he looked again at the m odel, and he studied
some more. H e now began to think and ponder, and to let his m ind
have wide range. Then he shifted the run o f the m ind and looked
into his home. W hat was his fam ily doin g at that h ou r? Did
they want him there? W ere they lon ely? Once m ore his m ind
came to the model, and at last he stopped. H e let it em pty itself
and he looked at nothing. In that second o f tim e that brings great
discoveries into being, there flashed into his brain the needed idea,
and the battle was won. This is the story that the man tells o f one
o f the m ost im portant improvements in m odern machinery.
The interval may be prolonged fo r minutes and even hours.
T he m editation that attends the deeper studies o f difficult things
is often a night in length. W ritings that have done more fo r hum an
ity than m any other agencies, are the w ork o f the night, when all
is still and the reveries m ay be extended into the com ing day. D ick
ens speaks o f the conception o f his Christmas Carol as the g ift o f a
night o f such th ou gh t; and, had he written nothing else, that little
gem w ould have made him fam ous. It will live centuries hence a ftr'1'
all his larger productions have been forgotten. It was the one sub
lime inspiration of the last century. It stands as p roof o f the ex
THE REVERIE
istence o f two m inds, fo r Dickens him self in his working thoughts

was a man quite the opposite from this remarkable creation. H e
was as m uch surprised at its com ing in to being as was the rest
o f the world.
The grander themes o f life have been the inviting lures to reveries,
through the mazes o f which have been brought forth the advance
armies of progress. W om en have had a large share in these achieve
ments. A ll grades o f greatness are represented in this line o f march.
Som e are the leaders whose names w ill g o down to the end o f the
centuries. Others w ill be forgotten in less than a hundred years;
and some w ill perish when they die in earth. In times o f a great
onward movement for the betterment o f the nation, all the people
are alive to the call o f the hour, and they sit and think o f the
duties that await them until, like a single mass m oving to one goal,
they proceed to their work o f un-m aking and re-making.
B ut there is a com m on realm in all eras where every man and
every wom an may do good work and great work. L ife consists o f
duties and com plex problems which cannot be solved by the w orking
mind. T he more it is argued, the m ore obscure becomes the way
o f procedure. Men are shirking m arriage because o f its expense
and demands on their freedom . W om en, married or single, are
seeking places o f em ploym ent many o f w hich are in the legitim ate
sphere o f the stronger sex. T he home, where it exists at all, is
d riftin g toward the apartment buildings, with all the glory of the
homestead gone, and the m agnetic force o f the fam ily extinguished.
S im plicity is im possible and there is only a fran tic struggle to keep
alive.
On this account we find from the many sources o f inform ation
at hand that ninety per cent, o f the m en are in a mental state o f
chaos, fo r there can be no am bition o f m in d or life where there is
no prospect o f escaping the entanglements o f this age. M en are
asking the one question, W hat shall I d o ? W om en are still more
deeply interested in the same problem on their own side o f the
case. Once they asked, W hen shall I m arry? N ow they ask, Shall
I ever m arry? Or, if m arried, how lon g shall I be com pelled to put
up with this state?
Once when there were few grin din g influences w eighing down
the race, m en had time to think, and wom en had tim e to contem
plate. N ow they have hardly time to re a d ; and he who reads much,
and thinks little, learns nothing. In the olden times, when women
were largely guided by intuition o f which they were the master

m inds, they were more safely led into their destinies. N ow they
are goin g in the opposite direction.
T he papers you read, the books you read, the magazines you read,
the works you study, all have been produced by people who think ;
and you, who devote all your spare time to reading what others have
been thinking, are sacrificed to the m ost useless waste o f tim e ever
known since first the history of life began.
There are insurmountable difficulties awaiting every man and
woman who cannot find tim e to think, to contemplate, to dwell in
the reverie. The physical m ind is the slave o f events. It cannot
show the way out o f any difficulty. The Other H in d is the true
guide. In the days when men and wom en had tim e to think, to
contemplate, and to enter the reverie, they were masters o f them
selves in larger measure than to-day ; they conceived the better tilings
for the world, and they participated in every good movement.
Y o u m ay search through the past from the day when the first line
o f human records was inscribed, down to this very minute, and you
will not find a step that has been taken onward that was not born
in the reverie. Y o u may hunt through the toil that is being enacted
at this very hour, and i f you could lift the veil that closes ou t the
toilers from view of men, you would see them alone, secluded, think
ing, contem plating and in reverie. Some in their offices, some in
their studies, some in their homes, and some in their little rooms
hidden from all intrusion, are thinking out the problem s fo r the
next era o f advancement. I f you break in upon them, you w ill ruin
their work, for they must be alone.
Y e t these real people are comparatively few. H ow many of them
do you kn ow ? I f all that makes this era more civilized than the
age o f stone, is due to the power o f new ideas evolved in the reverie;
if whatever o f human honesty and tenderness has come up out o f the
barbarous past is the fru it o f the reverie; if all of the hope and the
promise o f a com ing era o f peace and splendor is being shaped to
day in the reveries of men and women,— what, then, is the value
that you place 011 this realm where two m inds almost meet, where
the error-laden consciousness is swept by the free airs o f an im m acu
late zone that knows no mistake and admits no fa ilu re?
T hin k o f it.
Learn how to enter it.
SEVENTEENTH CYCLE
OU R F R IE N D S are measured o ft
B y spoken word and tone
W hile in the heart no smile
E xists, nor gracious thought
Inspires the kind address
O f outward courtesy.
ITCH has been written o f thought transference, and very

little about the transference o f feeling. Y e t . thought
is supposed to exist in words, and is called thought
because there are words by which it can be expressed,
while feelin g is wholly a wordless and thoughtless
experience. T he first, last and the m ost conspicuous ideas o f life
are those that em body feelings, o f which there are every variety
and grade.
I f there were no human beings in existence, and all else remained,
there w ould be ideas w ithout lim it as there are now. I f hum anity
were all deaf, dumb and blind, so that no one could read, write,
speak or see words, there would be ideas in abundance, and trans
actions as numerous possibly as now. There could be art and archi
tecture, m achinery and the com plicated details o f existence. By
this view we see how small a part in the transactions o f the world is
played by that class o f ideas that cannot be expressed except by
words.
A feelin g is stronger than a thought. T he latter is the result o f
som ething that has occurred in the past, even where it looks to
future action. A feelin g is the individual him self. It is the livin g
o f the th in g or condition that makes the thought at times. If
a drama were to be constructed w ith noth in g but thoughts, it could
not be acted. T he play that the manager m ost dreads is the kind
that he calls “ talky.” H e savs the public pay to see life enacted,
not to hear what some folks have to say on the subject. T alk is
necessary, unless a pantomime is on the boards; but the less talk
and the more action, the better is the play. Bernhardt, in her
greatest scene in L a Tosca, says hardly a dozen words, and there
are many minutes when she is silent, but the drama is fu ll o f in
tense action. This is true in greater or less degree of all great plays.
T he actor is the m edium through which human feelings are por
trayed.
Telepathy is a transfer o f knowledge from the outer world through
the Other M ind into the realm o f consciousness where it is caught
by the prin ciple o f the echo which has been fu lly described in the
preceding cycles. The com position o f the w ord telepathy indicates
the com m unication o f feeling rather than thought.
It thus coincides with the first, last and deepest experiences o f
existence; fo r it deals with a vast realm o f facts fo r which there
are no words and almost no thoughts. A s has been many times
said by one author or another, there are countless experiences that
are all the tim e filling our m inds which we either do not recognize
or are unable to understand. I f the whole truth could be known,
human intelligence is a mass o f knowledge that wastes from lack o f
u se; like the courts o f a mysterious realm whose outer grounds are
barren and give little promise o f the flowers, the fruits, the coolin g
shades and musical groves within. We do not know what we are, for
we rem ain untaught o f what we hold within our minds.
There is no development so im portant and so useful as that which
shows the way to recognize these powers and so interpret their
meaning.
T he first step in all com m unications between persons present with
each other, and between those who are absent, is to know what are
the genuine feelings they entertain. T o the student who says that
he understands that telepathy is the transference o f words from one
m ind to another, there is the answer that words often lie, and
feelings cannot.
1. Feelings are the facts themselves.
2. W ords are what is said o f facts.
Y o u r friend is unusally pleasing in his m orning salute, and
you are charm ed; but is he acting a part, or is the kind expression
the true inw ard fe e lin g ? L o n g before telepathy was ever written
upon as a science, its art had been in use by those who are skilled
in reading human nature. It is said that the ability to know how
TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING
much truth there is in the spoken or written words, is an educa

tion in itself. B ut the fa ct is, it is a slow development and success
is attained as the result of many bitter experiences.
“ W ho is to be believed?” is a frequent inquiry. “ W hat is to
be believed?” is fu lly as important.
The Other M ind is never deceived. I t knows for the reason that
everything that exists is an open book to it. The child who has
never been forced to tell a lie, speaks what it means, as far as it is
com m unicative. Adults are diplom atic, which means that the truth
is better not told in most cases. Some do not lie, but they refrain
from telling what they know and all they know. D iplom acy in
national interchange is skillful evasion.
A n intent or purpose is a feeling. I f a child or adult has already
form ed the design not to obey, or not to tell the truth, or otherwise
do wrong, that intent is a fact, and exists as a feelin g or refusal
or deception in the m ind o f the child or adult. I f some one meets
you and professes friendship, the words used are words, and the
real intent is the fa c t; and if such person hates you while, fo r a
purpose, he seeks to gain your good w ill by a pretense o f kindness,
the hate is the fact.
N ow telepathy does not transfer the words, fo r they are not fact,
in a case like that. When the words and the intent are alike, telep
athy w ill transfer the intent, and often the words, in case they are
uttered to another person out of your hearing. B ut when the in
tent is one thing and the words another, then only the intent is
conveyed. Experience has shown this to be the process, and it is
based on the actual transmission o f the fact rather than what is said.
K now ledge exists and is carried from m ind to m in d ; but words that
are lies do n ot stand fo r an existing fact.
Dishonesty is a feeling.
It is com m on, and perhaps is the m ost com m on feelin g in exist
ence, next to selfishness. T he latter is also a feeling. So are re
gard, generosity, happiness, trust, confidence, love, faith, forgiveness
and scores of good traits o f human nature. On the other hand,
all the evil moods o f the heart and m ind are feelings. A man who
has made a special study o f the practice of this branch o f telepathy
reports many surprising successes, and others have join ed him in
sim ilar results, all attributable to the development o f the power to
throw the conscious m ind into “ no-m an’s-]and” at w ill. Many o f
the cases stated here are from his rep orts; but some are from men
and wom en who are in no way connected w ith him. B efore the
practice o f this part o f the w ork was undertaken by a systematic
plan, the results were of no consequence.
1.— A man had fou r acquaintances among the women o f his circle,
all of whom were alike fascinating to him . H e did n ot experience
what is called love, fo r i f he had there would have been one o f the
fou r who w ould have been his choice. T hey were all in love with
him , as events afterwards proved. W hen in the presence o f each,
he thought her superior to the other three. S till he was unable to
make up his mind. T o a friend he made the statement that he had
a profou n d respect and adm iration fo r them all. F rom their seem
in g interest in him and from other sources he made up his m ind
that he could have as his w ife any one o f the fou r he m ight select.
In this belief he avoided them all fo r fear o f com m itting him self and
m isleading them, or of becom ing involved in obligations that would
put him on his honor. A ll the parties belonged to very wealthy
families.
In his quandary he went away fo r a lon g time, hoping that, on his
arrival, he w ould find three o f them engaged and one rem ainin g;
and in this way settle the problem . In his absence he devoted h im
self to the study and practice o f telepathy. In the course o f tim e
be made preparations fo r return. Before doing so, while fou r thou
sands miles from the ladies, he undertook to draw their m inds by
fixing the purpose to do so in his own th ou g h t; then em ptying his
m ind by devitalization and shifting the flow o f ideas as described
in this work. H e conceived the idea o f placing the fo rm and features
of one o f the ladies in a picture that he made mentally, and creating
the determination to locate her in a reverie; then carry on the general
plan o f drawing knowledge from that source. The first evening
he had some success, fo r there follow ed every attempt to em pty his
m ind, a clear feeling of coldness and indifference that made him
uncom fortable, as if some one had told him to go away and keep
away. This was repeated fou r times that evening. On the next
night, the same experience came to him.
T he third evening he made a mental picture o f another o f the
ladies, and attempted to draw knowledge o f her. N othin g distinct
came o f it during the reverie; but, when he arose and looked at
him self in the m irror, his eyes were moist. I t was a slight matter,
and he did n ot think it w orthy o f attention, or in any way con
nected w ith the effort to obtain inform ation. T he next evening he
repeated the attempt and the result was a heavy feelin g o f sadness
to which he could not attribute any meaning. B ut the next evening
he had a distinct feeling come over him that tears had been shed
fo r his absence; perhaps once only and perhaps at the tim e o f his
g o in g ; or perhaps at this time.
A s the experiments were interesting he resolved to compare the
two cases, and threw his m ind and mental picture back upon the
first woman. In the reverie that follow ed he was in coldness and
ch ill, with a feelin g that all the w orld was indifferent to him , and
cared nothing fo r him . H e was glad to leave this part o f the work,
and seek the next mental picture. A gain came over him the feel
in g of sadness and the m oistening of the eyes. B y this tim e he had
great faith in his progress.
The next night he threw his whole m ind on the third woman,
and was only partly successful, when he made the sh ift to the
em pty m ind. T he feelin g was too vague to be interpreted. He
repeated the process the next three nights, but could not keep
from reverting to the first two of the ladies, and this was largely
the result of careless work. Y e t there was a something vague that
came over him. A fter another trial he felt a feelin g of a rasping,
irritating nature. Subsequent trials confirm ed this. T he fourth
lady received attention, and in the course o f his experiments he
succeeded in drawing a bright, cheerful feeling. These fou r re
sults were recorded, and the names of the women placed against
eacli. There was indifference, sadness, tem per, cheerfulness.
H e wrote to his mother and, fo r the first tim e since his absence,
m entioned the names o f these friends, and asked her in the strictest
secrecy to ascertain by indirect inquiry the status o f his friendship
with all fou r of th em ; what, if anything, they had to say o f him , and
which one of the fo u r seemed to be m ost kindly in feelin g to him.
T o make these inquiries required something more than ordinary skill,
as it was n ot policy to have his interest in the matter made known to
them. T he only reply that bore on the subject was that the first
o f the ladies had become engaged to another man. This explained,
possibly, why she was indifferent to him .
T he date o f the letter had som ething to do w ith the p roo f o f
the after h istory; fo r it was written before there was any possibility
of Ins being in form ed o f the way matters stood at his home city.
On returning he fou n d that the second lady, the sad one, was o f a
gloom y disposition, and that this habit had been grow ing on her
of late. T he third was soured by her failure to succeed in her am

bition. T he fou rth and last was o f a bright and cheerful nature,
as he fou n d when he made her several frequent visits; and, on pro
posing and being accepted, he confirmed his estimate o f her by the
subsequent marriage. T he fou r accounts in his records when abroad
w'ere accurate, and they fitted the identical wom en o f w hich they
were made.
The value of this com plicated case is in the fa ct that there
cannot be a charge o f accident or coincidence in the tests. There
are two explanations of the manner in which the knowledge was
tran sferred :
1. E ither the feelings were taken from the character of each o f
the women at the tim e he made the tests.
2. Or the feelings were transmitted to his Other M ind many
months before, and came forth at the tim e o f the tests. This
latter view may be correct, as the next case w ill seem to indicate.
2.— A m an who had known a woman ten years before, and who
had been dead eight years, threw his m ind upon her with an intense
power in a desire to know something of her existence, as he did not
then have inform ation o f her death. H e had loved her, and had
refused to marry any other woman. She declined his offer then
because he had not the means to support a h om e; but she said when
he had got on in the w orld that he m ight hunt her up, and she
would then know her m ind better. They were separated, and his
letters to her were returned, having marks on them indicating that
she had m oved away. H e had since grown wealthy, and had been
attracted to the study o f telepathy, by which he was enabled to con
centrate his thoughts, then end them by em ptying the m ind, and
draw som ething interesting out o f the Other M ind.
H is experience in the trials resulted in the transmission o f a
feeling o f poverty, the lack o f money as well as the necessities o f
life, and a sinking sensation. This he fou n d repeated on three suc
cessive evenings as he made the trials. On the last evening there
flashed across his m ind the name o f a distant town on a sign at a
railway station, and not far in the rear the shape o f a small house.
H e had faith enough in the matter to make the journey, which was
done under the name of a relative o f hers, as he thought he m ight
secure evidence more readily. H e fou n d that such a house had
stood there but had been to m down five years b e fo re ; and that the
woman had died single in the house eight years before the time o f
his visit. As a large building was standing in place o f the cottage

which he had seen, he was n ot able to have the presence o f the
latter verified until he had made a sketch from his vision. As soon as
he had done this, a real estate agent recalled it, and some fam ily
near-by gave the inform ation o f the fa ct that the woman had lived
there. She had died in poverty, after a lon g illness. The address o f
a woman who had taken care o f her, but who had m oved away, was
secured, and the man made another journey to find her. H e was
then told that this woman, in her last illness, had spoken the name
o f a lover who would gladly have come to her, and m ight have saved
her life had he come in time. The old wom an could not tell the
exact name o f the man, but she gave a name that was close to the
real on e; and this man knew that he was in the m ind o f his old
sweetheart prior to her death in poverty.
H ow the feeling o f poverty and suffering should have come to
him eight years after it was being endured by the woman, he could
not tell. It seemed to him like positive p roof o f the spirit o f the
woman trying to tell him from another sphere o f what she had
suffered in this life. H e could not see any other solution.
B ut there are many clear proofs o f the fact that knowledge w ill
reach the Other M ind during the life o f a person, and w ill there
stay until it is called out by some exciting cause.
In this case the woman was thinking o f him when she was in
dire poverty and in her last illness. Thoughts then are m ost in
tense. T hat feeling was transmitted to his Other M ind, and there it
remained. O f this there is not the slightest doubt. I t was not
known to him because he had no way o f recognizing i t ; and so
the conscious m ind did not connect with it. H ad he, at that tim e
eight years before, been in a reverie, it would have caught his
attention in a flash. H ad his nerves been unstrung so as to empty
his mind, as is often the case, he m ight have seen the wom an’ s form
in her bed o f sickness; or, at the m om ent o f her death, her ghost
m ight have sped past him . N o doubt it did in fa c t ; as such things
occur every m inute and second o f tim e ; but they are known only
to the Other M ind, and fa il fo r lack o f recognition in the conscious
m ind. H ad he been walking by a graveyard at dusk, and in a tim id
state o f the nerves, he m ight have actually witnessed her body float
in g along the road ahead o f him , or com ing to him , with open eyes
and extended hand, and all would have vanished in the tw inkling
o f an eye.
E nough is now known o f the operations o f the Other M in d to

establish the fa ct that it has fu ll consciousness o f all that happens,
and that the reason why its knowledge is not apparent is because
o f the inability o f the ordinary m ind to connect with it in tim e to
catch the echo o f the experience.
Many persons have prom ised while livin g to send messages from
the spirit w orld if they are in it and have the power to do so. Some
messages come back. They almost always relate to some secret
that cou ld have been known to no one else even in life. One man
said, “ I have a secret that will die with me, and if you learn o f that,
you m ay know to a certainty that I am in the spirit world. I
w ill not leave a word spoken o r written to indicate what this secret
i s ; and any inform ation leading to its discovery w ill, i f it comes
after I am dead, be certain p roof o f m y being alive in the spirit
world and trying to com m unicate with you.”
B ut was his argument correct and sound?
A t the very m om ent when he made that statement he transferred
to the m ind o f every person present the secret ; and had any one
of them held a reverie that night or any tim e thereafter, the secret
would have been out, even before he died, as we shall see in another
case. H e did die, and a m edium startled the little w orld by reveal
in g the secret in less than a y ea r; and men o f science hunted it
down and fou n d it to be just as as he had described it. So they
concluded that he was in the spirit world.
STORED T E L E P A T H Y .
3.— In an interesting case like the foregoing, a man who held a

very im portant secret made the same assertion that he w ould not
reveal it until after he died. A society offered a reward o f some
size i f it could have positive p roof o f the genuineness o f the trans
m ission o f the secret after his death. A n outside party said :
“ L et me send you a man who has never seen this man and who
has not been in this country since he was born. L et them come
together but a m inute and then separate, and not speak while to
gether or know o f each other afterwards. H e w ill unearth the
secret.”
This was done. A series o f reveries follow ed in the land from
w hich the other party had come. T he first o f the trials produced
nothing, n or the next th ree; but the fourth showed a forest and a
line o f trees so carefully and slightly marked that it would have
been im possible fo r a stranger to have fou n d the way to it. Then

011 three more reveries on succeeding evenings, the same thing was
repeated, and nothing added. A year went by, and nothing was
added. Several lengthy letters had been written in that tim e ; but
the matter came to a standstill. The slight progress that had been
made was kept a profound secret, and every way guarded to prevent
assistance reaching the experimenter.
One evening when he was alone and more or less depressed, a
sensation of great caution came over h im ; a very strange feeling.
H e seemed to be h idin g something or had the feeling that he had
something that m ust be hidden. I t was a box made o f iron and
containing some papers under seal. H e could not see it, but had the
sensation of that fact. Then the forest came up in his m ind. Then
an old man g oin g along stealthily and placing the iron box in a deep
hole in the ground. T he trees of the forest were so close together
that they seemed to be solid in view, and the path very frail.
The path led out into a stony field, and this extended to the dark
edge o f a town that seemed very black in its streets which were
scarcely visible. In the roadway, there was a pole and three low
houses stood close b y ; then there were no houses fo r fifty rods or
m o re; and then the town appeared sparsely built. A fter having
the view o f this place in his m ind fo r a while it began to grow
light on the right hand side o f the cluster o f buildings. H ere he
assumed the east to b e ; and his construction o f the vision was that
the old man went out in the early hours o f the m orning before the
dawn, and while it was yet dark, and hid his box in the forest, which
was in a northerly direction. The scene whirled, and he felt
the presence o f an old stone house on a h ill far from the town.
This he took to be the home o f the man. T he style o f architecture
disclosed the nationality. A series o f letters to parties in all the
towns of that country of the approximate size o f the one he had
the presence o f in his reveries, brought a response in a short time.
H e had asked if on the north side o f the town there was a pole in
the road, and three low houses by themselves, separated from the
main tow n ; also if there was a stone house built in a certain way,
which he described, in some other place near the town. W ith in
credible accuracy he fou n d all he sou ght; but he concealed the forest
incident.
Then he wrote that he was ready to report.
B eing a man o f wealth and an investigator, he delved into the
test fo r the gain it m ight bring to science. T he society abroad

asked him to retain his reports, to seal them, and place them in the
custody o f some safe deposit company where he could n ot get them
w ithout an order from the agent o f the organization. The old man
was n ot expected to live long.
B efore he died he s a id : “ I still aver that m y secret shall die with
me. Then I do not care who knows it.”
A bout seven months after his death, a m edium was at work giving
out the inform ation of the hidden box in the dark fo re st; but she
never got further. T he sealed report has ju st been opened, and
the box has been found. It involves the inheritance of a great estate
and the legal disputes arising will either be settled by compromise
or be brought to trial in court.
H ere is a case where the secret, as the old man stated, was his
alone. B u t when he m et the other man, all the details went into
the m ind and there remained until, a lon g tim e afterward, they
were drawn out by reveries.
There is a series o f cases where the facts that die w ith people
have been lodged before death in the Other M ind o f some person
and then extracted in some way.
4. — A you ng woman who was in love with a man, a fe w nights
before the wedding, which was to occur on short notice, had a deep
reverie, and in it she felt strongly that this man was deceiving her.
T he fa ct that he was already married could not be shaken off. She
had known o f him fo r three years, and had known him personally
several m onths, during which time he seemed to be better than the
average men, and to have an excellent position o f employment.
There was every reason why they should be h a p p y ; but this feeling
o f his being m arried was too strong to be resisted. She arranged
an interview at once and told him that she had received a positive
knowledge o f his marriage with another woman, but w ould n ot tell
him more. H e finally admitted it and s a id :
“ I did m arry, but it was a very miserable marriage. She was
untrue to me, and I left her. I have been told by friends that she
has died.”
A s the man seemed to be as much in love with the you ng woman
as she was with him , and as it would hurt him in his employment
to have the w edding postponed, she consented to it, and they became
man and wife. T he form er w ife lived in E ngland, more than
three thousand miles away. The second w ife instituted proceedings
of inquiry w ithout the knowledge o f her husband, and fou n d that

the first w ife had died shortly before the second wedding. She
also learned that she had been discarded by her fam ily, who reported
her dead. Thus the second w ife had no cause to believe that her
husband intended to deceive her. She took a desperate chance and
won.
5. — A woman thirty years o f age was called by ’phone to her
husband’ s office. She started to g o ; but on her way a dozen different
thoughts came into her m ind, as the message had been sent by a
young woman clerk who merely said H u rry, and shut off the ’ phone.
C om ing from the woman clerk, there was no reason to keep her from
going. In the m idst of her thoughts, she suddenly had a strong feel
in g that she was wanted at home. T his feeling was so great that she
obeyed it, and on tu rn in g the corner where a policem an stood asked
him to keep his eye on her house, as she feared there was trouble
there. She had gone but a few rods more when a closed carriage
drew up to the house, and a man g ot out while the other remained
in the fro n t seat. The wom an turned, beckoned to the officer, and
began to run to the house. It seemed that it had been her custom
to leave the back door unlocked, as there was someone in or near the
kitchen all the tim e to guard it. The man who had alighted from
the carriage went to the door, entered the house, went upstairs to a
room that he seemed to know all about, took a child in his arms,
threw a potato bag over it, and was em erging with the bag when
the wom an stood in fron t o f him and the officer com ing rapidly.
T he man in the carriage drove away in haste, and escaped. T he
man with the bag was captured.
The appearance o f a man with a bag would hardly attract atten
tion. I t is not an uncom m on sight. The child within could not
make an outcry. It is very easy fo r kidnappers to seize children, put
them in bags, and get away in the m idst o f thousands o f people.
In this case the m aid in the kitchen, who had been recently en
gaged, was a confederate; and the woman clerk was in another
place instead o f the man’s office, that fem ale also being a confederate,
and not the clerk.
6. — A man who was talking politics with a candidate was told
that, fo r his support, he would be given a certain office. In this
conversation he had the feeling come over him that the office
had been likewise prom ised to several other m e n ; as he seemed
to see them relying on the assurance that they would be rewarded
WB OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND
in that way fo r his support. In this flash o f feeling, he saw a portly

man whom he recognized as another politician. H e turned to the
candidate and said, “ M ay I m ention something to you in confidence
w ithout offending y o u ?” H e was told that he could with perfect
safety. “ W ell, I have been told this evening that you have prom
ised the same office to M r. Corbin.” — “ Tut, tut, man, that was only
a bluff. I had to promise that to keep him at work. B ut you are
the man fo r the office, and you w ill get it ju st as sure as I am
elected.” — The support was withdrawn, and the candidate was not
elected.
7.— A man who liked to spend a half hour occasionally in the
reverie, made the follow in g experiment with regard to eight o f
his friends, all m en :
H e drew from friend num ber one the feeling o f anger, and the
cause was in his place o f business. N othin g more definite was
obtained.
H e drew from his friend num ber two the feelin g that he was
short of funds and would be after help very soon ; also that the
house o f that friend, which was heavily m ortgaged, w ould soon be
sold out and the contents lost.
H e drew from friend num ber three the feeling that he was ill
from indigestion and was in great pain. The feeling was sympa
thetic, and took hold of the experimenter in somewhat the same
way as the victim , only modified. I t was real, and happily ceased
When he shifted his m ind to others.
H e drew from friend number fou r the feelin g that he was sleepy,
having been up late the night before, and that he had fallen asleep
in his chair, paper in hand.
H e drew from friend number five the feelin g o f great good luck
in a deal that had involved friend num ber two, very m uch to the
disadvantage o f the latter. Num ber five was in h igh spirits over it.
H e drew from friend num ber six the feeling that he had a hard
task before him in the solution o f a m atter that was engrossing
his whole attention. N othin g more definite came o f it.
F rom the others he got no impressions o f any k in d ; the feeling
being neutral and not marked.
H e had written down on paper the results as he went along.
H e sent w ord at once to number five and had him call. H e did so.
as this experimenter was a leading man in the place and had both
influence and wealth. H e opened fire as fo llo w s :
“ Y ou have had dealings with Frazer to-da y?”

“ N o, not at all. I have nothing to do w ith Frazer fo r some
time.”
“ B ut you have had dealings that affected some o f Frazer’ s hold
ings.”
“ H ow did you know that? Frazer has ju st got w ind o f it, I am
inform ed. H ave you seen h im ?”
“ N o, but I know about it. The profits which you are getting
w ill be b ig enough i f you let Frazer out. H e is ruined, and must
lose his house and all his property. H e trusted you. Y o u thought
you were to be kept out o f sight, in the background, and n ot be
known in the deal. I t is known only to me. Frazer does n o t know
you are in it. I f you straighten out his part o f it, you can have the
rest, and that is the b ig end. N ow fix it up here, as he may com e
to see me at any m om e n t”
“ I do n ot want him to see me here. I w ill fix it to-m orrow .”
“ N o, here. H e w ill not see you, if you are quick about it.”
The papers were drawn up in brief, sufficiently to hold the man
to his agreement, and he was about to go, when Frazer arrived ; and
as the latter was ushered in the fro n t o f the house, num ber five went
ou t at the side door.
“ I am in a hole,” said Frazer.
H e then told the whole story o f his ventures and final crash which
was to occur the next d a y ; and he asked fo r help.
“ W hat good w ill help do y o u ?”
“ I t w ill save m y house, and m y property in it. I f this thing
breaks I have no home, and nothing to furnish a place with in which
to live. M y w ife is ignorant o f what has happened. Y oti know
her to be a very estimable woman fo r whom you professed great
friendship before our marriage and her distress ought to appeal
to you. I wish to avert it. She m ust n ot know about this.”
“ B u t i f I help you now, you w ill be as badly off again by your
senseless speculation. I f you will promise n ot to speculate again,
I will fix this trouble up fo r you.”
The promise was made, and the experimenter s a id :
“ N ow go, and keep your word.”
“ B u t what about the deal that is squeezing m e? T he men that
have m e on the h ip are sharpers, and they m ust have their pound of
blood.”
“ D o as I tell you and go. There is all there is to it. I f you
ever speculate again, the crash w ill come. A s lon g as you keep
your promise there will be nothing doing to hurt you.”
So the affair was left that way, and num ber two is still wonder
in g what was done to avert the disaster.
N um ber one had got mad at the error o f a clerk in his office and
was in a very bad hum or all evening. H is w ife and three ch il
dren kept away from the room where he was indu lgin g in language
that was not the best fo r the domestic circle.
N um ber three was in considerable pain all the evening; and a
’ phone call from the experimenter asking how he was, drew the in
qu iry:
“ Joe ate some fried oysters and is taking the consequences. H ow
did you know about i t - ”
N um ber fou r was sound asleep when he ’phoned up his house,
and it was true that he had been up late the night before. Number
six was at work on the solution of a business proposition that in
volved so many details that he did not see the end in view at that
time, as was learned by ’phone.
Thus the feelings that had been transmitted were true as far as
they were drawn in the circle of the influence exerted. They are
convincing proofs that such transmissions are n ot accidental; and
that they can be increased by practice.
Many cases m ight be cited of the dishonesty that had been un
veiled by this process. They are published in books and have been
known for many years. I t is n ot pretended here that this is a new
a rt; for there has never been a person who has not to some extent,
slight or great, caught accidental feelings from others. B ut they
are accidental in all such instances as where no attempt is made
to draw them.
8.— A woman o f the age o f twenty—two was very beautiful but so
exceedingly bashful that she could not be made congenial to any
o f her male acquaintances. Parties were given in which a number
o f people o f her age were present, and young men o f the best
standing were invited. She could not be led into any spirited or
free conversation, despite all efforts in that direction. One even
in g there were ten young gentlemen and about that number o f
you ng ladies at a dinner where she was present and one o f the
young men was her partner. She was nice to him , but so quiet
that he was in a frig id state all the evening. Another gentleman
who was some distance away and who caught the young woman’s
eye but once, bad a strange feeling com e over him . H e had met
her several times before, but at this tim e he perceived something
in the glance o f the eye that meant more than he could under
stand. H e did n ot care fo r h e r; in fact he thought she was a cold
beauty and very tiresome.That night he went to his room very soon
after getting to the house where he lived, and sat on the edge o f the
bed, still in his evening dress, and the feeling came over him that the
woman was in love with him. H e hoped it could not be true, as
he would never m arry her. T o his m ind beauty was only skin deep,
and it would soon fade. There m ust be something more than
wealth, as he had all he needed. So m arriage was very unattractive
with her.
The next afternoon there came an invitation from her m other fo r
him to call, which he did. W hile left alone with the young lady,
he told her that he had been the victim o f a very peculiar experience.
H e then related part o f it, n ot venturing to speak o f love. H e said
that a certain lady whose name he could n ot tell, had exercised a
spell over him which he fou n d was m aking him a slave.
“ I think very highly o f her, but she is so different fro m m e in
temperament that I could never care fo r her except as an acquaint
ance,” he said in explaining the matter.
“ D o you think this spell she is exercising over you is intentional
or accidental?”
“ It could n ot be intentional. I think she has taken an interest
in me, and perhaps thinks o f me, and that makes the spell. She
is such a quiet young lady that I cou ld not believe she could ever fall
in love.”
H e went home, and fou n d him self anxious to call again in a few
evenings. H e was in love with her, and told her so, and proposed.
She refused him on the ground that she did not love him . H e
asked if he m ight call as often as he wished, and she consented.
F or three months they were the closest friends. Then, in a reverie
one evening alone, he fou n d that a feelin g was drawn to him fo r her
in which she showed the m ost decided jealousy m ixed with love. T o
test the matter, he told her at the next visit that he was thinking o f
taking a certain young lady to the theatre the com ing week. She
at once arose and sa id :
“ Y ou certainly w ill n ot do that.”
“ B ut why n ot? She is a very nice girl. N o t as nice as you,
but she will learn to love me, and that you can never do.”
T he quiet m aiden awoke at last from her long lethargy and real
ized that she loved him. W hen he said that his proposition to
escort another lady to the theatre was only a test o f her feelin g for
him , peace follo w e d ; and they are m arried. H e says that she is not
so quiet now.
The marriage is a most happy one. I t is not possible, as they
think, that they could ever fa ll apart. Y e t she repelled with her
conscious m ind the love she did n ot know, but that her Other M ind
had fou n d fo r her. H e repelled with his conscious m ind the same
love, w hich his Other M ind had fou n d fo r him . Such a love is im
mortal, for nothing transitory is born in that higher realm o f be
ing.
The friendship that endures, the love that knows no faltering,
the faith in human ideals, the inspiration o f our better nature,—
these are the fruits o f the Other M ind.
EIGHTEENTH CYCLE
H E S T R E A M that outward flows

A n d n ever checks its course,
B u t forw ard takes its way
Through fields o f rich domain,
Goes forth adventurous
A n d yet brings nothing back.
Y glancing backward over the course we have thus

far traveled, it w ill be seen that there has been a
steady advancement through a logical sequence o f
strength in the acquisition o f a better understanding
of the nature and powers o f the Other M ind. Be
fore we can take new steps to advantage it is wise to look back over
the paths we have already trod. Some decisive points have been
gained, and these are briefly stated in this place as fo llo w s :
The F irst Cycle, which is possibly the most im portant o f all,
presents the laws and propositions that lay the foundation o f this
system, after clearing the forest o f its undergrowth and entangling
brush.
T he Second Cycle deals with the ordinary proofs o f the continual
passing from m ind to m ind of the thoughts, purposes and facts
that are everywhere casting their influences fo r the good or ill o f each
human being. That is more a history o f everyday experiences than
an attempt to m aintain a scientific line o f dem onstration; but it is
absolutely necessary in the work at hand.
The T hird Cycle deals with the now rapidly grow ing practice o f
hypnotism for all purposes and in all uses; with abundant proofs
in a scientific way o f the mode o f procedure and the results ob
tained. H ypnotism is a com pulsory form o f telepathy. The sub
ject is put into a sleep that sets aside the conscious m ind and opens
up the opportunity fo r the in-com ing o f the Other M ind. Several
great facts are shown in a clearly proved lig h t:
There is always the necessity o f side-tracking the conscious mind

in order to secure true knowledge.
The F irst Degree o f hypnotism is wakefulness, yet it is a power
fu l stage of in flu ence; and, at the same time, the m ost dangerous;
for it is easily trained to accept the suggestions o f any magnetic
m ind and adopt them as facts and thorough beliefs.
The knowledge that comes from the Other M ind is n ot brought
into direct contact with the conscious m ind, but is caught by the
latter ju st as a remark, not listened to, is seized after it has been
uttered, but before its echo has vanished.
The F ourth Cycle establishes the power o f suggestions made in
natural sleep, thus proving that the Other M ind is present and
awake when the ordinary m ind is unconscious. This discovery is
leading to a new line o f practice and experiments.
The F ifth Cycle takes up the next step, which is self-suggestion.
It w ill be seen that there has been a steady progress o f investiga
tion as we have proceeded. T hirty years ago, when hypnotism was
well proved, it was supposed that suggestion had its chief field in
hypnotism , and this was deplored because o f the distaste fo r the
practice of that art that reduced the w ill o f the subject. Later on
it was seen that suggestion did n ot require hypnotism , fo r it was
possible in natural sleep, although m uch slower. Still later on it
has been shown that suggestion can be made by the individual,
and that the services o f the hypnotist can be dispensed with when
tim e is not an object.
The next step in this line o f progress is naturally fou n d in the
Sixth Cycle, where the power of suggestion over the body is clearly
defined and its many uses related. Then the self-induced control of
m ind over matter is proved in the Seventh Cycle. A fter passing
through three o f the most im portant o f the divisions o f this w ork
pertaining to hypnotism , the Eleventh Cycle takes up the process
whereby telepathy, em erging from all form s o f suggestion, comes into
a higher plane through a series o f the most wholesome and helpful
habits, all entirely disassociated from other influences. T his brings
the study home to the com m on experiences o f life.
The closeness o f hypnotic methods to the first steps in the ordinary
uses, is seen in the em ptying o f the m ind, a condition that is the
basis o f hypnotism . Y e t this is done by a special practice that is a
habit w ith the great m en and women o f the world, and has been
used fo r centuries. A nother advance is fou n d in the reverie, like
PRACTICE IN PAUSES
wise akin to self-suggestion, and almost on the verge o f the trance

state; yet a custom that has grown with the progress o f humanity.
These facts are stated here because the resemblance and actual
characteristics o f hypnotism appear in all those greater habits that
have made men and women great, useful in the loftier work o f the
w orld, and inspired in their motives and achievements.
The reverie is not a trance state; but is quite different from it.
The distinction is marked by two fa c t s :
1. The trance state is purely hypnotic and the patient is in a
state of complete unconsciousness.
2. The reverie is a state of wakefulness in which the two minds
are on the threshold o f consciousness, opposite to each other.
The shorter intervals are simply brief reveries.
The reverie is useful only when the user o f it is alone and un
disturbed. The m inister who is preparing his sermon wants to
be wholly alone in his stu d y; whoever breaks in upon his reverie,
out o f which the best sermons are produced, w ill make it difficult
fo r him to return to the thread o f his ideas. Likewise the poet,
the author, the inventor, the artist, the architect, and every one who
crcates something must be left to their use o f the reverie. T o dis
tract their attention brings them into the ordinary m ind, fo r the
interference drives the Other M ind out and bars the gateway.
As we began with the hypnotic uses o f telepathy, then proceeded
by successive steps to approach the everyday uses, we find our
selves now leaving the reverie, and entering upon the practice o f
com m onplace experiences. In order to understand the succession
o f steps that have been taken from the beginning o f this work, the
follow in g table should be m em orized:
The way led into
hypnotism , which is a controlled and induced state o f subjection.
It led out through
natural sleep-suggestion, which is a wholesome and helpful influence.
The way led into
the trance state, which is self-induced hypnotism and at all times
harm ful.
It led out through
the reverie, which is the noblest and m ost useful m ood o f the hu
m an m ind.
The way led into
hypnotic telepathy, which is always a blind process o f lim ited use.
I t led out through

natural telepathy, which is capable o f being developed in the highest
degree.
As has been said, the reverie is fo r personal use when undis
turbed. I t has always been employed since hum anity dwelt on the
earth. A n d it has been treated in the follow in g m a n n er:
1. N o attempt has been made to recognize its operations.
2. N o way of translating its messages has been employed.
3. N o m ethod o f increasing its power and usefuhiess has been
sought.
The results are:
1. There is a constant stream o f knowledge available through
the Other M ind that is not even recognized.
2. When its influence is felt, few persons know what it is or
what it means.
3. This power, which takes on rapid growth under culture, grows
dead or stagnant nnder neglect.
When the reverie is shortened, it becomes a pause in conversa
tion. Y o u have seen an active m ind suddenly shut off all com
m unication and shut itself in fo r a second, or two seconds, or m ore;
not a reverie, but a mere pause. That m ind has appealed to the
aid o f the Other M ind. It is a frecpient habit with the men and
women who make no mistakes in life.
Y ou are in the office of a great banker. Y o u state your facts to
him. A problem arises. W hile yet you are talking his eyes have a
far-away look, and yet he does not miss what you say. H e has been
away for a second or two. H e decides what to do, and it is fo r the
interest of his institution, as well as yours, that he must know what
is best.
A great leader in the affairs o f the nation, the President, sat
in his office some years ago, when an im portant caller arrived to ask
for his aid in the Ohio situation. The caller s a id :
“ Charles P . T a ft, brother o f the President-elect, is in a posi
tion to make a three-sided fight fo r the Senatorship. H e has
wealth, plenty o f influence, the prestige o f his relation to the next
President, and many followers. H e can either win, or prevent any
opponent from winning. B ut he wants your advice and will follow
it.”
The President sat in a m ental pause fo r a few seconds, which
seemed minutes, and then said:
PRACTICE IN PAUSES
“ Personally I should be pleased to see Charles P. T a ft in the

Senate. F or the good o f the party, M r. B urton m ust be elected.
H e is an honest and able statesman. M r. T a ft’s election under the
circumstances would hurt the next President, and the reasons are
obvious. H is wealth w ould be blamed fo r a victory in the legis
lature. H is relation to the com ing President w ould be charged
with the use o f favoritism , and his presence in the Senate under the
circumstances w ould be distasteful to the general public.”
The President saw that wealth was a bad weapon with which
to win official position and public confidence; and that being the
brother o f a President was a disadvantage in a quarrel. T he re
sult was the selection of a man under circumstances that would
comm and the respect of the best elements in the party.
H a d the conscious m ind done the thinking, it w ould have said:
“ Charles P . T a ft has m oney enough to carry on the fight. H is
relationship to the President-elect is a great aid, fo r it w ill compel
the members o f the legislature to vote fo r him in order that they
may expect favors from the next administration. Offices in great
numbers are open to them, and they will keep that fact in mind.
H e cannot fail.”
B ut the Other M ind s a id :
“ L et us assume that Charles P . T a ft can finance the election, and
brin g his p olitical prestige to bear on the legislature, and so win
a stubborn fight w ithout even the sign o f a deadlock, what w ill be
the political usefulness o f that m an in the Senate or in his p arty?
W ill he or the party in Ohio live down the suspicions and asper
sions in the next six years? Assum ing that both candidates are
equally qualified fo r the position, would it n ot be m uch better for
M r. B urton to win the election? I t certainly w o u ld ; and, at the
same time, Charles P . T a ft will be credited with an act o f self*
sacrifice fo r the good o f his party.”
It is only in the pause that the Other M ind can take charge o f an
im portant matter and give accurate advice. The m an who thinka
intensely does m ost mental w ork ; but he m ust not perm it his ■con
scious m ind to sway his judgm ent. Im petuous haste in m aking de
cisions is disastrous.
A man who claim ed a large share in the inheritance o f property
that had fallen m ostly to his consin, consulted his lawyer and was
told that he had a good case. T he cousin went to his lawyer, aftef
demand was made on him fo r a certain sum, and was told that ho
had a good case. H e then took the matter under advisement. A t

his suggestion he arranged fo r both lawyers and both clients to meet
and discuss the case. The two lawyers had citations in number,
proving the correctness o f the position o f each ; and the cousin was
in doubt. H e believed that his own lawyer knew what he was
advising to be correct; and he believed that the other client had the
same faith in his lawyer. In the m idst o f this conference the
cousin suddenly grew very serious and shut up his m ind fo r a few
seconds o f thought deeper than that which he had given to the
matter before. Then he entered again in to the conversation.
H is two m inds were at work.
The m eeting adjourned with the promise that they would reach
an amicable agreement if possible.
On the way out, the cousin said to the other co u sin :
“ Come, let us take a walk and talk it over. Y o u want what is
right do you n o t? ”
“ That is all I want.”
“ I f you could now see how the case would result in the Court o f
Appeals, after a small fortune had been spent in fighting it, would
you be guided by that decision?”
“ Y es, if I could be made to see it that way.”
I t was arranged that they go to the best lawyers in the State,
to any that were known to be very reliable, the would-be-plaintiff
m aking the choice. This they did. The cousin was to pay all
bills fo r advice, and the latter was to be given to the other party,
so that he could know that there was no underhand method to be
employed. A fter the lapse o f a few weeks the advice and references
to authorities reached the claim ant by m ail, and it was in his favor.
The cousin, without the knowledge o f the claimant, made another
trip to the great city and paid a large fee fo r the advice o f another
lawyer, who had been a ju d ge o f the Supreme Court o f the S tate;
and he was told that the claimant had the right o f the matter.
H e hunted him up and made a settlement in compromise that was
fair to both under all o f the circumstances.
Now here were two minds at w ork :
A t the start the conscious m ind said,
“ Go, get a lawyer. F in d out what he thinks. Get the best
lawyer in the county where the case, if brought, w ill have to be
tried.”
A fter the lawyer had weighed the facts and looked up the law,
PRACTICE IN PAUSES
he told the cousin, that he could w in ; there was not the shadow
o f a doubt about i t ; he would pledge his professional honor that
he could take the case to victory. Then the cousin went home and
his conscious m ind said:
“ See? Y ou can win. O f course you are in the right. Besides,
you have the property and possession is nine points o f the law.
Go ahead and fight it. Y o u may have to pay large counsel fees,
but what o f that? Is every person who claim s som ething that you
own, to get what he asks for, ju st because he wants it ? No. Go
ahead and show him and the public that you are able to take care
o f yourself. They w ill all respect you if they learn that you are
a good fighter.”
B ut in that brief pause in the lawyer’s office when his Other
M in d broke in on the scene, he was told something like th is:
“ H ere you see two leading lawyers o f this county having views
exactly opposite each other, after both know all the facts. Assum
in g they are both honest, is n ot the prospect o f good fees and
prolonged litigation a tem ptation to them ? W hy not go to some
lawyer who does n ot know y o u ; tell him you do not want to disclose
which side o f the case you are o n ; and tell him that he w ill not
be em p k yed to try i t ; and that all he w ill get from it w ill be the
fee fo r his advice. See what a counselor o f great ability w ill tell
you under circumstances where he cannot have any m otive to mis
lead you. Take the claim ant along and let him put the case in
his own way, but observe that he does not misstate the facts.”
Then when he fou n d that the law was against him , he had an
other brief pause in his mental operations, and his Other M in d said
in substance to h im :
“ Y o u are being strongly urged b y your local lawyer to defend
the claim, to go to court and let a ju ry pass on the merits o f the
facts, and the higher courts to give their judgm ent as last. Y o u
are sure to lose the case. The costs w ill be on you, and the charges
o f your counsel. T he claim ant w ill n ot forget as lon g as he lives
the fight in which he defeated you, and your friends w ill point
you out as the man who lost the big case. Better compromise now
fo r h alf what it w ill cost you to win, even i f that chance falls to
you. There is a possibility that you w ill w in, as all cases are not
decided on their strict ju stice ; but you know yon ought not to win.
Y o u r lawyer m ay be sincere and may really succeed fo r you. B ut
you w ill gain nothing by a victory.”
A ll his life he was glad he listened to the wisdom of his Other

Mind.
In another case a man so shaped liis business at a store that he
could easily make several thousand dollars without the knowledge
o f his partner, and he proceeded to this end. One m orning when
alone, his partner noticed him standing at a desk with a pencil in
his hand which he held against his chin, and seemed lost in thought.
H e said,
“ W hat’s w eighing on your m ind, H e n ry ?”
D uring the brief pause his Other M ind had been saying to him
som ething like th is :
“ Y ou can make a large sum of m oney and never be detected. A ll
through your life you w ill have a slightly dishonest look in your
face that your partner w ill see, your business acquaintances will
see, and you will see. T o you that expression w ill be magnified,
and you w ill hate yourself. Some day a man o f greater ability
than you in reading hum an nature may interpret the lines and
know what they mean. T hat m an may be your partner.”
A ll these things were uttered like a voice in a clear sky talking
words o f wisdom to him. H e obeyed. A load fell from his soul
and his affairs prospered.
Conscience is knowledge o f the truth. Its derivation as a word
is the same as knowledge. There is an old brief that training
makes the kin d o f conscience a person possesses; as where a child
who had been a thief all its life, who came home at night with
nothing stolen during the day, would be stricken by a guilty con
science. W hile the sense o f gu ilt or unrest is present, it is derived
from the fear o f punishment that is to follow its failure. The
same child, given a chance to see both sides o f life, would either
be guided wholly by its conscious m ind and run to the bad unless
it fou n d that honesty was the best p o licy ; or it would occasionally
receive suggestions o f wisdom from its Other M ind and be led into
a righ t way o f living.
B ut it is not on m oral grounds that the Other M ind proceeds.
In fa ct it knows no need o f the moral or the crim inal law. Its
fu n ction is to know facts, and knowledge o f the actual facts o f
existence is all that is needed to wipe out the m oral and the crim inal
code and substitute wisdom and truth in its place.
The cravings o f the body are the masters o f the w orking m in d ;
but they are quickly subdued by the force o f the Other M ind. Take
I
PRACTICE IN PAUSES **
so fam iliar a m atter as love. I t is the com bined testimony o f the
true men and wom en everywhere that the lover who possesses this
quality in its genuineness has no thought o f passion until the rites
of marriage have been perform ed, and even then he w ill subject
such thoughts to the higher attribute o f true love. I t is the same
w ith the woman. On the other hand, let the conscious m ind have
sway and it w ill see the form , the beauty, the contour, the color
o f eyes, o f hair, o f com plexion, and all the physical attractions of
the woman, and w ill weigh them fo r their value in the market o f
gratification, letting love follow if it is w orth the while.
A man who had m arried a woman tw o years younger than him self
had to hum or her desire fo r the presence o f her mother in his home.
The m other had the idea that she was the head o f the fam ily, and
proceeded to make the son-in-law feel very little. In fact, she
thought to hum iliate him whenever she could do so. H is relatives
gave him a lot o f fighting advice, and his conscious m ind began to
reason like this:
“ The old woman is m aking your m arried life a veritable gehenna.
She is an old fo o l who is taking advantage o f the fa ct that she has
given her daughter to you, and therefore you owe her homage and
all the rights o f the house that naturally belong to the husband.
Just show her who is boss. I f she does not like it, tell her to go
and never come back again. Make everything unpleasant fo r her.
Make the house so uncom fortable that she w ill gladly leave.”
This is the old story, and the general public w ill applaud the
sentiment to the echo. B u t as he was m aking plans to carry into
execution the ju st com m and o f retribution, a pause in his thoughts
took place and his Other M ind said something like these w o rd s:
“ It is true that the world would ju stify you, and your relatives
would applaud you in m aking things hot fo r what they call a she-
devil. B ut the wom an is the m other o f your w ife, whom you love.
She was once a w ife and brought up the g irl you m arried and made
her w orthy of your home. H er antipathy to you is very thin. It
has n o depth. T ry it. Be the gallant and the chevalier to the
woman. L et her know gently and w ithout ostentation that you
admire her fo r the care and faithfulness with which she brought
up her daughter, who is now your wife. Assert your independence
by acts, n ot u gly phrases; and every tim e you oppose her wishes,
accompany your opposition with some kind reference to her value
as your adviser and the protector o f you r wife. A sk her advice at
all times. T ell her you want her to help you solve the many little
problems that arise in married life. She has a tender spot and a
nobler character somewhere down deep in her nature, or she could
not have brought into the world so sweet and beautiful a g irl as
you r wife. D o n ot overdo your kind expressions, fo r she may
think that you are n ot sincere. Be sincere. Be truthful to her.
B ut go on in the way that you know is right, when it differs from
her w a y ; otherwise let her have her own way, if it w ill not do
harm.”
The young husband listened to the wisdom of his Other M ind
and pu t it to the test. The old wom an was made into a very kind-
hearted mother-in-law, and in tim e the man actually refused to let
her stay away from his home, as he enjoyed her assistance very much.
M ost persons listen to the advice of the conscious m ind and are
led into trouble by it, fo r that m ind is fu ll o f fight, o f the desire
to square wTongs, and make itself felt as the master o f the meaner
phases o f the body and its evil tendencies. T he Other M in d never
advised a w rong course.
It is through chinks o f consciousness that the Other M ind speaks
to you. I f you never pause to reflect, you cannot secure this golden
counsel. This doctrine is not new. I t has lived on earth fo r cen
turies, and is known in many precepts, one o f which is, “ T hink
twice before you speak,” m eaning before you speak on a m atter o f
importance.
We recall the case o f a man who always had a fighting temper.
H e lived in Texas, where men carry six-shooters. This man threw
his away, for he declared that his temper was such that he could
not safely take the weapon with him . A thought like that never
comes out of the conscious m ind. I t is too noble.
One day he was accosted by a lawyer, smaller than he, and an
altercation ensued. T he lawyer called him a liar, and drew a
weapon fo r self-defense, thus providing the means o f gettin g rid
o f the m an he had insulted. H e knew that, when he was tried for
murder, he could set u p the successful plea that he fired in self-
defense. B u t it turned out that he knew the larger man was un
armed, and hence the freedom o f remark.
It was a trying situation fo r the latter.
H is conscious m ind s a id :
“ This lawyer has insulted you with a remark that is always a
gross assault on character. I f you attempt to fight him , he will
PRACTICE IN PAUSES
k ill you. I f you do not fight him , he w ill taunt you and make it
known to all your acquaintances that you are a coward, and that
w ill be m ore miserable than death. I f you go away and arm your
self he w ill be on the lookout fo r you and may shoot first some day
when you are not on your guard. Y o u should summon your friends
and have them help you down the man at once.”
B ut in the pause that came to his thoughts, his Other M ind said
som ething like th is:
“ It is true that you have been insulted and most grossly so.
B ut the affair was started by your tem per in the first part o f the
altercation. I f you succeed in killin g the lawyer, you w ill be tried
and possibly acquitted. B ut your fam ily w ill suffer. I lis fam ily
w ill suffer also, for he has a w ife and five children, all dependent
on him fo r support. A fter he is gone, his friends w ill remember
you and your life m ay be taken. Y o u r bad tem per has already
gained fo r you the reputation o f being a bully, and this w ill make
you seem a sort o f outlaw and public enemy. The thing to do now
is to start back at the beginning o f the altercation and find the
turning p oin t where the real temper began, and there take a sensible
turn in the conversation.”
I t was hard advice to follow . H e said to the lawyer.
“ Quarreling is bad business. Y o u have a w ife and five children.
I f we fight, you m ay be killed. I f you kill me, it w ill crush your
w ife’ s heart to know that she is m arried to a murderer, and the stain
o f the m urder w ill not be wiped out of the children’s m em ory
fo r a lifetim e. L et us start the talk over again and see who is
to blame. I f you are, then be m an enough to take back what
you have said. I f I am to blame I will acknowledge it like a m an.”
This was done, and they fou n d a way to avoid all further hos
tilities.
Tem per is the centrifugal action o f the conscious mind.
I t is probably the cause o f m uch o f the trouble in the world. It
separates husband and w ife ; fo r these two beings are seemingly free
to call each other names that would be instantly resented by violence
am ong men. The husband often hurls an epithet at his w ife that
he knows very well he would not dare to even hint at if he were
addressing the w ife o f another man. A ll quarrelers are abject
cowards.
Exaggeration is rife everywhere, even where it is not done with
intention. The child sees the fact o f occurrence in a larger picture
than it really was. I f it has been abused or brushed by another

person old enough to be held responsible, the child reports the
affair in such terms as to excite the anger of the parent. Bad blood
between fam ilies is sure to resu lt; but the pause fo r reflection comes,
and the Other M ind has its say:
“ Go to the parents of the other child, and have a talk so as to
ascertain both sides o f the story. Remember that exaggeration is
the m ost com m on o f all human characteristics, and your own in
flamed m ind is an example of it now.''5
T his is done. The tw o children are brought together, and each
tones down the matter until it is quite harmless.
W om an, w ith all her sweetness and angelic qualities, is by nature
and temperament a creature that exaggerates all things that attract
her vivid attention. I f she tries to tell you how large an absent
apple is, she pantomimes a pumpkin. I f it is length, she sees a
yard fo r a foot. I f she is tellin g what impressed her at a play,
she describes it in superlatives that are outsuperlatived by negative
term s; as, fo r instance, when the leading man is more than perfectly
lovely, he is terribly nice. A n ice cream that is more than exquisitely
delicious is awfully good. A man who is beyond her phrase o f de
ligh tfu lly superb is ju st killing.
This characteristic of wom anhood has led to m uch injustice and
w rong in the world. On the witness stand she carries the same
spirit o f exaggeration into all she says, although she charm ingly
believes in the truth of it all. The brain after all is only the
camera o f events; and it matters very little whether they occurred
in the outer world, or were impressed there by her imaginings.
A cautious woman w ill pause to reflect when she is being incited
on to some action or belief by the colorings of statements made
to her by one o f her own sex. Still m ore should a man be over
cautious when he is subjected to the urgings o f a woman who may
have been offended by some other man or woman. H e should be
slow to seek revenge. There is the other side. T oo m uch fighting
exists now in the world, and every person should at least be fair
enough and calm enough to get down to the solid facts, free from
all prejudice. Each step in this direction lessens the great fu n d
o f ill nature and brings hum anity that m uch nearer the era o f
peace on earth and good w ill to men.
I f every man and wom an would pause to reflect in the m idst
o f their bickerings, and let the Other M ind have gentle sway, there
PRACTICE IN PAUSES
■would be very little trouble in the world. I t w ould be im possible to

make a mistake.
There are many instances occurring every day that require the
pause. Y o u m ay call it thinking twice before you speak or a ct;
or counting five before you let your tongue say som ething that you
m ay reg ret; it is all the same thing. This pause is as old as the
name o f man. B u t it is n ot often indulged in, and when it is
given its opportunity, the conscious m ind fails often to interpret
it. These lessons are taught here to enable you to make the pause,
and to recognize the influence o f the Other M ind as it steps into
that interval.
I t is only by lon g practice o f all the exercises and the adoption
o f the habits that are described in the preceding cycles that will
enable you to quickly make the interval called the pause. The
reverie is sometimes five or ten minutes com ing. A uthors who
have written the works that have m oved the world onward have
fou n d it necessary to devote fu lly fifteen minutes to the process
o f getting into the w riting reverie. The old claims o f H om er and
V irg il in the im m ortal creations, that the muse must be invited in
before the thoughts will flow, is nearer righ t than has been supposed
by the general reader.
I t is also a saying that poetry which is worthy o f the name cannot
be created at w ill. W hen a person can sit down, hunt words in
the rhym ing dictionary, and count ont metrical feet as a regular
occupation, he produces nothing but machine poetry, which bears
its value on its face, no matter how many flowers, or sky colors, 01
shades o f perfum e are im bedded in the com position. A flower)
style is n ot inspired.
B u t fo r the purposes o f quick action in conversation it requires
training in m aking the intervals as already taught. The experience
o f a m an who succeeded in doin g this after he had been totally
unable to make an effective pause, is told in the follow in g account
which best explains the process:
“ I was troubled all m y life w ith bad judgm ent. I made mis-,
takes in everything. H ow I learned to throw m y m ind into a
quick pause is not im portant here, except as it w ill help to encourage
others. B ut I w ill say that I learned how to enter a reverie. It
took me a lon g tim e fo r a while, but they came instantly in the
course o f some months. W hen I fou n d I could enter the reverie
in a second, I then applied the same m ethod in conversation with
people. I learned to decide slowly and correctly. I thought care

fully. I did nothing im portant hastily. Folks soon began to re
gard me as a m an o f good judgm ent, conservative and painstaking.
On one occasion when I had to make up m y m ind what to do in a
serious affair, and had hardly a m inute to decide in, I made the
pause and fo r a few seconds I realized that I was getting a clearer
light on the point than I would have obtained otherwise. M y first
view o f the business was wrong. M y second proved to be right.
H ad I decided as m y first opinion led me to believe was right, I
would have made a big blunder.”
In prior letters he stated that he was unable to make the pause
and clear his m ind. Later on he fou n d that he could do so in a
flash o f tim e, and other persons w ith whom he was talking sup
posed he was merely thinking it over or taking a short tim e fo r
careful reflection, which is almost a universal habit among success
fu l men.
Thus old habits are given new uses.
Some wom en, on being inform ed that their sex is blessed with
the faculty o f intuition, take pride in showing how quickly they
can decide matters, some o f w hich are im portant. “ I never take
time to think,” said one o f them. “ I decide on the very first
impression that comes to me,” and she was in the w rong much of
the time. Careful thought is needed, but it should be attended
by aid from the more accurate judgm ent that comes from reflection.
N o person can decide on impulse, fo r the Other M ind has had no
opportunity fo r m aking itself manifest. I t must be given sway.
One man, who has had u niform success in his professional life
of late years, has this to say:
“ In m y talks with others m any questions come up that are o f a
serious nature and require accurate thinking. T he more I try to
reason them ont, the less satisfactory are the results, unless I am
able to throw the clearer wisdom from m y deeper m ind into the
discussion. I pause fo r a few seconds, often saying aloud, ‘L et
me think,’ and I can send m y w orking m ind aw^ay and get light
from the other source, and it is always right.”
H ow many times have you heard people say, “ L et me think,”
or some snch Temark as “ Let m e see,” or otherwise noticed them
pause, seemed lost fo r a few seconds, and then com e back into the
conscious m ind with a decision? I t is a matter o f everyday occur
rence, and was so long before this work was ever thought of.
PR AC TICE IN PAUSES
W e saw a receiving teller in a bank, whom we have known for

years, take a b ill in his hand, lose him self in reflection fo r a mom ent,
and then pass it back fo r inspection. I t was one o f the cleverest
counterfeits o f recent years, and had deceived many bankers. We
asked the teller why he stopped and reflected fo r a m om ent, instead of
givin g the bill a close scrutiny, and he s a id :
“ Before m y eyes rested on the bill I had a feelin g come over me
that there was something w rong g oin g to turn up right away. I
stopped this thought when I reached the b ill, as it seemed to me that
it was wrong. W hen I was deep in the idea, I d id not look at the
bill, but went at once to have a certain part o f it examined, I am
sure I had not looked upon that part, but the thought o f what it
was, came clearly to me, I have n ot had a counterfeit get by m e
for ten years.”
A detective said o f this habit o f pausing:
“ I have employed something like it fo r m any years. In talking
with a suspect I try to let him do all the talking. Every once in
a while I close m y m ind against what he is saying, and a new idea
walks right in, and tells me what to ,sk next, In one case I had
nothing to go on, and the talk came to a s andstill. I fou n d an
idea and sprung it on the fellow , and he almost fe ll over. I t had
made a bulPs eye, and he gave u p the resistance. I had his story
in half an hour in w riting and signed by him .”
Pinkerton was a great detective because he had the power o f
telepathy in the highest degree. H e often said that a man who
lacked such pow er could never make a detective. “ H e must be a
good guesser and guess right,” was a fam iliar remark o f his. One
afternoon in a crowded city he was strolling along aimlessly, think
in g o f the hundred or m ore cases that he would like to solve, when
all at once there came over him the feelin g that in the thousands
o f people passing along the street, there was one man that he could
not see, and who was n ot easy to reach, who was wanted badly by
him. H e plunged rather w ildly forw ard and came upon the man.
Afterw ards it was proved that this suspect was the identical crim inal
for whom he had hunted fo r years. Y e t when he arrested him ,
Pinkerton did n ot recognize his face as one that was wanted, and
did not know what he wanted him fo r. I t was only by an accident
in the conversation that took place that evening that a good guess
set him right, and led to the connection needed to id en tify him.
T he man had com pletely changed his appearance and was so different
that his own w ife passed him several times and did not give him
more than a mere glance each time.
On another occasion when Pinkerton passed a m an on the street
and noticed what seemed like a false beard on his face, he stepped
up to him , tore the beard off, and told him to go w ith him. The
m an went, but Pinkerton did not know what he was wanted for.
H e ’ phoned to several heads o f police, and located the suspect as a
burglar who was wanted for a crim e attended by murder.
There are endless examples of the activity of a power that has
been successfully employed by capable men and women tim e without
m em ory. Our study here is to develop that power, to increase it
where it exists and to enlarge its usefulness.
M ost persons can think easily with the conscious mind. The
plan o f this w ork is to enable them to think as easily with the aid
o f the Other M ind.
NINETEENTH CYCLE
R O U G IIT S fly about like birds

W hose com ing may be known
B y rustling leaves above
The gen tly swaying branch,
A n d presently the song
Is heard upon the air.
N E o f the m ost pleasing and useful habits is that which

fills in the pauses made by other persons, and antici
pates what they are about to say. I t opens up a
broad field of the highest mental exercise in ways that
are m ost practical.
In the cycle ju st closed you have been taught to make use o f
the pause in your own mind. N ow you are to seek to make use
o f the pause in the m ind of another person. This is part of the
work of this cycle. The rest w ill be an enlargement o f it.
M any years ago it was discovered by accident that, if a person
pauses in the course of remarks, and some listener attempts to
supply the needed word, this practice, carried on u ntil it becomes
a habit, w ill set up the power o f telepathy of the m ost useful kind.
Since the first experiments in this work, there have been many
persons who have fou n d the truth o f the claim. It is based solely
on the potency of the interval, which has been discussed in the two
preceding cycles. This space in the thinking activity o f the m ind
tends to close out the conscious m in d ; and, when that is out, the
Other M ind springs in as if brought forw ard by an elastic action.
It is a w onderful fact.
T he follow in g sentences were taken down by stenographers at
different times, and represent a large number o f trials. The sup
plied words have all been put in by telepathy, or at least without
the aid o f any spoken or written com m unication:
WKt OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND
1. A m inister preaching. “ N ow we see the power of a . .

T he supplied words were divine providence. W hile the pause
may not have been the length o f a second o f time, it was sufficient
to enable the reporter to take down the undertones of the person
sitting next to him in the gallery o f a church. H ardly had they
been recorded when the preacher uttered the supplied words, “ divine
providence.” I t may be argued that this was a good guess. I f so
it was all the better, as the m ind that can guess ahead, is the most
successful kind o f an intelligence in this world.
2. A m inister preaching. “ It is true that the guilty sometimes
go free, and that the innocent are punished; but these miscarriages
o f justice are not . .
The supplied words were the rule. There was no tim e fo r think
in g out the end o f the statement. The pause was very brief. T he
words must have jum ped into the m ind o f the person supplying
them, ju st as telepathic thoughts w ill flash into the brain in the
most unexpected manner. A gain it m ay be argued that this was
a good guess. Y e t how could the m ind guess so speedily? I f it
was a guess it was excellent practice fo r the mind.
3. A m inister preaching: “ Some critics insist that there were
no m iracles in the days o f the Israelites. They say nature has never
b r o k e n .............................”
The supplied words were her established laws. A s soon as these
words were secured by the reporter, and before they were actually
written, the minister finished the statement. There could not be
guesswork here. It is o f course plain to be seen that the word laios
must be a part o f the sentence; but the other part of it, “ estab
lished,” was not to be expected. In pure guessing, ninety-nine
persons in a hundred would have seen the sentence as fo llo w s : “ They
say nature has never broken her laws.” The idea o f established
laws was w holly telepathic.
4. A m inister preaching. “ T hat little group o f brave men set
out in the dimness of the rising day. T hey did not know what the
day and the h o u r .............................”
The supplied words were would bring forth . These, like the
others, were correct. H ere is a possibility o f guesswork. Just how
else the statement could be finished in the most natural manner, is
not easy to see; but the guessing was done so very quickly that it
could not have occurred without m uch practice and some help from
telepathy.
PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS
5. A n orator speaking. “ This shall not be. N ot as lon g as

Am erican m anhood is still left to assert itself, w ill the people bend
beneath this yoke. I f I am w rong then liberty i s .............................”
The supplied words were a meaningless name. There was no
way in which these words could have been guessed. The sentence
ends rather weak. A better orator would have rounded out his
period with a stronger thought. The person who supplied these
words had been a successful public speaker and knew several better
terms fo r ending the statement, but he took what was in the m ind
o f the speaker and the reporter noted them down in a flash before
the orator had actually uttered them.
6. A n orator speaking. “ L et us look at this crisis with a spirit
o f ju d icial calmness. L e t us not rush blindly to the fray, not
knowing what kind o f an enemy we shall encounter. W e can arm
ourselves by preparing ourselves with the necessary fa cts ; and with
these there can be no e n e m y ........................................ ”
The supplied words were strong enough to resist us. I t is hardly
possible fo r any m ind, no matter how acute, to guess these words.
They were spoken in a flash, and the reporter had them down while
the orator was “ hem m ing” his throat to get freedom fo r the climax.
A ll clergymen, except those few who have studied themselves,
are guilty of this “ hem m ing” habit. I t is tiresome. It shuts
off the flow o f oratory and makes the hearers weary. The orator
who indulges in such fault has a very lim ited field o f usefulness.
Y e t it is a fact that, at a church where a supposedly fam ous preacher
was delivering his sermon, he made 248 pauses either fo r the loss
o f a word, or in order to “ hem ” his throat.
Some o f these pauses were follow ed by a lon g flow o f words where
there was n ot time enough fo r the experimenter to take out o f his
mind the rest o f the statement. One o f the lon g ones, however,
was caught, and is given here:
7. A fam ous preacher speaking. “ He looked fo r it in the Far
East and found it not. H e traversed Europe and it was not there.
Over the sands o f A frica with iron wings he sped and it did not
appear. Out on the broad ocean, across the stormy seas, into the
newer world he came, and t h e r e ................................................... ”
The supplied words were “ it was waiting fo r the com ing o f his
adventurous spirit.” As there was nothing in the lines preceding
this ending that would suggest the ideas found in the supplied
words, the charge of guessing will not hold. The speaker had the
habit at times o f pausing fo r effect, and at other times o f allowing

a lon g space to intervene before he w ould connect his thoughts.
The church was one o f ultra fashion, and the congregation were
bound to remain and listen, and to come again. B ut it was noticed
that they were indifferent to the subject in hand on this particular
day.
Another clergym an, who was held in high esteem fo r the valued
thoughts he expressed, had the same delinquencies o f delivery; and
in one sermon we found 197 pauses, mostly fo r the right word to come
into place. In nearly all of these breaks, a telepathist could readily
fill in the words needed. In fact it was not very difficult fo r any
one with a little experience to do so.
8. A college professor in literature speaking from notes. “ It
Was m ore than two centuries before another era that could be called
rich in product came to light. Darkness was everywhere. The
sleeping genius was not to be disturbed. The dawn was not notable,
not a distinct awakening, b u t ..............................................”
The supplied words were “ it was surely approaching.” This
m ight have been a mere guess. I t was correct, however.
9. A n auctioneer in the heat o f exaggeration. “ The Em peror
o f that isle is not a man o f weak taste. H e w ill have nothing that
is n ot the best and the m ost beautiful. W hen he selected an artist
he had agents run from one end o f the isle to the other, and bring
to him the names o f those who are most skilful, and from these
he selects the one that is most worthy o f the honor conferred by
royalty. B u t his palaces w ill not hold all the fine things that are
made for him . Some never get into the presence o f his majesty
that are better examples o f the highest art than the best he owns.
This that we offer to-day
T he supplied words were “ is im ported directly from the royal
stock.” There was nothing to suggest the words to be used, although
the idea was apparent to every m ind in the room. N o one supposed
fo r a m om ent that the article offered fo r sale, after that introduc
tion, would be anything but an im port from the crowds o f good things
that were too numerous fo r the palaces o f the E m peror o f Japan.
B ut the use o f the w ord im ported, and the w ord directly, and the
word stock, could not be surm ised; n or the arrangement by which
they fell into place in the sentence. W e challenge any student o f
this cycle to read this sentence up to the break, or pause, to some
friends, and ask them to supply the words lacking, and they will
I
PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS JUT

fail to do so. Many o f them m ight furnish the exact ideas. We
w ill say, however, that an experimenter, who had listened fo r a
half hour to the auctioneer, would have gathered his pet phrases,
and he was accustomed to say “ im ported directly” quite often, as it
had a big sound. H e also had a likin g fo r the term “ royal stock.”
H ere m ay be the key to the guess if it could be called such. Even
so, it was m ost creditable to the experimenter, as it led the way
to a development o f the m ind fo r very practical uses, as we shall
see later on.
10. A business m an explaining a deal, as he called it. “ I had
inside inform ation and knew how to act. I knew that I could take
m y time and the other s i d e ....................... .”
The supplied words were “ would com e to m e.”
11. The same man talking. “ I had the cash, so they need have
no fear o f getting their money. N or would they have to wait a
m inute after the agreement was reached. B ut they haggled a long
time about the price, and I told them
The supplied words were “ that they must decide at once or let
m e out.” This could not be a clear guess. The first part o f it
m ight be expected, but the entire supply could not be anticipated.
T he m an in question was an exceedingly easy one to make his
thoughts apparent.
12. A nother man talking business. “ The terms are easy and
you w ill not have any fau lt to find with the treatment you w ill receive
i f you decide to buy this tract of land. The price stated is very low
and I am instructed by the owner to say that he w ill n ot make any
further concession. I f you knew what it cost him you
T he agent never finished the sentence. H e did as m any business
men have a fau lt o f doing, start to say something which they do
not take the trouble to finish. B ut this agent did in fa ct make the
end of the statement in his own m ind, and it was as fo llo w s : “ would
not pay his price.” This proved to be true, fo r the would-be pu r
chaser acted on his own telepathic knowledge and insisted on a
lower price and he secured i t . '
In a case like the last the ability to fill in the breaks made in
business conversation m ay often brin g advantages.
In business, more than in public speaking or teaching, the pauses
are fa r from, being few. In half an hour’ s talk not lon g ago a
m erchant made 124 such pauses, and some of them were unfinished
statements. H e thus afforded an opportunity to his listener to
catch his ideas ahead o f him , and in the sentences that were left
unfinished he kept back thoughts that he fou n d would not be best
to utter. These could be caught out o f his m ind by a good ex
perimenter. The most successful business man is one who avoids
form ulating his thoughts in such a way that they can be taken
from him .
Here we seem to have the antagonism o f two kinds of pauses. In
the last cycle we showed the value o f m aking a pause in which to
reflect or take time to think well before speaking. In this cycle
we have the pauses that arc so com m on in every kind o f use. B ut
the m an .in the last cycle who makes the pauses is the experim enter;
and the man in this cycle who does n ot make the pauses is also
the experimenter. H e has now changed to a listener. B efore he
was trying to secure good advice by taking plenty o f tim e in which
to think out the subject. Here is the same person trying to fill
in the pauses fo r the other party who makes them n ot fo r reflection^
but as a fault. I t is very likely that he has no consciousness of
the operations o f hiL Other M ind when he stumbles in speech. Con
sciousness w ill sometimes flee and stay away so lo n g that it cannot
recognize even itself. There must be life to secure advantage in this
pause, no m atter who makes it.
The dead m ind is c m m o n am ong children and dull talkers.
The boy in school who tries to recite a poem from m em ory and
whose m ind fails him in the m idst o f a line, has no consciousness
of any Other M ind. H e m ay be. aware o f his predicament and
laugh or cry at it. H e starts at the beginning and tries to connect
the m issing thought by acquired momentum. Some can do this.
They have said the poem over at home to themselves so m any times
that all they have now to do in public is to get a good start, avoid
interruption and distracting causes, and slide through it by acquired
m o tio n ; j'ust as a hoop w ill stand n p as lon g as it can be kept going.
This is n ot an interval in the m ind, but a dead brain. It is o f
the same grade o f value as the drowsiness is when com pared to the
reverie. In the latter the m in d is tense, and fu ll of m agnetism ;
while the drowsy brain is sim ply dull and w ithout energy enough
to keep awake. T o the sleepy person the fa d in g consciousness is
the way to tem porary oblivion. In the reverie the brain is wide
awake, and sleep is ten thousand miles off.
T o the forgetfu l m ind the same experience holds true.
So in the many breaks and unfinished sentences that occur in
conversation, there is a dullness and stupidity of m ind, or the lack

o f habit in a good style o f extempore delivery. Some persons never
finish the m ajority o f their sentences. Some see the end o f them all
in the beginning. One o f the rules o f good address is never to
start a sentence that you cannot see the end of before you utter
the first words. This is also one o f the secrets o f an easy flow o f
speech in oratory.
Men and women who are unusually keen in m ind are able to
fill out most, i f not all, o f the unfinished sentences and remarks
they hear in conversation. One m an who is com pelled to meet
scores o f people every dayr, says that, i f he did not have the g ift
o f know ing what they wanted better than they know themselves, he
could never get through his day’ s work. There is an immense
amount o f truth in this statem ent; m ore, in fact, than the ordinary
m ind can understand. There are m any men and some women so
placed in life that they must accomplish m uch in the period o f tim e
allotted them each day, and it is as m uch a part o f their habits
to read the m inds of others very quickly, as it is to do their other
work. T hey do not pretend that they can take the thoughts out o f
a silent m ind, although m ost o f them do this in many instances;
but, when a caller has begun to speak on a subject, the whole line
o f thought is quickly presented to the keener m ind and every idea
is plain in a flash. Business is done speedily under such circum
stances.
One woman said o f her duties as the head o f a great organ ization :
“ I f I had to wait fo r people to tell me their stories, I would
have no tim e to do them good. I let them begin, and the rest is
plain to me and I proceed to results w ithout delay.”
A m an said o f a great financier to w hom he made a visit on
business:
“ H e heard me for about five seconds, then he finished fo r me
what I had to say. A ll the way through he seemed to know what I
wanted and all I had in m y m ind.”
T his ability has three stages:
1. The habit o f fillin g in the pauses and breaks made by others.
2. T he habit o f anticipating the remarks and thoughts o f others.
3. The habit o f guessing what is in the m inds o f others.
This cycle has been thus far devoted to the first o f these three
habits. It has been shown to be merely a form o f experim enting in
part, and then a m ost im portant trait in actual use. In fa ct there
is no mental equipment so worthy o f acquisition as this. Y ou

have a right to all the knowledge you can g e t; and m uch o f the
knowledge o f life is lodged in the m any other m inds that you come
in contact with. T hey would conceal it from you, and often to
their gain at your expense. I f a man pays five thousand dollars
for a piece o f land and is w illing to sell it to you fo r seven thousand
dollars, but insists that ten thousand dollars is his very lowest
figure; and you have means o f ascertaining that he is trying to
hold you up fo r that extra three thousand dollars, you have a right
to know it.
I f a man has a m achine that seems to be as good as new, and he
tells you that it is new, but conceals the fa ct that he bought it as
second-hand, and that it has an inherent defect that cannot be
discovered by the ordinary methods o f examination, and you are
able to draw these facts from his m ind, you have a righ t to do so.
I f a woman tells you that she is your friend and that she has
no ill feeling whatever against you, even after some slight misunder
stan din g; while, as a matter of fact, she is tryin g to underm ine you
in a certain matter, you have a right to know all about it i f you
can find out through any legitim ate means.
I f any person seeks to take any advantage o f you, and pretends
to your face that nothing but the purest friendship exists between
you, the real facts ought to be ascertained by you. In times past
it was nseless to try to get at the truth. T o-d ay there are keen-
m inded m en and women who can delve down into other minds and
bring up the naked truth.
A s m ay be expected, this power has its dangers. In a recent case
an inventor who had reached a most valuable discovery, one that
would make him rich, fe ll in with a man who was skilled in telepathy
and who extracted this secret from his m ind. There had been no
attempt to secure a patent. The m eeting was wholly w ithout de
sign. T he inventor lived in a tow n o f about twenty thousand
inhabitants, and boarded at a hotel. One Saturday evening ju st
before dark, a man came along in an automobile, and pu t up until
M onday at the hotel. I t rained all day Sunday. This man hap
pened to sit next to the inventor at the dining table, and so they
became acquainted the same night o f the arrival; and, as they were
both interested in the same line o f subjects, they talked matters over
on the next day. A s was his invariable custom, the inventor
did n ot even refer to his patent and the great discovery he had
m ad e; but once in his remarks he made a pause, then stopped short,

as he fou n d that it was n ot wise to finish what he had started to say.
This break was quickly filled in by the traveler, and he caught the
idea that was so carefully guarded. On his return to his home, he
perfected the patent, and when the inventor made application, he
fou n d that this very man had anticipated him and secured it. He
recalled the occasion when he met him , and seemed to think that
something he had said and was unconscious o f having said, was the
cause o f his downfall.
B ut we do not have to go to the ranks of greatness to find mea,
and women who are endowed with the faculty of anticipating the
needs and wants of others. Such gifted people are present in
numbers all over the civilized world. It may seem like a faint
degree of telepathy when they exercise this power, but it is m ighty
potent in its usefulness. It works a double advantage all the time.
W e know a woman in the early fifties, which means that she L
perhaps nearer fifty than sixty, who has a beautiful home and the
means o f entertaining her friends and guests; but who lacks in
the m ost abject degree this power o f anticipation. Those who come
to visit at her urgent request, rarely return, although they are in
vited. T he woman is refined, educated, polished in her manners, and
in every way prepared to make things pleasant fo r those who
are in her house. B ut she does not seem to realize that there are
hundreds of small things that make a visit pleasant or unpleasant.
F or instance, it is quite annoying to have no towels in the bath
room during a week’ s stay. O f course the m aid is supposed to look
after that matter, but who looks after the m a id ; and if the m aid is
not in evidence, what is to be done? On a certain visit o f a clergy
man for three days and nights at this home with his w ife, who
were assigned a fine bedroom , there was but one chair in the room
and that too weak to hold up either guest. It was a gold-leafed
chair that was expensive, but had been off its legs, and was tem po
rarily on again ; yet dangerous to sit down upon.
A t the table there was a continual lack of anticipation o f the
needs and com forts of guests. The things were trifling but were
potent. So small a matter as would seem o f no consequence would
m ar the whole dinner. T he clergym an, in repeating the case fo r
report, and w ithout any intention o f criticizing the lady, said that
he counted twenty bits o f neglect that he had not found in other
homes, all due to the fact that the woman had left things to her
servants, they had le ft them to her, and neither had the magnetism
or life to know or care. The result is that this woman has few or
no guests now visiting her.
On the other hand, there is a bright woman, not quite as wealthy,
but far more qualified to meet friends under her own roof, who antici
pates every want, need and com fort, and adds many extra details
o f pleasure in advance of their visits. She inspects everything in
the rooms, and knows every detail o f the house and o f the dining
table; so that her guests say o f her that it is a pleasure to go there.
H ere is a reception at which there are many persons present.
The hostess does not let matters drift, nor does she leave the m an
agement wholly to her servants. She K N O W S what is to be done
even in the slightest details, and sees that these are executed by
those in her employ. The latter im bibe her spirit o f care and antic
ipation and give the matter their fu ll watchfulness. The result
is that everything passes off smoothly and all are pleased. In after
days there are genuine words o f approval fo r her methods. B ut
in the party itself, while it is in progress, she anticipates the needs
and wants o f all who come under her roof. On one occasion, when
cnly six young couples were invited to meet her own sons and
daughters, she was alert to make them agreeable, companionable,
com fortable and quick to fa ll into the pleasures of the evening.
There are many little things that can be thought out in advance.
N ot alone in receptions and parties, but in the com m on routine
of household duties, members of the fam ily may develop the habit
o f anticipating the needs, wants and wishes o f each other. Old
people are entitled to this fore-watchfulness. Some persons cultivate
and never lose this habit, while others are clum sy and neglectful.
In a large city there lived a man who was exceedingly popular.
Some said it was due to his pleasant smile, with which he greeted
people. Others said it was due to his ■wonderful tact, whereby he
could m aintain his own control over others without appearing to
antagonize them. H e was a sort of self-appointed leader o f society,
and soon every hostess in the city was glad to have his advice and
services, although he came up from the humbler ranks.
N o affair was ever stale or stagnant where he was present, fo r
he saw to it that all were en jo}ring themselves. In many little
things he could read ahead, and thereby made each occasion one o f
real pleasure.
Business men have cultivated the habit o f anticipating the wants
o f their patrons. D id you ever step into a store where a 'woman

w a n iei to buy something fo r a present and had not the slightest
idea wha* to b u y ? The clumsy clerk o f which there are legion,
either will take no interest in her, or let her go to another store;
but t i e proprietor, or some head clerk who has the power o f antici
pating the wants of others, will quickly bring out the desired article.
In law trials the lawyer who, prior to the actual hearing court,
is able to anticipate the moves to be made in the progress of the
trial, w ill stand a better chance to win than the one wrlio lets things
drift.
One attorney says: “ I shall leave no stone unturned to have a
perfect preparation fo r the trial. I w ill be ready fo r every move
that the other side may make.”
A nother lawyer says: “ It is useless to try to find out how the
case will proceed when in court. I t may go one way or it may
go another. A ll tim e spent in advance o f the hearing is wasted, for
we cannot shape our plan o f battle until we know what we have to
meet.” This seems like good com m on sense; but the Other M ind
says it is the way o f the sluggard. Cases are won by the first kind
o f attorney who makes ready fo r every move that m ay be made.
One of the greatest generals o f the Civil W ar had the same habit.
H e anticipated all the turns and phases of a com ing battle, and
knew there were so many moves possible. Some o f these were highly
probable; some were possible o n ly ; and others were remotely possible
or very improbable. Y e t he thought out what he must do in each
o f the circumstances. On one occasion the enemy made a move
that perplexed all the other generals and it proved to be one of
those combinations that had been considered rem otely possible or
very im probable; on the principle that the unexpected happens some
times. B ut as this very move had been anticipated by the general
: : mm and, he knew in a flash what to do, and so ordered. A n y
• who is fam iliar with the life and battles o f Napoleon, will
h n i this habit o f anticipation one o f the secrets of his successes.
Y e t iin g in ordinary life is more practical and useful than the
i e v e l :i e i habit o f anticipating the wants and needs o f others, and
even the plans and purposes. The latter part o f the transactions
: : life make up the ground where all the conflicts are lost and won,
whether in im portant or in trifling matters.
T h e employer who seems to realize what his employees have in
m ind, or what their real usefulness is, has an advantage. B y antici
pation lie is enabled to prevent disagreements. The employees Have

also the opportunity to make themselves more useful to him directly,
and through their efforts to know his wishes and the needs o f the
business.
In the home every member o f the fam ily who w ill study ahead
all the contingencies that are about to demand attention, w ill find
the duties easier and their execution lighter. Then there is the
pleasant side o f the home. A w ife says, “ M y husband is so thought
fu l of m e.” A mother says, “ M y son seems to know all my needs
and is ever thinking o f m y com fort.”
T o look into the cause o f this remark, we find that the husband
in the m orning, before he has left the house, says to h im se lf: “ M y
wife w ill be alone so m uch o f the day. W hat w ill she have to
amuse her, to busy her, to make married life worth w h ile? I t is
only one day, but days are long when there is a drag in existence.”
H e w ill think out the whole period, and think o f him self as a
woman in her place, and ask how he w ould like her routine life.
W hat w ould he m ost desire under the circum stances? A n d the
answers he makes to him self, he w ill apply to her. A non-fertile
brain w ill not cover m uch g ro u n d ; but we are dealing with acute
and fru itfu l minds.
These qualities are developed by the practice that is laid out in
the cycles that precede this. I f you belong to the class that is not
able to anticipate the many small, as well as some of the greater
details and emergencies that are always arising in the day and
the week o f every life, you may so train your habits that you will
acquire the power. I t is fo r this purpose that the present book is
written. M en and women who are said to possess this power as a
g ift, have in fa ct come to it as the result of a regim e that has
grown up o f itself. The same is true o f magnetism. Some are
naturally m agnetic, others have developed the p ow er; but the latter
merely adopt the same traits that are present in those who are
believed to be naturally endowed. The cultivated form is m uch
more effective. The natural form is useful only after it has been
trained. In its prim itive form it is a power, like steam ; but
every pow'er requires direction and control as well as shaping for
detailed uses.
There are three stages in the work o f the present c y c le :
1. The first stage is that which sets up the habit o f filling in
the pauses and breaks made by others. W hile this may have a slow
and discouraging beginning, it soon begins to show growth and

becomes in tim e one o f the most useful o f all habits. I t is a very
simple proposition. The thoughts to be supplied are words that
are already created in the minds o f others, and your work is to
speak them ju st ahead o f the m en and women who are about to
litter them. This line o f experim enting is often used in play. The
difficulty is that it can generally be worked only after you acquire
the ability to throw the m ind in to emptiness, w hich can be done
in one-tenth o f a second. U n til you have such ability, there would
be little use in playing with the art. Y e t it w ill succeed sometimes
by force o f the natural g ift o f telepathy, and w ithout study or
preparation. These instances are neither frequent nor consistent, as
the power is very u n certain ; sometimes m anifesting itself and at
other times being delinquent.
2. T he second stage is that which sets up the habit o f anticipating
the remarks and thoughts of others. T his is close to the first stage,
but the distinction is clear. In the first stage the thoughts are already
shaped into words and the words are com ing fro m the minds o f
oth ers; in fact, are on the way. In the second stage, the remarks
and thoughts have not taken shape, but are intentions and purposes,
as well as wants and needs. T his is m ore difficult, but can be
acquired; and, when once made a habit, the results are m ost pleasing
and surprising. Our claim is that such habits m ay be developed
by every man and woman. W e have known o f so m uch success
along these lines by those who have carried on the experiments that
there is no reason to believe that any human being o f sound m ind
is denied the power to develop these habits.
3. The third stage is that which sets up the habit of guessing
what is in the minds o f others. It is guesswork, but is an art
that has been increased to a remarkable degree by practice. It
seems closely allied to the first two stages, but is a step beyond
the second. In fa ct m any persons have acquired a natural power
o f telepathy by practicing guessing. In supplying words in the
pause under the first stage, the im mediate presence o f the speaker
and his own thoughts are helpful, and true telepathy is the result.
In anticipations there are close thoughts to im pel the action of the
m ind. In guesses the connection is somewhat removed. Y et, on
the other hand, the practice o f guessing is a good one that is very
easy to pu t into use.
It is made a business by professional fortune-tellers o f the highest
g ra d e; and some o f them becom e adept in the art after years o f

practice. W e had in our em ploy at one time a m an who afterwards
entered the m inistry, who had been a fortune-teller. H is conscience
had troubled him and he gave up the business. H e had been looked
u pon as a remarkably successful predieter o f com ing events in the
lives of those who patronized him . H e had a nicely furnished suite
o f rooms in a large city, where he maintained an Oriental mystery
about him self and the place its e lf; and in this place we m et him.
H a vin g been desirous o f testing by certain rules and laws the
genuineness o f members o f such profession, we fou n d this m an hold
in g the confidence o f hundreds o f people o f wealth who consulted
him w ith great regularity fo r advice on business and social affairs,
and paid him h igh retainers. One o f his customers had said to u s :
“ There is a man who is honest and whose predictions are genuine.
In a certain case he told facts that he could n ot have known in
any other way except the occult. T he next week he made a m ost
remarkable prediction which had never been in the m inds o f any
o f us, and it came true ju st as he said. I have never known him
to make a mistake on a point o f any im portance.”
On this advice, com ing from a person standing very high in
every way, we went to his studio. There was an attendant m aking
appointments, and we had to wait several days before our turn came.
T hen we went in and were led to a very beautiful room , especially
furnished, and dim ly lighted. This m an had a h igh forehead, deep
eyes w ith heavy brow s; and a peculiar head-dress, patterned after
some bygone age o f the priesthood, made him very impressive. H e
thus began with the eager expectancy o f his patron. B elief in him
was also invited, n ot only by his reputation but by his methods and
environments. T h ere was a sort o f self-hypnotism about the whole
proceeding.
“ W hat would you have ?” he asked very solemnly.
“ K now ledge o f the past, the present, and the future,” was the
reply.
“ W hat have you o f the past that troubles you ?”
“ N othing, except a desire to test your powers.”
The age was then stated as being between three years, and it was
correct. T hat was a guess, and we know it. The fa ct o f marriage
was then stated, and this was accurate, but it was also a guess.
T he loss o f a dear relative proved to be a grandfather, but was not
definitely announced at first. There was a feeling about fo r facts
and the hope that some remark w ould be dropped that w ould lead
the way. In the pretense o f m aking a direct statement, a question
would be launched forth under disguise, trusting that a reply would
help to make matters easier. B ut we led on and on, u ntil there
was only the grandfather’s death to fill in the fact o f the loss o f a
dear relative. H ad all fou r grandparents been living, then the
generation preceding must have been called on fo r this deficiency.
A serious quarrel in the past, a very sad accident, and other events
were announced, but could not be substantiated.
“ W hy do you wish to test my pow ers?” he asked at length.
“ I f you are gifted with extraordinary powers there is a position
open fo r you where you m ay make an honest livin g at high salary.”
The present was gone over, with the same results. T he future
then loom ed up in brilliant opportunity fo r flights o f the im agination
unchallenged. “ Y ou are to meet an enemy, cross the water, and
inherit a large property,” were some o f the stock guesses; but they
were o f no value as accurate predictions.
Ill health, attended by the voice o f conscience, as well as the
fea r o f a new law against such professions, drove him out o f business
and we had an opening fo r him where he was enabled to earn an
honest living. D u ring this term o f close acquaintance, he explained
his art and his remarkable successes b y calling them shrewd guesses.
As m ost o f his patrons came to him fo r advice, he was always
allowed to question them very closely, and between the lines he
made careful guesses and so often hit the mark that he was half
inclined to have faith in him self as possessing great powers.
H e had made Ms m ind so sensitive to impressions that he really
could probe into a person’ s life with w onderful accu racy; and he
used this skill in ordinary affairs when there was nothing to gain
by it in the shape o f financial reward. This was after he had
given up the practice o f fortune-telling. W e fou n d him a very
w onderful man.
Several others, who were driven out o f business by fear o f the
law, were hunted up and their methods obtained. T he rule seemed
to have been that each o f them had started as pretenders, and had
com e to a degree o f telepathic power by the habit o f guessing.
In the case o f a woman, now very old, it appears that when she
was in her twenties her husband was hurt in his body so that h<?
became helpless and the support o f the fam ily fe ll on her. B eing
in a city, she changed her name, m oved to a new house, opened
parlors, kept her face veiled, and started in the business at low
prices. She had never even claimed to possess any degree o f clair
voyant pow ers; but the habit o f guessing, which she had acquired
as a means o f entertainm ent fo r herself and friends, made her m ind
sensitive, and in some details she became an accurate guesser o f
facts, and surprised her clients, who spread the news to their friends.
In this way she made more than a living. The wonder o f the case
was that some men and women o f high standing in the city, had
faith in her as a most g ifted seer.
B ut guessing is employed in every profession, in every line o f
business and in the social w orld as an agency o f success. It is
akin to anticipation, and this is the m ost useful trait in human
character.
TWENTIETH CYCLE
A C E S E N S E is righ tly prized

A n d all conjoined are used
Regardless o f the law
That each may throw its power
In to a comm on whole
F o r the support o f one.
S E P U L A N D P R A C T IC A L em ploym ent o f this power

is taught in this work. H a d it been thought a mere
plaything, or some w ild agency o f occult character,
no page of this book would have been written. As
has already been amply shown, the Other M in d is
all-powerful and all-knowing, and these attributes mean something
more than any physical quality can convey. T hey ought, at least,
to serve hum anity in hundreds o f ways.
T o know what cannot otherwise be known at all, or too late to be
o f use, is a valuable acquisition; and any practice that w ill develop
this power is w orth the trying.
In planning to develop a system o f practice, the fa ct was not
overlooked that m am r persons possessed this facu lty in keen degree
who made no use o f it except in the perform ance o f the duties of
life ; while others had it in less degree and were practically uncon
scious o f it. On the other hand the great doers o f things in this
world were com pelled to depend largely on the same power which,
by necessity, they had increased in the very act o f using it. W e
fou n d that noth in g w orthy o f note had ever been accomplished
unless this power had been the right-hand helper in the achievement.
These plain facts were the foundation o f the present undertaking.
Then came the determ ination to adhere at all tim e to the practical
and useful side o f the art. A ll through the pages that have pre
ceded m ay be seen the instances o f the m anner in which advantage
after advantage lias been gained, which would have been totally
lost in the absence of this aid.
The cycle ju st preceding this is made the means of showing the
plainest and m ost com m onplace uses o f a power that has no lim ita
tion. A casual reader o f that cycle w ill s a y :
“ These things are not new. They are as old as the hills. The
idea of saying that the man who pauses to reflect is cultivating a
power. W hy, every clay we see scores of persons stop and reflect.
T hey think twice, and so avoid mistakes. That is nothing new.”
So m uch the better.
H ow would it have looked fo r a person in the m idst of a weighty
consideration, to have struck an attitude of severe deliberation and
thereby have created amusement ? Even now how does it look fo r any
one to stop to think over a proposition ? A n inexperienced teacher
was giving instruction in the use o f the telepathic pause, which
need not be more than a second o f time, when a woman in the class
sa id :
“ D o you not think people w ill regard it as absurd to see us stop
all at once to do our thinking by ourselves ?”
The teacher had forgotten the more com m on fa ct o f human nature,
and could not reply. B ut had that class been taken into any office
where matters o f serious im portance are discussed, they would have
seen every party to the conference stop frequently, give a far-a-way
look, and then resume the details o f the discussion. In a meeting
o f a Board o f Directors of a National Bank we had one day a most
serious problem to consider. There were eleven members present
and the cashier; and the conference lasted three hours. W e recall
distinctly hearing the president say to one o f the m em bers:
“ Come down out o f the clouds and let us know what you have
in m ind.” The director addressed had his face uplifted, his hand
to his chin, and he did in fact seem to be roam ing in the clouds.
Later on in the meeting, another member was addressed by the
president somewhat as fo llo w :
“ Come back in the room. Y o u are too far away.5’ T his created
a general laugh. B ut every m an was thinking. There would be a
running fire o f suggestions, then when some knotty proposition arose,
they would get in to the deeper thinking, and were fa r away. I f these
m oods could have been reported by accurate count, we are sure that
a total of more than a thousand instances of the pause occurred that
afternoon. T hey were not due to any attempt to practice telep
ONE SENSE TELEPATHY
athy, but sim ply were natural pauses such as all careful men. and
wom en adopt when they reflect.
They are as old as the hills.
B ut the practice o f u tilizing them in connection with the effort
to empty the m ind, so as to bring a consciousness o f the echo o f
the Other M ind into use, is both new and practical. T hat it is a
valuable practice has been attested by the remarkable results that
have been attained after thorough development.
In to this same pause there is now to be introduced a new stage
known as one-sense telepathy. L et us see i f you understand all
three steps in this progress:
1. There is the pause which is as old as the hills.
2. Then there is the introduction into the pause o f the habit o f
em ptying the conscious m ind to adm it the power o f the Other M ind.
This com bination is new. B ut the habit o f em ptying the m ind is
old.
3. N ow we come to the em ploym ent o f the same pause fo r the
purpose o f em erging in to one sense, and the exclusion o f the others.
T his com bination is n e w ; but the use of one sense at a tim e is as old
as the habit o f pausing to reflect.
Here are combinations that are new, while the parts pu t to
gether are old and natural habits. There has never lived on earth
a m an or woman o f intelligence or good judgm ent who has not
paused to throw the m ind into a deeper process o f thinking. N or
has there ever lived a m an or wom an who has n ot emptied the m ind
in reverie, unless such person was o f the animal nature. Reverie
is an em ptying o f the m in d to a greater or less degree, and the cor
responding admission o f the Other M ind. In em ptying the con
sciousness to the last degree, there is a total absence o f the m ind,
which is called “ no-m an’s-land.” This can be done com pletely in
a reverie, and the result is some product o f the highest genius i f
there is any way by which to connect with the consciousness, so as
to know som ething about it. I f genius is to be used on earth, it must
be available to earthly intelligence.
When the reverie is shortened, as it can be by the practice to that
end, it becomes the pause; and this is the com bination referred to
as the second step. A s all persons can go readily in to reverie after
practice, as prescribed, and as they can easily learn to shorten their
reveries, the pause is soon developed; and this can be used in tht
m idst o f any conversation with other persons. Thus, while tht
<S| OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND
reverie is intended fo r privac 3r, the pause is possible in conversation

or in any transaction with other persons.
This shows that the second step, or the em ptying o f the m ind com
bined in the natural and customary pause, is one of the most practical
o f habits, and useful at all times. It cannot be laid open to the
charge o f being likely to attract attention; fo r the ordinary pause
is so com m on that it does not even receive notice unless very long.
Y o u yourself have often remarked on the seeming dream-state of
some friend who is lost in thought, and you may have jokingly
brought the conscious m ind back again.
The third step of itself is as old as the hills, to use a frequent
criticism or something that has come u p out o f the dim past as a
phase of human nature.
One-sense thinking is one thing.
One-sense telepathy is another.
Thinking done with the conscious m ind is o f matters that are
brought there through the sense of sight, or o f hearing, or of smell,
or o f taste, or of touch. T his is the fu ll scope of that m in d ; unless
it reasons or draws conclusions; and all reasoning and all deduc
tions are based on something that started in the physical part o f ex
istence ; and nothing can be physical and be known except through the
five ordinary senses.
Telepathy has always been referred to as the passing of knowledge
through channels other than the ordinary senses. This is the defi
nition given o f it everywhere, and fo r the past hundreds o f years.
Therefore one-sense thinking is one thing, and one-sense telepathy
is quite another.
The form er is the use o f the conscious m ind, and relates to in fo r
m ation or knowledge com ing in through the five senses, or one or
more o f th em ; or reasoning based on past experience with them.
The latter is the use o f the Other M ind, and the return o f one sense
only to catch the echo.
B y this tim e it is well understood that the knowledge that comes
from the Other M ind is caught, not directly, but by the quick re
turn o f the conscious m ind in time to hear the echo o f its presence.
As a rule two or more senses are active in every return o f con
sciousness; sometimes three, and often fou r. I t is rare in any act
o f life that all five senses are at work in the conscious m ind. "What
you read comes to you from the sense o f sight, and is attended by
the sense o f touch, as where you hold a ^ t e r , or a book, or paper.
ONE SENSE TELEPATHY
The sense of touch does n ot convey the facts that are read, but the
brain is conscious o f that sense. I t makes no difference how the
senses are used, if they are affirmatively or negatively active.
The person who listens is conscious o f the various senses that
are active at the tim e ; although automatically so m uch o f the time.
H earing conveys what is transferred to the brain as kn ow ledge; but
sight often accompanies the transm ission; as where you hear a
person sing and see the person at the same time.
Three senses are directly employed when a singer stands in a room
or hall perfum ed with flowers. The flowers may be beautiful, their
fragrance may be exquisite, and the voice o f the singer may be cul
tured.
F ou r senses m ight be at work if you were eating at a banquet or
dinner when there was music and the tables were laden with flow ers;
and all five senses are directly involved when the hands or other part
o f the body are engaged in the duties of eating. M astication is a
sense o f taste and touch. I t is difficult to separate the sense o f touch
from any conscious act.
The scattering of the senses by em ploying two or more o f them
in the usual acts o f life, is com m on and serves the ordinary purposes
o f working and thinking. B ut when an extra degree o f thought is
desired, it is customary to lim it the senses, and often one only is
em ployed. The oft-quoted instances o f the blind need not be repeated
here, nor the custom o f the Indians to develop the sense o f hearing
at the expense of all others when on the hunt or the warpath.
A n interesting instance is that o f a party o f white hunters in recent
times who, by closing the eyes and standing perfectly still, were able
to hear the flow of a distant b rook ; but who could n ot hear it as
soon as they opened their eyes. A s they were sadly in need o f water
they proceeded to locate the brook, but the direction was most un
certain. B y agreement they went fo r about tw o hundred yards, each
in a different d irection ; then closed the eyes and listened. One alone
could hear the flow ing water, and he called to the other two to
com e up. This they did, and all heard the brook quite plainly
now, but still in the depth of the woods the direction was not cer
tain ; so again they separated, this time about fifty yards each, and
one heard the flow of running water very distinctly. T hey then
fou n d it quite easily.
In a person who is blind the sense o f touch is very sensitive. This
has been proved in so many instances that it is unnecessary to re
peat any o f th e m ; but the ease with which the fingers o f a blind
person can detect letters on a printed page, when the letters are not
raised as is the usual custom, is surprising to those who cannot do
it.
A person who is deaf has better eyesight, all things being equal,
than one who is not deaf.
One who is blind can hear more keenly.
P eople who are not blind but who withdraw m entally the sense o f
sight, have greater acuteness o f hearing. T he brain is affected by
either sense. W hile the eyes are generally taxed to produce hypnotic
sleep, the ears m ay be so used, as in the case of the physician who
secures control o f his patients by having them listen to the tick in g o f
a watch or some monotonous sound. The same brain-centers are
reached by either one sense or another.
Eiver pilots, directing great boats through narrow streams fo r
many miles in a fo g , steer by the sound reflected from the banks.
W e recall com ing u p a river fo r nearly one hundred miles in a fo g
so dense nothing could be seen. Soundings fo r depth were constant,
but the boat maintained a good speed in spite o f them, as it was ap
parent that a sudden shoal could not be avoided by such precaution.
E ach turn in the river, and the dangerous narrows were known by
the sound from the banks. O f course it was necessary fo r the pilot
to know the whole river. A stranger could n ot do it, nor would a
stranger be allowed to steer a boat. I f a bank was low, the reflected
sound w ould be entirely different from that com ing from a high
bank. So i f the river was wider at one place than another, the sound
would change to suit the distance. The fo g served to lessen the sense
o f sight, and the watchfulness ahead was not necessary.
On the other hand the p ilot, on a bright day, w ould listen to very
little, and apparently be lost to the talk and noise about him , while
he scrutinized the waters ahead o f him with sharp gaze. H is acute
sense o f hearing had gone fo r the tim e being, and his acute sense
o f sight came into p la y ; while, on fo g g y days, the reverse was true.
A blind person can walk in and out o f rooms, even in strange
houses by the sense o f hearing. A n open door is readily detected
before it is reached. So an object near at hand is heard by the fine
reflection o f the sound, or the change in the closeness o f the air,
or some action on the drum o f the ear or the general body through
the pressure o f the air, as when a wall or other obstruction is ap
proached. This susceptibility is due to experience. A person who is
I
ONE SENSE TELEPATHY WB
blindfolded and who tries to detect the presence o f objects by the

change in the pressure o f the air on the body or on the ear, w ould
n ot succeed in doing so until after p ra ctice; and the more the sense
is concentrated by the withdrawal o f the other senses fo r the time
being, the speedier w ill be the results.
I n a reverie all senses are nullified. T he eyes are either closed;
or, if open, they have a far-away look, known as the parallel gaze.
Remarks and sounds are not heard, unless they prove distracting,
in which ease they break the reverie. Taste and smell are not active;
as m ay be seen in the case of the inventor who was fon d o f confection
ery, whose m ind could work better under the stimulus o f that agency,
and who pu t by mistake a piece of putty in his m outh w hich he
picked up abstractedly fo r a cream drop. This he chewed w ith all
the satisfaction usual in that enjoym ent. Or the lack o f smell is
experienced as in the case o f the authoress who, in the m idst o f
deep reflection, allowed her cake to b u m to a crisp, and the smoke to
fill the room , w ithout m ore notice than an attempt to brush the
smoke away from her paper. The sense o f touch is often absent in
the reverie, and m any instances have been published in various
works covering this point.
T hus it is seen that every one o f the senses is pu t away by the
reverie. N o wonder they are vacated by hjrpnotism.
A s the reverie may be shortened to the space o f a second o f time,
or less, it is possible to concentrate all the conscious thought on
one alon e; for, i f all five senses m ay be set aside by the reverie or
by the interval, fou r o f them may be set aside ju st as easily after
the process is known.
I t often happens that a man or woman, desiring to hear some re
mark or sound that is not distinct, w ill place the hand to the listen
ing ear, and turn the gaze away. The eyes are occasionally closed in
this action. I t is all done as a mere h a b it; and every person adopts
it at times. Closing the eyes alone w ill increase the sense o f hearing,
after a certain amount o f practice. T he difference is so slight at first
that it is not appreciable; but each repetition adds to the keenness
o f the single sense effort.
W hat is therefore a com m on habit o f the conscious m in d be
comes the basis o f one-sense telepathy.
T his use, while com paratively rare, is n ot unknown in telepathy.
In that form known as hypnotism, it is most frequent when the
senses are played upon. T h e follow in g are some o f the deceptions
that suggestion w ill produce in that state if properly brought to the

m inds o f the subjects:
1. A young woman was asked to name what she would m ost prefer
to receive, and she said she would like a bunch o f roses. A news
paper was fold ed to resemble somewhat, but rather clum sily, the
shape o f a bouquet. T his was handed to her, and she took it with
great pleasure. Soon her face lighted u p with a satisfied smile.
She seemed to see one kind from another. W ith her fingers she ar
ranged them into a more sym m etrical form , and turned them about
in one way and another several times, in order to find which particu
lar rose she liked the best. She did n ot seem to tire of them fo r
some m inu tes; then she laid them on a table. A fter a while she
happened to see them and again took them in her h ands; then
lifted the bouquet to her nose and enjoyed the fragrance. It was
plain to see that the odor o f the roses had attracted her sense o f
smell. T he p oin t o f this experience is to establish the fa ct that this
sense m ay be aroused in the b ra in ; and it is therefore a telepathic
sense corresponding to the physical sense.
2. A man who was hypnotized was told that a piece of w ood was
m ild cheese. H e did not offer to eat i t ; but merely smelled it, then
laid it down without showing interest. Later he was told that the
thing was very strong cheese. H e now took it to his nose and his
facial expression confirm ed the sense of smell. I t was no longer a
matter o f indifference. N ext the thing was said to be decayed
cheese. H e brought it to his nose, but not closely ; and as soon as he
caught the im aginary odor, his face was contorted in a m ost dis
gusted expression. H is brain actually caught the stench o f rotten
cheese. H e dropped it very quickly. W hen told later on that it
was a beautiful carnation, he did n ot take at once to the belief, but
lingered in the supposition that it was the decayed cheese. This
gradually faded in his m ind, and he slowly came to recognize the
dainty flower. N ow the fragrance was exquisite, although in fact
it was nothing but a piece of board. H e had the fu ll sensations as
naturally and realistic as i f he were in the presence of the things
themselves which he im agined this thing to be.
3. A woman in the hypnotic state was told that a book was a
block o f pure gold and that she could not lift it. She tried again
and again but without success. She was im bued w ith the one idea
that it was the weight rather than the value or beauty o f the object
that she had to deal with. H ere the sense o f touch was magnified
ONE SENSE TELEPATHY
in the brain, and a new experience created there. I t became a con-

scious fact.
4. T o test the same law, a man o f great strength was put into the
hypnotic sleep, and was told that a newspaper, which was folded
into a square, was nailed to the floor and that he could not lift it,
as it was securely fastened. H e tried, and strained at it u ntil he
was red in the face, but it would not stir. The paper was then
kicked away by the fo o t of the operator, and the subject still gave
it his attention, not seeming to note the ease with which it had
been moved.
5. T he sense o f touch is so largely worked on in all hypnotic eases
that, to repeat typical examples, would be reviewing almost the
whole scope of that practice. In the early degree o f this state, the
arm of the person is raised and he is told that he cannot lower i t ;
which proves true. Then he is told that he cannot raise it, and
this is still true. A peculiar case is cited in the books of a postman
who was never hypnotized, but who, on a particular occasion, was
cancelling stamps on letters; when an expert operator happening
along told him that he could not stop the m otion o f his arms and
h ands; that he w ould keep on the canceling until the operator
wished him to stop. The men had never m et before. T he postman
was not in the hypnotic state, but kept on with the m otion and was
n ot able to cease it until perm itted to do so.
6. T he sense o f pain has been produced out o f nothing many
thousands o f times. In ordinary wakefulness a person may, by
im agin in g things to be the matter, brin g on the conditions of ill
ness; but not the actual in ju ry to the skin and bodjr that can be p ro
duced by hypnotic suggestion. Some instances o f this kind are
already stated in the earlier stages o f this book. T he suggestior
that a piece o f paper is a severe blister, w ill actually cause the blister
to appear. A suggestion that a piece o f wood is a red hot iron
w ill produce all the suffering o f an actual burn. These things are
well known to all operators, and are enacted daily somewhere in
the experiments. A ny physician w ill tell you o f them. On the other
hand the cure o f pain has been effected by this appeal to the sense
o f touch under hypnotic suggestion. It is wholly on this principle
that psycho-therapeutics w ill soon take the place o f the medical
profession’ s practice. B ut doctors are com ing into use o f the new
m ethod very fast at this time. I t is all an appeal to the sense
o f touch.
7. A wom an was told that a piece o f bread was a delicious morsel

o f confectionery o f which she was fon d. She put it in her m outh
and enjoyed it fo r some space of tim e and swallowed it. Another
piece of the same bread was given her, and she was told that it was
a pickle, and she dealt m ore slowly with it, nibbling small corners
from it, and then seemed to have had enough. A th ird piece of
the same bread was given her, and she was told that it was a lum p
o f ice. I t chilled her hands, was very cold fo r her mouth, and
she finally discarded it. T he fou rth piece o f bread was given to her
as a hot pepper. I t was observed by her with great interest; but as
soon as she put it to her m outh the heat o f it became very severe,
and she showed signs of being distressed by i t ; yet wanted to keep
it.
8. A m an was given some sawdust and told that it was ice cream,
but that it must m elt in his m outh and not be swallowed. He
took some and put it in his m outh, then removed it with disfavor.
H e seemed to have no faith in it. H e was then told very em phati
cally that it was a most delightful kind of ice cream, and that it
was ju st what he had been wanting. ISTow he took some more,
turned it over a few times in his m outh, then with a smile pro
ceeded to masticate the sawdust. H e chewed it more with his tongue
than his teeth. A fter a while he discarded it. H e then looked
at the dish of sawdust with indifference, but soon began to eat it
with such enjoym ent that the operator had to stop the proceed
ings.
9. T he hearing o f beautiful music is very com m on in this state
when suggested. A g irl o f twenty was told that the running o f a
sewing machine was the pealing forth of the rich tones o f a church
organ, and that the music was grand beyond all description. She
was enraptured and sat fo r h a lf an hour enjoyin g it, with occasional
lapses o f interest.
10. A woman was made to believe that an ordinary table was a
piano w hich she could play. She actually did play on i t ; and
during the perform ance she made a few false touches which she
corrected ; while at times there were runs that needed fine execution.
She seemed to have an ear fo r m usic, and relished the tones o f the
instrument.
11. M any books have been published in w hich the statements were
made that persons dying had, ju st before death, heard rich music
and sometimes the spoken words o f relatives who were w aiting fo r
ONE SENSE TELEPATHY
them from the great beyond. These instances have been backed
up by fu ll accounts and often with details that make them seem
plausible on their face. In the past thirty years we have offered
every encouragement to persons to send us p roofs o f such cases; and
especially of recent happenings of the k in d ; and our works have re
ferred to some of them. A t this place we append a few that have
occurred in the past twelve months, and they seem to be o f the same
character as those previously reported. Three cases are known to
be absolutely correct and are published h e r e :
a. A young woman about thirty years o f age was dying. She had
been talking o f the hope that she would soon meet her father and
m other in heaven. H er malady was such that she retained con
sciousness almost to the end. In fa ct as she died her w ords were
distinctly rational. F or hours before the departure o f her spirit,
she seemed to hear music faintly. “ I t is so different from earthly
m usic,” she said. There were the notes o f far-away m usical in
struments so sweet and so ineffably fine that they pained the ear with
pleasure. H er face was bright and b ea u tifu l; som ething n ot her
custom when in the fu ll tide o f life. A bout an hour before she died,
the music grew louder. B ut it was a few minutes prior to the end
that she said that she heard the voices o f her m other and father
speaking to her in half song and half-spoken words.
b. A woman thirty-six years old who had lost a little boy a year
before, was subjected to hypnotic suggestion in order to restore her
nervous condition. H er sister attended the sittings as a com panion
only. D u ring the sleep which became deeper than was at first at
tem pted, she suddenly grew radiant with smiles and even laughter,
crying o u t :
“ W hy, there is m y boy again, my little d a rlin g !”
In order to enhance the belief, a small child Was brought in and
she embraced it, kissed it, and talked to it as o f old. T hen she
insisted on having the playthings brought to it fo r play again.
There came shades o f sadness at times over her face as she said :
“ Y ou have been away. W here have you been so long and so fa r ? ”
W hen she was brought ou t o f the sleep, she seemed to recall the
m eeting as in a dream. Then on succeeding visits, the further
suggestion was made o f the presence of the child in a lighter slumber.
L ittle by little the power o f the idea was carried into the lightest
possible hypnotic state, wherein the subject was conscious. T he visits
o f the child seem to have faded into indistinctness, and the substi
tuted boy did n ot fill the craving o f the m other fo r the absent one.
I t Was deemed best n ot to continue these hallucinations too long,
as the waking caused intense suffering. B ut the fa ct that is es
tablished is the power of the hypnotic state to reproduce the belief,
at least, that those that have died are alive again. M any sim ilar
cases are known to be true.
c. A woman who was ill, but who recovered very soon, was in a
slight delirium , and heard the voice o f her dead sister in heaven
as she thought. This was repeated to her scores of times, the
words being different each tim e, and n o t prolonged into sentences.
T hey were m ore like salutations and the exclamation o f surprise
and joy.
d. A little boy who was in a fever, but who had recovered fu ll health
and is probably livin g to-day, saw the face o f his little sister and
then it went from him . H e called fo r it many times. Later on he
heard sweet music, and angels were about him. H is sister had died
a few months before. Soon her voice was distinctly heard singing
w ith the others, and he exclaim ed with jo y as he heard i t :
“ N ow I hear h e r ! I t is so p r e tty !”
W hen he got well he recalled the sounds he had heard and seemed
to believe that he had actually listened to his sister sin g in g ; and
the belief has never been disturbed.
e. A wom an in a reverie which she claim ed to have occurred in
fu ll consciousness, but which is n ot probable, as no one can be sure o f
being fu lly conscious, heard music over her head which she declared
was wholly new to her, although she had been fo r years an ardent
lover o f the best music. “ W hat I heard,” she said, “ was nothing
like earthly music. I t was played on instruments such as never
have been used on this globe. I t was very fine, very beautiful and
had a swing to it in time unlike the tim e o f m usic in this w orld.”
In all these cases the fa ct stands out that the brain is able to
receive sounds where there are none at hand in the physical world.
T he woman who was d yin g m ay or may not have heard the m usic in
heaven. H er own wishes were her suggestion; as the intense hopes
and wishes o f all hum anity are agents o f suggestion to those who
are in fu ll health. Strong belief is auto-suggestion. A great healer
in the Orient who had his com in g announced b y advance heralds,
fou n d the people expecting him. They believed in him , and thou
sands begged fo r the privilege o f touching his garment. T his is
n ot the old story, but one that has occurred in every century. It
ONE SENSE TELEPATHY
is being enacted to-day. I f the people can be made to believe in

the efficacy o f a healer, then all he need do is to use one o f the de
grees o f hypnotism , in which the suggestion is made and adopted,
and the cure is readily explained when it takes place. A n y pre
tender could have the same success as is had in this era, i f the same
means to create belief Were adopted. This was shown to be true on
one occasion when the real healer was n ot able to com e, and sent
another in his place. The people, not know ing one from the other,
were healed. I t was auto-suggestion.
So when a person is dying in a strong b elief that angels, music,
or the voice o f one who has gone before, w ill be heard, the same
law may hold true.
T he wom an who had lost the little boy may have had the wish
or the thought o f him uppermost in her m ind when she passed into
induced sleep and so awoke to this sight o f him. T hat was still
auto-suggestion breaking into the subjected state.
The other cases are ascribable to the same process.
W e have thus fa r in this cycle show n:
1. T hat one sense receiving concentrated attention becomes more
powerful in waking consciousness.
2. T hat under the usual methods o f suggestion in hypnotism the
sensation o f any sense m ay be created out o f nothing, and may set
up in the brain the actual realization o f that sense. This shows
that the brain holds the sense; and that outward excitem ent is only
the conscious cause o f the sense.
3. That, instead o f requiring the aid o f a person to make the
suggestion, it can be set up by the self-belief, or expectancy.
T his leads to the fourth fact.
4. That, as auto-suggestion occurs during a reverie, or in an in
terval o f the conscious m ind, it can be utilized at w ill in telepathy.
The advantage is th is: W hen the reverie or interval is used as
taught in the preceding cycles, the m ind is thrown into nothingness
fo r a few minutes or fo r a fsw seconds as the case m ay be, and then
is brought back to the fu ll consciousness o f all the senses. This is
the main w ork in the preceding cycles.
N ow the m ind after the reverie or the interval, or pause, instead
o f being thrown back into all the senses, is to be thrown into one
sense alone.
B y com ing into one sense, the law o f the intensified power o f a
single sense, under concentration, makes the consciousness greater
and the telepathic strength superior. In confirm ation o f what is to

the world a new method, a man who actually was one in ten thou
sand and had true clairvoyant powers made this statement to us
after we had subjected his work to a fu ll analysis:
“ I believe that any man or woman can become a true clairvoyant
i f the right way is sought to cultivate the g ift. W hat you call a
reverie, I call the blank m ind. I can make the blank m ind at any
time. One tim e I could not. I learned how, and all I did was to
m ix up m y m ind by a confusion of subjects to think about and
then rest by not thinking o f any o f them. T hat was the blank m ind.
I t was your reverie. I fou n d I was often in reverie, or thinking far
away. Then I made my m ind blank. T hat was no trouble. A n y
one can do so. I knew the exact step back to consciousness. In
com ing back I brought in ideas that were not in me. They came
to m e through the step of com ing back. I think the m ind goes away
and brings the new ideas back. I do not know. B ut I fou n d later
that when I could come back, n ot to all m y consciousness, but to one
part only, as something to see, or something to hear, and so forth, as
you say, I g ot m uch greater power. T hat is the secret. Everybody
can learn it.”
B u t although this man had shown a g ift of true clairvoyance and
had employed by chance the very laws which are in vogue only in
the latest o f all methods, he seems to stand alone in his profession.
W e have n ot been told the same secret by any other p erson ; nor
have we any inform ation leading to the belief that it is in use by any
one else.
B efore we m et him this same law had been worked out by our
experimenters, and fou n d to be true. The results were m ost re
markable, and the method is sure to come into use very quickly.
It is likely to be the only system whereby the art of clairvoyance,
if i t can be acquired at all, is to be reached. This comes closest to
it o f any m ethod extant. I t is summed up as fo llo w s :—
1. Every person can learn to empty the m ind.
2. Every person uses the reverie.
3. Every person pauses to reflect.
4. As the reverie and the pause are natural and everyday methods
in use, the em ptying o f the m ind is only a complete act of what is a
m ost com m on occurrence. I t sim ply goes farther and finishes what
instinct begins.
5. A s every person comes out o f the reverie and the pause into
ONE SENSE TELEPATHY
the fu ll senses; and, as those who have learned to em pty the m ind,
com e also in to the fu ll senses; and, still further, as those who act
by natural habit only, often concentrate the attention on one sense;
so every person who has learned to empty the m ind, can train it to
return to one sense only.
6. Since it is true that the concentration of attention on one sense,
increases the power o f that sense; so also it is true that the return to
one sense only from the interval o f the empty m ind, w ill intensify
the power o f telepathy in that direction.
P ractice soon confirms these laws.
Care and persistent practice is what is required. Others are
devoting a few minutes a day to this one part o f the w o rk ; and
you can readily do as much. I t is not an artificial culture. Every
step o f it is instinctive, natural and a part o f the habits o f every
life.
T he results are m ost gratifyin g to one who wishes to test the
marvels o f the Other M ind.
A n y one sense m ay be given first attention, and it should be
follow ed until success comes to that before passing on to the next.
T he sense o f hearing is the most susceptible o f all. A s it can be
m ost readily deceived in the ordinary details o f life, and as it is
m ost often preyed on by the phenomena o f existence, so it may be
best trained in this work.
One o f the most convincing o f experiments is that o f leading the
m usic of the Other M ind in to consciousness. I t is done, o f course,
by the only possible route, the echo. B u t the process is sim ple:
1. B efore em ptying the m ind, decide that you wish to know some
th in g of the music that is n ot like what you have heard.
2. Then empty the m ind, and brin g it back to the single sense o f
hearing.
3. Eepeat this many times and do not give up because it takes time.
W hen you have mastered one sense, or made a beginning only, the
road w ill becom e easy and sw ift. I t is the start that you need, as
the consciousness o f possessing this power w ill become a tremendous
impetus to you in all other trials.
A nother sense that is readily trained in this direction is that o f
smell. Make the same preparations as ju st given, and resolve in
advance to return to the one sense o f smell, seeking the fragrance
o f flowers. A man who did not have m uch time fo r practice, owing
to his business, fou n d this very fascinating. H e was an old bachelor,
as he term ed him self. In his m any efforts to concentrate his m ind

on this one sense, after the plunge into utter darkness, he became
discouraged; but persisted because he had the few minutes to spare
each day. A t length he fou n d the intense odor o f marigolds present.
O f these he had not been thinking fo r years. B u t in the lon g ago,
when his sweetheart was living, he used to pluck m arigolds fo r her
because she loved them above all the country, old-fashioned flowers.
Lost in a lon g reverie, he lived again the years o f dreams and castle-
building, and was well repaid fo r his efforts.
T he wonders o f the sense o f sight, when used in this form o f
cultivated telepathy, are too many to be even referred to. T he sub
ject opens too m uch fo r a work of this size, or o f m uch greater
scope. I t is in the power o f every person to take these jou rn eys;
and, unlike the travels o f the conscious m ind in its im aginings,
these ventures into the marvelous realm o f the Other M ind strengthen
all the faculties and produce the greatest benefit in every department
of being.
TWENTY-FIRST CYCLE
H MEMORY IN TELEPATHY |
Ba a ^ a ^ aBaeaB s a e a g ii
0 S M A L L a thing as thought
L ivin g in mem ory
B ecom es the guardian Tcnot
O f all eternity.
F o r what w e think, we are,
A s sure as certainty.
E N IT IN E ability is always a. true background fo r a

high order o f development. T he system o f study and
practice that has been slowly unfolded throughout the
pages o f this work, relates to the operations o f the two
minds. I t is m en tal; yet touches every act o f life and
every branch o f the reasoning powers and faculties.
W e live in the present because o f the m ind. W e live in the past
because o f the mem ory. W e live in the future because o f the antic
ipation. W e go to sleep every night, and forget. W e awake every
d a y ; and, because we recall ourselves, we are the same. I f we were
to awake beginning anew each day, we would not connect our past
self, and the result would be as i f we were another person. M em
ory tides us over every period o f unconsciousness, whether of sleep or
otherwise.
The mere slipping o f this faculty would make life undesirable
to those who wished to be the same in d ivid u a l; and desirable to
those who wished to get free from past identity. I f you were n ot
to have a knowledge o f yourself as you were prior to last n igh t’s
sleep, then you m ight to-day as well be John Sm ith, H enry Jones,
or any other individual, as to be yourself. The failure o f this one
faculty, even if you were to awake each day in the fu ll possession o f
all your powers, would be equivalent to annihilation o f that person
which you were yesterday.
M em ory is the connecting lin k in every human chain o f im m or
tality.
I f what you are on earth is to be forgotten to-m orrow, or next

year, or after death, then you m ight as well wake up as an entirely
different personality. Y o u m ight die and go to nothingness; and
some other person be born to take your place. Last generation m ight
have been totally exterminated, soul and body, and this generation
com e up anew, as far as continuity o f existence is concerned.
I t seems a very slender thread.
M em ory must be depended on for the preservation of what we
are and what we wTill be.
W hich would you prefer, to be yourself to-m orrow, with a know l
edge o f what you have b een ; or be yourself to-m orrow and start with
the day, know ing all that happens after you then awake, but nothing
that has ever happened before? T o be fu ll of the same am bition,
purposes, and ability as b e fo re ; identical in every respect; but as
new an individual as if your existence were to begin to-m orrow ?
M ost people do not like the idea that death ends all. They want
to be convinced that they w ill live again. T or this one goal all the
religions o f the world have been established, and churches have
fou gh t and maintained their great m achinery o f government. A ll
to save the fra il connecting link of mem ory that w ill awake with
us in another world if such a place exists fo r us. T or all the cen
turies o f teachings, o f struggle, o f faith, of sacrifice, of m artyrdom ,
o f devotion, o f prayer, o f rites, of creeds, o f cost, o f labor, of m agnifi
cent structures, o f ceremony and proclam ation, o f m ultitudinous w rit
ings and endless acres of libraries, all are brought down to this
narrow strip o f passage between the two wrorlcls, the mem ory. I f that
fails to connect this life with the next, then the g u lf between the
two is equivalent to annihilation.
I t all depends on memory.
V icto r H u go taught the doctrine that every human being had
lived before on earth, and m any tim es; but that the m em ory was
so defective it could not recall any experience back o f this life ; it
being difficult to remember even the incidents o f youth. This was
not p roof, as it served to cite only a case o f defective m em ory, due
to the lim itations of childhood.
I f we have lived before in this world, we do not have the satisfac
tion of remem bering the fa c t ; and it would be a most delightful ex
perience to lift the veil and discuss old affairs; perhaps a burning
or two at the stake in the name of re lig io n ; or a goin g off on the
MEMORY IN TELEPATHY
gallows because of the larceny o f a loaf o f bread; or the sharp edge

o f the guillotine when our prejudices were cast fo r roy a lty ; or a
look in at the Spanish Inquisition, where the tortures fo r false think
in g were relieved by the exit of life ; or a period o f seventy years
spent in the catacombs o f Italy to avoid the persecutions of the
Bomans fo r devotion to the cause o f C hristianity; or an afternoon
with the lions who devoured us alive in the presence o f the over
joy ed maidens who loved such a m atinee; or the crucifixion which was
the penalty o f m illions in those early centuries; or the struggles
through Arabia out o f the wilderness after the m isunderstanding
w ith Pharaoh in E g y p t; or the wars on the plains o f Asia which en
grossed one of our liv es; or the sim plicity o f the dawn of civilization
when the fields were sweet with virgin flowers and the newborn
sun brought only delights and glories over the landscape to fill
the heart o f man with reverence fo r the divinity that had made earth
so b ea u tifu l; these are a few o f the episodes that m ight be called
back from the dim past to allure us in to their em brace; but it is a
dream o f belief.
I f we have lived before, it is well that m em ory does not connect
us w ith that fa c t ; fo r we would be engrossed with too m uch history.
This life has vicissitudes enough to keep us thinking.
M em ory is a wronderful thing.
It is either brief or prolonged.
I t is not very strong except where a shock is produced in the brain,
as by a terrible accident or some vivid experience. A hundred
things slip away every day. A man who had a private secretary
told him to make a note o f every act that the latter saw him per
form or was engaged in during one d a y ; and the record showed
twenty-eight im portant items, and sixty-eight o f lesser nature. On
being placed aside these details were kept fo r a m onth, at the end of
wbidh time the man could recall o f his own effort only three, and but
six more when rem inded o f them by the secretary.
In looking over the past year, everything is blank except about
one per cent, of the im portant events. I n looking over one’s youth
it w ill take great effort to bring to m ind more than fifty episodes;
while fou r times that num ber m ight be recalled when the details
were laid bare by records or other agencies.
A man who was interested in this study had a son whom he
brought up to remember the great events o f the child’s life by the fo l
low ing process:
W hen the boy was two years old, he was asked what one thing he
could remember and how fa r back he could go in his mind. The
boy m entioned one event that was very striking to h im ; and an
other than had occurred farther back but that was not o f so much
im portance to him. The form er was carried in the boy’s memory
until he was three years old, then his m ind was made to recall the
chief incident o f the year preceding.
This m ethod was carried along until he had grown up, and it was
fou n d that he could then see in his m ind the very earliest events,
and they were as vivid as the later ones. In his young manhood
he had as perfectly clear conception o f his mental operations at tire
age o f two as he had at any tim e later on. Three additional facts
were also shown:
1. H e recalled many o f the less im portant impressions all along
the years of his young life, which would otherwise have been forgotten
and lost.
2. H e fou n d him self with a prodigious m em ory fo r all uses when
he had grow n up.
3. H e had, without culture or effort, developed a natural keenness
o f insight into the minds and motives of others.
T h e two last faculties were worth more to him than all other
means o f education combined. There is not the slightest doubt that
all children should be trained in the same way. I t does not require
w'ork or tim e, and the only effort is to keep constantly in review the
one ch ief event in each year, beginning at the end o f the second.
By this means the m ind of the child is carried up to the m ind of
the adult, and fou n d to be closer in power than is generally sup
posed.
A m on g men and women who have fou n d themselves possessed o f a
love o f retaining great quantities o f ideas in the mem ory, there has
always been an attendant trait o f telepathy. P rodigiou s memories
have been built up along with the same trait, if the histories o f men
can be relied upon for proof. N o person who has accomplished much
in the world has been free from both m em ory and telepathy in the
com m on and useful form s.
I t is n ot claimed here that memory is necessary to this art, but
it is true that m em ory is necessary to a strong recognition of the
operations of the Other M ind. People have the telepathic power
in great degree and do not know it because their brains are not
built on the one essential that connects the past with the present
MEMORY IN TELEPATHY
and the present with the fu tu re; -and that is a pow erful memory.
Genuine ability is always a true background fo r a high order of
development. N othing denotes genuine ability so readily as a strong
m em ory if it is a useful one at the same time.
Mere feats of memory are of no value.
W hat is stored away is put there fo r use, not fo r accumulation.
The man who put all he earned in the bank and never drew out
interest, gained nothing. H is account was rich and he was poor.
W hat is meant by a strong m em ory is that kind o f a deposit in the
m ind that is not only brought in abundantly, but is also com ing
forth to make itself known. W ith the little boy we have referred
to, the habit was form ed of telling once a week what events he
could remember distinctly in the past year. W hen he told them,
he was bringing out what he had put away. H a d he not told them,
the details would soon have faded like a vague dream, and have
been lost.
A m em ory of great strength therefore consists o f what can be
taken out, or what the m ind gives up.
This is the reverse of what is generally deemed the meaning and
purpose o f memory. A book in which events are recorded is n ot of
this order, for wrhat goes in is not able to come o u t; it can be
searched for and again rea d ; but it has none o f the inherent value
o f memory.
I f a man takes a book and reads ten pages to -d a y ; and to-morrow
in the absence of the book he is able to bring forth what he read, he
has this quality. B ut if he must go to the pages o f the book again
to be refreshed, then he lacks the power.
W e go to the library and find one hundred biographies o f men
and women who have accomplished something in li f e ; whose energies
o f m ind have directed achievements o f either m ind or body that will
live for some generations to come. W ithout exception wre find that
all hundred were gifted with strong memories. The latter may not
have made them g rea t; but without that quality their greatness would
have been impossible. I t is claimed by some authorities that the
development o f mem ory w ill develop greatness; but this is not easy
to prove. W e have, during the past thirty years, taught the art
o f m em ory as the chief secret to success; and wherever it has been
cultivated, even in cases where it did not exist at the start o f the
study, it has been attended by im provem ent in all the fa cu lties; but
only in case it is of the kind that gives forth its value.
A merely retentive m em ory is o f no special importance.

The kind that does good is that which is com ing out all day to
help the possessor.
H ere is a Senator whose life has been filled with deeds that will live
after him. H e meets men whom he has not seen for ten years or
m ore; he calls them by name, and tells them o f the incidents o f
their m eeting a long while before. H is m em ory was breaking out all
the time.
W e saw a man o f international fam e greet a poor fellow by his
fu ll name, state where and when he saw him before, and ask some
questions about his welfare, including the names o f his fam ily and
references to property. A fter the interview, the poor man said :
“ I saw him once twenty years ago, and never since.”
A lawyer tried a case that was finished in two days. T hirty-six
years afterwards he m et the client, and recalled the details o f the
trial, the scenes, some o f the points o f the argument, and other
matters such as the gallon o f sweet cider they bought at the m ill on
the way hom e from the country courthouse. The client was amazed,
especially as the lawyer had since attained great fame in the world by
reason o f his herculean abilities.
The remarkable m em ory o f Senator K n ox o f Pennsylvania, would
not be credited were it not fo r the many evidences o f it. In the trial
o f a case he was always known to have every detail in m ind, and never
to forget anything, whether of great or slight im portance. This
facu lty made it difficult to take him unawares. Opposing counsel
were always afraid o f what “ K n ox could carry in his m ind fo r instant
use at any m om ent.” H e is a man o f small stature, and not of
large h ead; but brain-size does not indicate mind-size. From the
beginning o f his public career his m em ory has never been o f the
ordinary k in d ; it was great at the start, and probably great when he
first began to practice law.
It m ight be natural or cultivated.
W ithout it he would have been held back in the ranks o f the
plodders.
In our own line o f investigation, dating back over thirty years, we
find many o f our students then who suffered from lack of m em ory,
who began a course of culture in that direction, and who have since
made successful men and women. A typical report from one o f
them read s:
MEMORY IN TELEPATHY
“ I surely lacked mem ory. I was handicapped by the troubles I

had to meet on account o f this deficiency. I was driven by despera
tion to find some cure, and I fou n d that m y m em ory needed building
u p ; that was the real gist o f it. I went to work and d id build it
up. The advantages were coextensive w ith the grow ing m em ory all
through m y life.”
A t the time this man wrote, he was without ability and had
nothing to look forw ard to. H is funds were less than one hundred
dollars. T o-day he is the president o f a great institution, having
funds o f m ore than tw o m illion dollars to direct.
W hile m em ory does not create great ability it is the channel through
w hich such an attribute m ay come into contact with the world. It
excites the gifts we hold in a dorm ant state, and they grow under
the direction o f that stimulus.
W hat is meant by telepathic ability is the power to discern what
to do, what is righ t as between tw o courses that m ay be pursued,
what are the motives o f our fellow beings towards us, what knowledge
do they hold back that we ought to possess, and many of the thousand
details that make up a successful career. M ore than this, it draws
fro m the invisible fu n d o f invention, o f discovery, o f genius, m uch
o f the w onderful knowledge that comes to m en by leaps out o f the
unknown.
W here there 'is genuine power o f m em ory there is always a force
that works in the higher light o f the Other M ind and comes fortb
through the conscious intelligence. T his is the fact, whether the
m em ory is a habit that has grow n through its inherent strength, or
has been cultivated by practice. I n teaching it as a means o f self
development, we have always begun with the practice and blended
that in to a h a b it; thus producing the natural g ift of m em ory, which,
after all, is nothing but a love o f the process. P eople always do
the things they love to do.
M echanical m em orizing is not agreeable to any person.
B ut that kind o f m em ory that seeks to catch and to reproduce
an idea is always beneficial to the m ind. I t should also include
thoughts o f value that are worth keeping. In order to carry on this
work as a means o f im parting greater strength to the present work,
the follow in g m ethod is su ggested:
1. T u rn to the F irst Cycle and read the propositions there stated.
Go over them once rather ra p id ly ; then close the book and try to
repeat aloud one o f the m ost prom inent of the ideas stated there.
2. N ow open the same pages and again read the propositions and,
after closing the book, make an effort to state any two o f the ideas,
not the propositions that seem m ost im portant. Y o u m ay repeat
the one first stated if you happen to think o f it.
3. Once m ore open to the propositions in the F irst Cycle, and read
them a ll; then close the book, and repeat aloud the three ideas that
seem the m ost im portant. Y o u may repeat, i f you wish, those stated
in the first and second trials.
4. Open again and read the p rop osition s; close the book and repeat
aloud the fou r ideas that seem the most im portant. E epetition is
always allowed, so that there are different ideas in the same trial.
F or instance, in the fou rth trial there must be fou r different ideas,
but three o f them may be those stated in the th ird trial.
5. T his plan of adding one idea on each trial is to be carried
along until you have made twenty trials, and in the last there will
be twenty different ideas.
6. The practice must be cumulative. I f you start with more than
one idea at the beginning, you w ill sim ply indulge in mechanical
m em ory. The m ind is n ot stimulated thereby. 1STothing but cumula
tive repetition will make the progress sure and solid, and keep the
m ental faculties alive with attention and interest. Some ambitious
students m ight try to name twenty ideas at the very first trial.
T hey would make no real progress and w ould tire o f the work very
soon. B ut the plan of cumulative ideas is a natural stim ulant and
excitant o f the m ind in a most healthy way, and the increase o f
power is surprising after the first few days of patient practice.
7. Y o u should go to twenty trials each day.
8. It is a very curious process to note the manner in which you
w ill treat this exercise a f t e r the fifth day. W e w ill assume that, for
the first five days, you w ill make all twenty o f the tria ls; that on each
day the first trial wfill state aloud one idea taken from the proposi
tion, the second trial will take two ideas, the third trial w ill take
three ideas, the fourth w ill take four, and so on, increasing one
each time, until you reach tw enty; then you can Test and let the
practice go until the next day, and T e p e a t the wdiole twenty in like
m anner; or you can go back over the work the first day, running
from one to twenty in the manner stated. Some o f the brightest
students have found this practice so fascinating after it got started
that they have gone over it as many as five times each day. They
progress that much faster. But, no m atter how many times you
MEMORY IN TELEPATHY
repeat the twenty trials the first, or any day, you must repeat them
at least once fo r five days. Increased work one day is n ot to release
you from the necessity o f the five days’ practice. The principle
involved w ill be seen in the next few fines, after the follow in g re
quirement has been stated.
9. The propositions must be read silently, but the ideas must be
stated a lou d ; and all the propositions o f the F irst Cycle must be
read each time.
The principle involved is th is : W hen the conscious m ind has
done a certain amount of work, the Other M ind takes it up and
adopts it. The force of the w orking m ind is increased by cumulative
p ractice; like the mom entum of a great body that moves on after
the motive power has ceased to act upon it.
The work o f the Other M ind is seen in all the finer actions of life.
I f you play the piano, the first weeks o f practice w ill be very slow
and tedious, fo r you m ust have fingers fo r many notes, and it is all
you can do to think o f one finger on one note fo r a w h ile ; then
tw o fingers on two notes w ill absorb all your mental pow ers; then
three fingers on three n otes; until at length you can attend to all
the used keys o f the instrum ent with your ten digits, h it ten at a
time, or eight, or six, or follow one group after another with your
eyes shut. The practice has passed over beyond the w orking m ind
into another sphere.
H ere is an exercise that has been put to use in our work during
many y ea rs: In Ealston U niversity there was a class of young
men who had been practicing exercises fo r extending the range o f
the speaking voice. This requires two years, as nature w ill not
favor a revolution in voice development in less time. This class
had practiced continuously fo r the whole period o f the school year.
A t the beginning of the summer term o f vacation, one-half o f the
students were told to do n o practicing until they returned in the
fall. The other half were assigned hard work in constant daily
p ra ctice; but it was w holly along the lines that had been pursued
during the school year.
In the fa ll wiien they came together, it was noticed that the half
that had not practiced at all, had made remarkable progress, which
ihey failed to understand; but, by actual tests, the voices had all
developed in a m ost striking manner. The others who had practiced
all the tim e had also made progress, but not one-half that o f the
students who had not given a m inute o f work to their voices. This
Sl-8 OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND
led to the explanation o f the reasons why we divided the class. An

im portant law was involved.
I t had been suspected that the Other M ind, having had enough
stimulus to set in m otion its power, w ould take charge o f a work
that had already proceeded to some length, and would carry it on.
This law was proved in a m ost emphatic manner.
Other tests were made fo r daily use, and were as fo llo w s :
Classes in voice culture were divided in to two p a rts; one was
given three hours a day o f hard p ra ctice ; the other was given one
hour a day o f the same practice. T he latter h a lf made the greater
progress. T he impulses set in m otion were maintained by some
mysterious power during the interval.
The next experiment was as follow s:
T he class was again divided, but in to three parts. One part was
given two hours’ practice in the forenoons, the next th ird was given
one hour’s practice in the afternoon, and the other third was given
thirty minutes’ practice in the evenings. The last named gained
in progress over the two other division s; while the afternoon hour
was more valuable than the m orning two hours. T his was confirm ed
after three months o f tests. The exercises wrere steady and solid
all through, and were o f the most thorough character.
A man who had a difficult problem to unravel worked at it fo r a
d a y ; then, when he could not get it, threw it aside. U nder advice
he took it to his room , spent a h alf hour w ith it, and laid it away.
T he next evening he did the same th in g ; and light began to be seen.
On the third evening he had made some progress. In the next trial
he had the whole problem mastered. I t was the h alf hours, and the
intervening sleep, when the Other M in d comes to take charge while
the w orking m ind is resting, that solved the difficulty.
This law o f the psychic m ind helping out the work o f the conscious
m ind is very often fou n d in u se ; although it is not recognized unless
studied fo r that purpose.
The effort to state aloud as m any as twrenty of the ideas taken
from the propositions o f the F irst Cycle, m ay not be easy on the
first d a y ; but at the end o f the fifth day, it w ill be fou n d to come
as a new nature. M em ory w ill then seem to start as a g ift and
w ill apply itself to other things.
People do what they love to do. Webster loved to m em orize the
Bible, Shakespeare, M ilton and other grand w ork s; and he knew
them all fro m end to end. H is m ind was correspondingly grand
MEMORY IN TELEPATHY
and massive in its achievements. T o him the grasping o f a giant’s

m em ory was a pleasant pastime.
W hen it was said o f any successful person who has got on in the-
w orld because of the aid given by a great m em ory, that such a
g ift is born in the individual, you may set that claim down as not
true. I t is a habit that has been started either by accident or design ;
and, once well started, it w ill proceed under the care of the Other
M ind, and thereby become prodigious.
The cumulative methods taught in this w ork w ill effect the same
end. A s soon as the fifth trial, on five successive days, is over, you
will have unmistakable evidence that the Other M ind is w ork ing
within you. More than this you w ill have started the habit of
m em orizing under the charge of that fu n ction , and that habit w ill
attend you in all the duties o f life. Y o u w ill be able to remember-
every detail quite readily.
One o f the great results w ill be the enormous strength that will
come to your m ind in recalling the events o f the day, the year and
the distant past, and then dum ping itself in to nothingness; for, the
stronger the m ind, the more easily you can con trol it. The weak
minds cannot take the leap in to nothingness.
Y o u w ill be able to empty the conscious m ind in a flash.
Y o u w ill be able to cast it into the reverie.
Y o u will be able to make the pause, no matter how interested you
may have become in a conversation; your m ind w ill be controlled
because it is strong and under your energetic will.
B u t above all you w ill be able to bring it back to consciousness,
so close to the visitation o f the Other M ind that you w ill catch more,
o f the knowledge from the latter than by any other method.
The results are surprising.
In order to help bring about this result the trials should be re
peated day after day for several weeks. The first decided change
w ill occur at the end of the fifth day, or preceding the beginning
o f the practice of the sixth d a y ; but the progress w ill be ju st as
marked fo r several weeks. I t is better to include fu ll thirty days,
om itting Sunda 3's ; that is, thirty week days, or five weeks.
The method proceeds as follow s :
Y o u read the propositions in the F irst Cycle, and study the dia
gram. Then you close the book and recall one idea that seems
im portant to you. This may be the first. A ll life is physical or
psychic. D o not try to repeat the words in their order. Pay no.-
attention to the arrangement. I f you chose that idea yon may

state it aloud somewhat like th is:
L ife is divided in to two p a rts; one part is the physical and the
other part is the psychic.
Out o f the whole num ber o f propositions which must be read in
fu ll each time, and there are twenty-three in all, your m ind w ill be
struck with one or more that will arrest your attention. It may
not be the first or the last. I t is often a matter o f surprise what
idea w ill lodge in the m ind o f a reader and throw the attention into
a reverie or pause. I f this condition results, it w ill be all the more
valuable. Every proposition is a key to a reverie, and stands on
the threshold of the Other M ind. W hen you read that all life is
physical or psychic, you may not know what is meant by psychic,
but sooner or later you will know, especially after you have read
this work to the present pages. Then you w ill wonder if there is
any other kind o f life than the physical or the psychic. I f there is,
what can it be ? There at the very first step you w ill be on the
threshold of the Other M ind, and the great good that is to follow
w ill have begun. Y o u cannot expect to make progress in any line
of development w ithout the aid o f the mental faculties.
Genuine ability is always a true background fo r a high order o f
development.
T o be something, your m ind must be something.
The first idea of the two kinds o f life is the most comprehensive
o f all thoughts. The next idea is almost as strong. It states that
physical life possesses intelligence and power. This w ill set you to
thinking. Intelligence, you say, is a recognition o f facts, and power
is the ability to make use of that recogn ition ; and this is all there
is to physical existence. B ut is it ? I f there is anything else, what
can it be ? A gain you are lost in the reverie, which is most whole
some and beneficial to your m ind and to all your faculties.
N ow comes the next proposition, tellin g us that psychic life pos
sesses both knowledge and magnetism. H ow , then, does it differ
from physical life ? Does intelligence differ from know ledge? P er
haps. B ut what is magnetism ?
B efore these inquiries are answered, the make-up o f the human
type calls fo r a proposition and it tells us that both physical and
psychic life are the com position o f humanity. Here the first and the
fourth propositions are brought together. That o f itself furnishes
an idea that is Dot actually set forth in so m any words in the Pirst
MEMORY IN TELEPATHY
and massive in its achievements. T o him the grasping o f a giant’s

m em ory was a pleasant pastime.
W hen it was said o f any successful person who has got on in the
w orld because of the aid given by a great m em ory, that such a
g ift is born in the individual, you m ay set that claim down as not
true. I t is a habit that has been started either by accident or d esig n ;
and, once well started, it w ill proceed under the care o f the Other
M ind, and thereby become prodigious.
The cumulative methods taught in this work w ill effect the same-
end. A s soon as the fifth trial, on five successive days, is over, you
w ill have unmistakable evidence that the Other M ind is working
w ithin you. More than this you w ill have started the habit of
m em orizing under the charge o f that fu n ction , and that habit w ill
attend you in all the duties o f life. Y o u w ill be able to remember
every detail quite readily.
One of the great results w ill be the enormous strength that will
come to your m ind in recalling the events of the day, the year and
the distant past, and then dum ping itself in to nothingness; for, the
stronger the m ind, the more easily you can control it. T he weak
m inds cannot take the leap in to nothingness.
Y o u w ill be able to empty the conscious m ind in a flash.
Y o u w ill be able to cast it into the reverie.
Y ou will be able to make the pause, no matter how interested you.
may have become in a conversation; your m ind w ill be controlled
because it is strong and under your energetic will.
B u t above all you w ill be able to bring it back to consciousness,
so close to the visitation o f the Other M ind that you w ill catch mors,
o f the knowledge from the latter than by any other method.
The results are surprising.
In order to help bring about this result the trials should be re
peated day after day fo r several weeks. The first decided change
w ill occur at the end of the fifth day, or preceding the beginning
o f the practice of the sixth d a y ; but the progress w ill be ju st as
m arked fo r several weeks. I t is better to include fu ll thirty days,,
om itting Sundays; that is, thirty week days, or five weeks.
The m ethod proceeds as follow s :
Y o u read the propositions in the F irst Cycle, and study the dia
gram. Then you close the book and recall one idea that seems
im portant to you. This may be the first. A ll life is physical o r
psychic. D o not try to repeat the words in their order. Pay no.-
attention to the arrangement. I f you chose that idea you may

state it aloud somewhat like th is:
L ife is divided into two p a rts; one part is the physical and the
other part is the psychic.
Out o f the whole num ber o f propositions which must be read in
fu ll each time, and there are twenty-three in all, your m ind w ill be
struck w ith one or m ore that will arrest your attention. It may
not be the first or the last. I t is often a matter o f surprise what
idea w ill lodge in the m ind of a reader and throw the attention into
a reverie or pause. I f this condition results, it w ill be all the more
valuable. Every proposition is a key to a reverie, and stands on
the threshold o f the Other M ind. W hen you read that a ll life is
physical or psychic, you may n ot know what is meant by psychic,
but sooner or later you w ill know, especially after you have read
this work to the present pages. Then you w ill wonder if there is
any other kind o f life than the physical or the psychic. I f there is,
what can it b e ? There at the very first step you w ill be on the
threshold of the Other M ind, and the great good that is to follow
w ill have begun. Y o u cannot expect to make progress in any line
of development without the aid o f the mental faculties.
Genuine ability is always a true background fo r a high order o f
development.
T o be something, your m ind must be something.
The first idea of the tw o kinds o f life is the m ost comprehensive
o f all thoughts. The next idea is alm ost as strong. I t states that
physical life possesses intelligence and power. This w ill set you to
thinking. Intelligence, you say, is a recognition of facts, and power
is the ability to make use of that recog n ition ; and this is all there
is to physical existence. B ut is it ? I f there is anything else, what
can it be ? A gain you are lost in the reverie, which is most whole
some and beneficial to your m ind and to all your faculties.
jSTow comes the next proposition, tellin g us that psychic life pos
sesses both knowledge and magnetism. H ow , then, does it differ
from physical life ? Does intelligence differ from know ledge? P er
haps. B ut what is m agnetism ?
B efore these inquiries are answered, the make-up o f the human
type calls fo r a proposition and it tells us that both physical and
psychic life are the com position o f Iramanity. Here the first and the
fourth propositions are brought together. That o f itself furnishes
an idea that is not actually set forth in so many words in the Pirst
MEMORY IN TELEPATHY
Cycle. Every human being possesses intelligence, power, knowl

edge and magnetism.
T his calls for a proposition to determine the difference between in
telligence and knowledge, and between power and magnetism. It
seems that intelligence is a directing force, while knowledge is an
all embracing sweep of the past, the present and the future as far
as the latter is knowable.
Power is the executive o f the w orking m ind, which is the seat
o f in telligence; while magnetism is the executive of the psychic m ind
in which there is knowledge o f all that has existed, all that does
exist, and some part o f the future.
The next propositions indulge in certain translations. It is seen
that the physical and the psychic are again brought together in
the human b ein g ; the physical body being the power o f the physical
m ind, and the psychic life being the power o f the psychic mind.
B y this process it is discovered that magnetism is the psychic life,
or that the latter is expressed in magnetism.
Then the two m inds are made to stand forth in clear ground.
There is the physical intelligence which is the conscious m in d ;
and the psychic knowledge which is the psychic mind.
A n interesting definition o f telepathy is fou n d in the next proposi
tion. It is knowledge, fo r it knows the things that are in the past
and the present and some of the fu tu re ; all o f which are denied
the w orking intelligence except when the psychic m ind im parts
such knowledge or it has come through the ordinary channels. Telep
athy is the condition of the psychic m ind com ing into the conscious
m ind, is a very succinct, if n ot a strictly technical, definition.
I t seems strange that there should be tw o kinds o f telepathy,
one known as physical and the other known as psychic. I f telepathy
is psychic, how can it be given a physical division ? B ut the proposi
tion makes this clear when it says that physical is that form o f
telepathy which is able to break through into the conscious m ind
and there find interpretation in the physical channels o f intelligence.
It is an aid to earthly existence.
H ere is the basis of the present w ork ; fo r it has dealt with the
operations o f the Other M ind when confined to the physical activities
o f life. This one phase alone w ill open up the vista o f thousands o f
ideas; and the student must remember that the mere statements
o f the propositions themselves are not the ideas which are to be
brought to light, except where they are brief and o f single im port.
The m ind should be taught to step outside and grasp the thoughts
that are b o m o f these propositions.
T he fourteenth proposition w ill furnish an unlim ited fu n d o f sug
gestions w ith which to sustain a lon g era o f mental development
under the present system. A ll the rem aining propositions grow in
im portance as they proceed to their statements. The diagram o f
the fou r walls should be kept constantly in the thoughts, and its
arrangement should live in a m ental picture.
In building natural m em ory by the cumulative plan, any series
o f potent ideas w ill suffice; but they should be potent in the highest
degree, and should have the power o f leading out in to endless
branches and secondary lines o f grow ing im portance. I f you will
look into the propositions and especially into the greater m ajority
o f them, you w ill find that they contain the follow in g p oten cy:
1. They are in the first place statements o f the greatest facts
that exist w ithin range o f hum an intellect.
2. T hey contain suggestions o f still greater thoughts beyond them
selves, o f w hich the conscious m ind can on ly surmise in its search
fo r more light.
3. T hey lead, through the portals o f the Other M ind, to the very
threshold o f the highest realms in the universe.
4. B y being used as fo o d fo r the reverie, and fu el fo r the journey,
they send the Other M ind out in to undiscovered worlds.
T ry it and see.
A s we have said, any system o f ideas that w ill furnish the m ind
with som ething to think about, w ill build up a w onderful m em ory
through the cumulative plan. B ut the greater the potency o f the
ideas, the more marvelous w ill be the achievement. A n d there are
n ot anj^where, in all the world, thoughts so potent as those set forth
in the propositions o f the F irst Cycle.
One o f the practical, everyday results o f this m ethod o f building
up the m em ory, is the hold it w ill have on the details o f life. Y o u
will retain and be able to use and to brin g forth alm ost every fact
that is o f im portance to you. Forgetfulness w ill be gone. N o t only
scores o f facts w ill live and be springing ou t o f your m ind as they
are needed, but hundreds and thousands o f such facts will, in an
incredibly short time, be thus within your control.
I t w ill be seen that this m ethod takes in and gives out. Some
systems take in only. Some give out mechanically. Some reten
tions o f fa ct are surface, and n ot depth. The only true plan o f
MEMORY IN TELEPATHY
developing this great g ift is to give out b y oral statements what

the m ind takes in silently. There is a physiological reason fo r this
way o f proceeding. The sound o f the voice adds to the mental
picture, join in g two senses to o n e ; and the words are thus m olded
in to coins, m aking clear impressions on the m ind.
B ut a stronger reason exists as fo llo w s :
Silent thinking with the conscious m ind is very likely to take
wide steps aside; and the m ind is prone to wander, even a small
fraction from the path o f statement, which is prevented by an even,
unbroken oral delivery, no matter how quietly it may be done. I t
is n ot the noise that is needed, but the actual coinage o f thoughts
into articulated words. M an is the only species of creation that is
given this power o f articulate speech, and it means m uch more than
the sounds that are created. It compels the m ind to take definite
shape, which is lacking in mere thinking.
T his peculiar power is seen in the ease with which extempore
address and a free diction are acquired. Y o u may think your thoughts
as often and as lon g as you please, but the more you thus practice,
the less ability you w ill have in diction, extempore address and
fluency o f delivery. These great gifts are the result o f the righ t
k ind o f practice that is based on tw o operations o f the m in d :
1. The thoughts expressed must be pu t in to spoken words fram ed
into careful sentences.
2. The thoughts must also be o f a character to bring up secondary
ideas that are thus to be put into sim ilar words and sentences.
That is, there m ust be so m uch meat in the thoughts that they give
birth to further ideas besides those contained in themselves.
W ith such a basis, the mental growth is quick and decisive.
As geniuses are the best types o f useful telepathy; as they are
always blessed with a strong m em ory; and as they possess genuine
ability; this trinity should be given the fu ll study that it demands
by reason o f the fru its obtainable; fo r each part is helpfu l of the
others.
A fter all, development is the result o f habits that are the result
o f p ra ctice; and this is true whether the practice is fixed by exercises
or brought about by the character o f one’ s duties. W hen exercises
are employed fo r the purpose o f producing a line of development,
they should be led as soon as possible into habits. Skilled teachers
or correct systems o f practice w ill always do this. H abits become
second nature.
Believing that there is nothing so helpful in all the range of

hum an training as the plan set forth in this cycle, we leave it to
you to master by your faithfulness and interest. I t is not difficult
after the first few trials, T he m ind w ill not readily begin the habit
o f stating ideas orally in well-worded and arranged sentences; but
this is sure to be developed very qu ick ly; and, as soon as you get a
good start, the progress w ill be m ost gratifying.
Apart from the great good it w ill accomplish in other departments
o f life, outside o f this direct study, it has the m erit of m aking the
m ind strong and fertile, rich in thought and prolific in fruitage.
A person who had no time fo r the thorough mastery of this entire
work, would be able to connect the F irst Cycle with the present one,
and thus set up a separate and complete system o f training by itself,
which would be w orth fortunes in the value it would bring to the
student.
TWENTY-SECOND CYCLE
N A L L the world around

A nd through the space above
T he silences prevail
L ik e resting places where
The work o f progress slops
T o let the builder think.
E O P L E often mistake a quiet person fo r a wise one.

There are numerous sides to this m uch m ooted question,
and opinions are divided now as they were three thou
sand years ago on the merits o f being quiet. I f a man
is a fool, it is wise to say nothing. I f a man is not
a fool but knows very little, it is also wise to say nothing. I f a man
knows a great deal, and he talks too m uch he will lower the estimate
that m ay be placed on the worth of his wisdom. Really great people
have little to say, and they say that little in all kinds o f ways.
A man who has made him self fam ous over all the globe by some
grand achievement, m ay not know how to use words to advantage;
and the public who hear him talk m ay judge his real ability by
what he says rather than by what he has done.
A nother man who has done nothing but talk all his life, and
who knows how to talk m uch and well, m ay create the impression
that he is greater than one whose deeds have been o f immense help
to the race. W hile great men are w orking upward in their careers
they have no time to be wasted in talk, unless they belong to the
profession's that require the use o f the voice in well-chosen sentences.
The lawyer is o f necessity a man o f speech, fo r that is the chief tool
whereby he wins his cases. A preacher is endowed with the same
tool in order that he may send forth the truths with which he has
been commissioned. T he physician requires the same g ift but in
different method.
F or these men to be silent w ould be against nature.

A wom an is told in the good book that silence is golden. She is
not, as a rule, in a profession that requires fluency o f speech; but,
nevertheless, she has come into that inheritance and is often aware
o f the fact. W hen she is in the unm arried state, she has to choose
between being known as vivacious, quiet, or a blend o f the two. I f
she is vivacious she talks m uch and rapidly. I f she is quiet, she
talks very little, and is a good listener. In the blend, she talks some,
never very m uch, and is not often silent unless her feelings have
been hurt. T hen she m ay fly to either extreme.
V ivacity is attractive when a woman is pretty, unm arried, and
has fascinating m ethods; otherwise it is ceaseless talk. In the absence
o f these conditions, the less a woman talks the m ore power she can
wield over both men and women. Y e t the extreme o f absolute
silence is n ot a virtue. T o say very little and to say it pleasantly
and n ot like one in a morose state, is always an alluring force in
favor o f all ladies, young, m iddle-aged and old.
Silence has a double value:
1. It comm ands respect fo r many reasons, if it is not carried to
an offensive extrem e; and, by com m anding respect, it impresses
others with a m ore weighty regard.
2, It brings the mental powers in to that arrangement where they
can take advantage o f the agency known as telepathy.
There never was an instance where knowledge by the telepathic
route ever came to a person who was not silent at the tim e ; unless
as in the case o f inspired orators, they had entered into the realm
controlled by the Other M in d ; or in sim ilar situations, as in teaching
and conversation o f an extraordinary character. In all oratory that
is o f a h igh order o f value there are moments when the speaker is
lifted out o f him self into another realm. The change is by a grada
tion that seems to be logically connected, and the effect on the hearer
is n ot abrupt or sudden, but in harmony w ith the preceding trend
o f thought.
The same change to the realm o f the Other M in d m ay occur in
conversation, but it is a rare occurrence in these days. There is not
the stimulus fo r it. Y e t it is possible, where two persons m ay be
closely bound together by some tie that is beyond the ordinary frien d
ships, and the theme under discussion is serious to an excessive
degree. T h e few cases we have evidence of have been o f too sacred
a nature to be subject to this line o f explanation.
IN THE SILENCES
Outside o f the uses stated, it may be set down as e l fixed rule that
silence is essential to the invasion o f the Other M ind.
T hat fu n ction does n ot come i f there is any thought pending in
the conscious m ind. The latter must be emptied. Its voice, as well
as its ideas, must be all sent to the land of silence.
I f such a com bination could be fou n d where the voice talks and
the m ind ceases to think during a sane state, then we m igh t im agine
a talking m an or wom an having an empty m ind in w hich the Other
M ind m ight enter. In that event the silence o f the voice w ould be
unnecessary, as the brain would be silent. M any persons do in fa ct
talk with very little knowledge o f what they are talking about. S till
it cannot be said that the m ind is w holly separated from the voice.
The old claim that when a certain lawyer began to speak to the ju ry
his brain stopped working, was made by an opposing attorney m ore
in ridicule than as a physiological assertion.
The one disadvantageous m ethod o f talking is when the m ind
empties itself as fast as the words come from the m outh. T his is
the sieve operation o f the m ind. Thoughts com e in the latter, and
run out ju st as they come in. I f you pour water in a sieve, it will
not rem ain there fo r any length o f tim e. H ard ly w ill the wires or
mesh be wet. T he thoughts w ill pass out o f the m ind in the same
way. T hey w ill not make the slightest impression on the brain
surface. T he finer convolutions w ill n ot be indented or marked, and
the mental activity w ill be no greater than that made on a child's
brain b y its chatter. T he babe that sits in the h igh chair, or the
p rattling in fan t that crawls along the floor on all fours, or the
m onkey in the cage that scolds and gibbers, or the parrot that
wants a cracker, although he really does n ot know that he wants it,
are types o f the m ind em ptying itself as fast as ideas come in to it.
Such a m ind can furnish no thoughts worthy o f the speaking
voice, and silence is the best fo r all parties concerned.
I f you belong to this sieve fam ily, the sooner you ascertain the
fact, the better. T he first step tow ard a remedy is to learn the
grand art o f silence.
H ave you n ot m any times seen the m an who talks righ t along,
and to whom you can say nothing that w ill be h eard? H is ears
m ay catch what you say, but his brain w ill not, and he w ill keep
on talking. H e is n ot what is known as a fool, as these talking
spells are merely the sieve habit, and there are times when he will
connect his m ind with what he says with his mouth, as when he wants
something to drink or eat, or other thing that appeals to his animal

nature. H e is purely the animal type. I f he is a carpenter he may
make a hundred blunders and not know it until he finds the cut
lumber is too short and w ill n ot fit in p la ce ; then he w ill hunt
around in his cranium fo r some excuse that w ill relieve him o f the
blame. Some men spend all their wits searching fo r excuses fo r
their mistakes. T hat is because their hands think, and are sieves,
letting out all that goes in the m ind as fast as it goes in.
A person succeeds in life in proportion as he is able to bring into
his service employees who are n ot sieves; whose w ork is not done
by the process o f the outgo as fast as it comes i n ; but who have a
saving fu n d fo r all they say and do.
The talking employee is the least valuable of all. H e gives no
thought to his w o rk ; is the first to make m istakes; is the first to
find excuses fo r his continual blu n d ers; and, having made the excuse
to his employer, he goes on with his work in the firm belief that
the excuse has relieved him o f all blame. H e should be sent away
as soon as possible. There is nothing in his m ind to read, as his
conduct is all the m ind he has, and it speaks fo r itself.
Success depends more on this art o f getting rid o f this class o f
employees, both men and women, than on any other single method
in the execution o f affairs. Y o u cannot do all your work alone.
There m ust be assistants. I t m ay seem uncharitable to advise this
course, but it pays fo r all concerned. I t pays fo r you and fo r the
employee. The statement made by a man who began poor at the
age of twenty-five, and who has made a great success o f his business,
is to the p o in t :
“ A s m y business began to grow I saw I needed some one to help
me. I hired a young man who took hold at first with a vim. H e
was inclined to talk while he worked. I do n ot object to the usual
and necessary amount o f talk, but he talked m ost of the tim e if
there was some one to speak to. I told him he talked too much.
H e was glum fo r a day, then did not say m uch fo r two days more,
but got talking again and he made u p fo r lost time. So I quietly
brought into his place another young man. T he first day this one
came, I said to the tw o o f th em : “T am sorry to have to let James
go. B ut he makes mistakes because his m ind is not enough on his
work to know what he is doing all the time. A s soon as you learn
his work, he w ill find a place somewhere else.’ James was on his
good behavior fo r three weeks. I d id n ot let him go, so he told the
IN TEE SILENCES
new boy that he thought I was just joking. As soon as he took courage
in the belief that it was all a joke, he got back slowly into his old
habits o f talking. Then I let him go. N ow I think that the new
boy was as m uch of a talker as the other o n e ; but this was a
lesson to him . James did not suffer, as he got a place somewhere
else in a few months, and took real advantage of his experience
with me. H e stopped his talking, got to thinking, took up the
study o f books evenings and spare moments, and im proved his m ind
until he is now in a good position.”
It is evident that, had the employer not taught James this severe
lesson, he would have been of little use to him self or others in life.
Another report on the same subject is as follow s:
“ W hen a you ng m an I was an ordinary laborer. I studied every
m inute, day and night, that I had to spare. I fou n d an opportunity
to better myself. I kept on studying and im proving and bettering
myself. N ow I have over two hundred m en in my employ. I selected
them because of their apparent ability. I sifted them out one by one,
letting in others that I deemed more capable. I did the surprising
thing m any times of letting good, skilled men go, fo r no other reason
than their inclination to talk too m uch when the}r were at work.
Men less skilled took their places and were ju dged by this test. I
m ight have been juster to those I sent aw ay; for it is often true that
a talking man w ill reform if he thinks he is to lose his place. But
I had no tim e to do this. M y business increased, and the quality of
the work in all departments was much better in consequence of
m y methods.”
One more instance w ill be furnished, com ing from a man who
has seventy clerks and others in his e m p lo y :
“ I have many competitors. T o win success against com petition,
it is necessary to have the best skill and the best thought in every
branch of my business. F or twenty years I have made it a point
to discharge every talkative employee, no matter what other merit
he may possess. I call a man or woman talkative, who talks unnec
essarily during work being done fo r me. It detracts from the thought
and attention that m y work needs, and it leads to blunders as
well as in ferior results. I do n ot love m y com petitors, fo r they
have done all they could to rob me o f success; therefore it is with
some satisfaction that I have seen m y discharged employees find
good places in the em ploym ent o f m y competitors. It has been a
good thing for the men and women who needed the work, and good
fo r me. W ith the m ore efficient corps o f assistants I have pro

duced quality that counts, while m y com petitors have gone steadily
backward.”
This is genuine philosophy.
On the other hand there is a class o f people who are ultra silent
who produce nothing. Those who talk while they work, i f m ind
is required at all in the duties are sure to make mistakes and bring
in ferior results. B ut those who do not talk, i f they have no m ind,
w ill n ot give any better account o f their efforts. It is to distinguish
between these tw o classes and to brin g to light the m iddle class, that
denotes the skill o f the successful employer, whether in the home,
in business, or in the professional world.
This m iddle class becomes the foundation o f the better grade o f
workmen, clerks, managers and future partners. Carnegie, in a
hearing where he was a witness, said that more than forty poor
men who had com e to him in their youth were now millionaires, and
some o f them were worth m any m illions of dollars. H ow m any o f
those would have made a hundred thousand dollars i f they had been
left to their own business opportunities to gain that hum bler fortune ?
Probably not one. Y e t the fa ct that they rose to become m illionaires
was m uch dependent on their fitness to do the work fo r which thej
were employed. H ad they been sieves, or talkers, they would not
have held any position under Carnegie.
W e thus find a certain list o f silences that w ill not bear analysis:
1. There is the silence o f the voice in the case o f the m an or
wom an who says noth in g or very little, because there is nothing
com ing in to the m ind to be said. Such a person is an easy subject
o f hypnotism , but is hardly worth the experiments that are made,
as nothing from nothing leaves n oth in g ; and som ething cannot be
taken from nothing. Such a person cannot read the minds o f others,
n or catch the knowledge that drips at times out of the Other M ind
in to the w orking m ind, because the latter is not working. This
distinction is very im portant.
2. There is the silence of the m ind during the voluble speech o f
the m an or wom an whose voice runs almost on its own initiative.
T his is the nearest to perpetual m otion yet discovered in this world.
Such a. person is easily subjected to h ypnotism ; fo r the voice, being
apart from the m ind, cannot hold that fu n ction in a state o f resist
ance. A n y active thinking brain, i f the thought is alive in the
conscious division, is sure to resist the influence of the controller.
IN TEE SILENCES
new boy that he thought I was just joking. As soon as he took courage
in the belief that it was all a joke, he got back slowly into his old
habits o f talking. Then I let him go. N ow I think that the new
boy was as m uch of a talker as the other o n e ; but this was a
lesson to him . James did not suffer, as he got a place somewhere
else in a few months, and took real advantage o f his experience
with me. H e stopped his talking, got to thinking, took u p the
study o f books evenings and spare moments, and im proved his m ind
until he is now in a good position.”
It is evident that, had the employer n ot taught James this severe
lesson, he would have been o f little use to him self or others in life.
Another report on the same subject is as follow s:
“ W hen a you ng m an I was an ordinary laborer. I studied every
minute, day and night, that I had to spare. I fou n d an opportunity
to better myself. I kept on studying and im proving and bettering
myself. N ow I have over two hundred men in m y employ. I selected
them because o f their apparent ability. I sifted them out one by one,
letting in others that I deemed more capable. I did the surprising
thing m any times of letting good, skilled men go, fo r no other reason
than their inclination to talk too much when they were at work.
Men less skilled took their places and were ju dged by this test. I
m ight have been juster to those I sent aw ay; for it is often true that
a talking man w ill reform if he thinks he is to lose his place. B ut
I had no tim e to do this. M y business increased, and the quality of
the work in all departments was m uch better in consequence of
m y methods.”
One more instance w ill be furnished, com ing from a man who
has seventy clerks and others in his e m p lo y :
“ I have many competitors. T o win success against com petition,
it is necessary to have the best skill and the best thought in every
branch of m y business. F or twenty years I have made it a point
to discharge every talkative employee, n o matter what other m erit
he may possess. I call a man or woman talkative, who talks unnec
essarily during work being done fo r me. It detracts from the thought
and attention that m y work needs, and it leads to blunders as
well as in ferior results. I do n ot love m y com petitors, fo r they
have done all they could to rob me o f success; therefore it is with
some satisfaction that I have seen m y discharged employees find
good places in the em ploym ent o f m y competitors. It has been a
good thing for the men and women who needed the work, and good
fo r me. W ith the more efficient corps o f assistants I have pro

duced quality that counts, while m y com petitors have gone steadily
backward.”
This is genuine philosophy.
On the other hand there is a class o f people who are ultra silent
who produce nothing. Those Who talk while they work, i f m ind
is required at all in the duties are sure to make mistakes and bring
in ferior results. B ut those who do n ot talk, i f they have no m ind,
w ill not give any better account o f their efforts. I t is to distinguish
between these tw o classes and to brin g to ligh t the m iddle class, that
denotes the skill o f the successful employer, whether in the home,
in business, or in the professional world.
This m iddle class becomes the foundation o f the better grade of
workmen, clerks, managers and future partners. Carnegie, in a
hearing where he was a witness, said that more than forty poor
men who had come to him in their youth were now millionaires, and
some of them were worth many m illions of dollars. H ow many o f
those w ould have made a hundred thousand dollars i f they had been
left to their own business opportunities to gain that hum bler fortune ?
Probably n ot one. Y e t the fa ct that they rose to become m illionaires
was m uch dependent on their fitness to do the w ork fo r which they
were employed. H ad they been sieves, or talkers, they would not
have held any position under Carnegie.
W e thus find a certain list o f silences that w ill not bear analysis:
1. There is the silence o f the voice in the case o f the m an or
woman who says nothing or very little, because there is nothing
com ing in to the m ind to be said. Such a person is an easy subject
o f hypnotism , but is hardly worth the experiments that are made,
as nothing from nothing leaves n oth in g ; and something cannot be
taken from nothing. Such a person cannot read the minds o f others,
nor catch the knowledge that drips at times out o f the Other M ind
in to the w orking m ind, because the latter is not working. T his
distinction is very important.
2. There is the silence of the m ind during the voluble speech o f
the m an or wom an whose voice runs almost on its own initiative.
T his is the nearest to perpetual m otion yet discovered in this world.
Such a. person is easily subjected to h ypnotism ; fo r the voice, being
apart from the m ind, cannot hold that fu n ction in a state of resist
ance. A n y active thinking brain, i f the thought is alive in the
conscious division, is sure to resist the influence o f the controller.
IN THE SILENCES
Therefore the m ind that is silent when the voice is silent, and the
m ind that is silent when the voice is speaking, w ill always be the
m ind that is controlled by the hypnotist, and the m agnetic individual.
3. The th ird silence is that of the m ind that has been thrown into
“ n o-m an V lan d .” This, i f done by an act o f the w ill, is not the
m ind of a person who is to be mastered by others; but who is at
the tim e master o f his own will. I t is in such a pause that the w ell-
known telepathic interval is created, enabling the m ind to catch the
knowledge that comes from psychic sources. This silence o f the
m in d is accom panied by the silence o f the voice, in case the latter
is speaking; but that is treated as another silence in a class by itself.
4. T he fou rth silence is that of the pause. T his is the outgrowth
o f the third silence. I t occurs during conversation, the purpose
being to throw the m ind into emptiness in a second or two o f time,
so as to catch the thoughts o f another person. The th ird silence is
used when alone, and in a second or tw o o f time, to gauge the feelings
o f others towards yourself, or ascertain som ething o f their intentions
and purposes.
5. T he fifth silence is that of the reverie. I t is useful fo r the
purpose o f taking in knowledge o f wide scope w ithout aim, or to
make some special fa ct clear. I t also serves genius in ferretin g out
the secrets o f nature. There is n o inventor, artist, creator o f ideas
or new movements, deep scholar, or genius of any kind, who has not
used the reverie; and the cultivation of this power is one o f the
most im portant methods o f advancing the interests o f the individual
m an or woman along any of the highways o f existence.
6. T he sixth silence is that o f drowsiness. I t blanks the m ind
and takes thought away. I t differs from the other silences because
it alone tends toward natural sleep. B ut as the conscious m ind is
withdrawn, this silence opens the way to hypnotism , suggestion that
is not hypnotic, and physical depression.
7. The seventh silence is that of the lapse. I t is a dangerous
condition o f the m ind, and needs im m ediate attention. As it does
not belong to this line o f investigation, but is treated in Universal
M agnetism , it needs only be m entioned here as one o f the silences.
8. The eighth silence is that o f abstraction. A ll are somewhat alike,
although there are points o f difference between those that are allied.
Abstraction closely resembles the first and second silences. I t occurs
in its beginning as the loss o f a word such as the name o f a person,
ot some term or date or other thing with which the m ind has been
quite fam iliar. Thus it differs from other silences, as it takes

place in the m idst o f conscious thinking, whether one is w riting, or
talking, or m erely contem plating. I t is a loss, or hole, in a sentence.
Abstraction is a very dangerous condition, and indicates in many
cases the com ing on o f mental breakdown. U nlike the first and
second silences, it does n ot lead to hypnotic control.
T he beginning o f the trouble should be m et i f possible; otherwise
it may be combated at any stage. I f it has progressed far, the best
method is to make use o f self-suggestion, as stated in an earlier cycle
o f this book. B ut this work w ill find you, if the fau lt has already
set in, with the loss occurring only as the escape o f some fam iliar
word. I t is n ot the same as m em ory fa ilu re ; but leads to an ad
vanced stage o f that trouble i f not corrected.
The natural preventive o f abstraction and one o f the best cures
in case it has advanced only a short distance on the road to mental
weakness, is to have a string on every thought you write or utter.
T his means that there is an idea back of each idea you write or
speak. A better term is that o f the root and tree o f thought. The
latter part o f the name is used to describe the spoken or written
id ea ; while the root is made to apply to the source from which it
sprang.
In case there is known no source o f an idea that has com e to
your m ind, then attach the in q u u y, W hat is the use o f it?
This w ill brin g the m ind to see itself, and herein is the cure o f
both abstraction and fa ilin g memory.
W hen the step has been taken successfully, the next is to change
the inquiry to the follow ing, Can it be p ro v ed ?
These are simple questions, but they set the m ind going, and that
is what is wanted. W hen the m ind, like a w orn-out clock, does not
run smoothly, and skips ideas, it needs attention, and the purpose
is to get it running properly.
I f you are addressing some frien d on a subject with which you
are perfectly fam iliar, and a word fails you that you have recently
uttered m any times, apply the first inquiry, and endeavor to answer
it in your mental workshop. The follow in g are exam ples:
“ I was over to see m y old friend to-day . . Y o u find that
the name has slipped from you r mind. I t is not the case o f loss
o f m em ory, fo r that applies to names and terms that have not been
used recen tly ; whereas the abstraction is o f som ething that you know
well, and generally involves only one word.
IN THE SILENCES
The name o f your old friend is H orton. Y o n started to say,

“ I was over to see H orton to -d a y /’ but when you saw that your m ind
was to ju m p the name, you shifted your statement so that it covered
up the defect. T his is all the time g oin g on in the w o rld ; and few
persons are free from such loss. In applying the m ethod o f pre
vention and cure, you should force the m ind to becom e alert by
fighting it out then and there in the follow in g m anner:
“ I was over to see . . . m y old friend to-day.” A n d in your
m ind you carry on the inquiry. W hat is the use o f telling about
that m an ? Does this party want to know ? W hat is he anyway
to him , and why should he care to be to ld ? Then the m ind, having
in this variety o f ways asked what is the use o f it, w ill tell you
what is the use of it by saying that this old friend o f yours was
in the war, and he fou gh t in such a battle and has been honored
fo r it by his fellow m en, and everybody has a good w ord to say for
H orton. There is his name, and so you w ill say aloud to your
visitor, “ Y ou know m y old friend H orton, do you n o t? ” There
is a. sort o f trium ph in your tones as you make this last inquiry.
The failure to remember has not been noticed, and this pleases you
all the more.
I f you again have an abstraction, fight it out in the same way,
until you have mastered the loss. Soon you w ill find that your m ind
does n ot skip ideas. Then you should take the next step, which is
to ask the question, Can it be proved? The way it works is some
thing like th is :
“ The trouble with the automobile was due to the flooding o f the
part through which the gasoline flows.” H ere is a w ord lo s t; and
it should be argued with under the first step by the inquiry, What
is the use o f it ? O f w hat? O f telling about the flooding of the
part that carries the gasoline through som ething? Is it im portant?
It stopped the automobile lon g enough to make us lose the train
B ut does your friend care to know it ? W ould he know any more
about it i f you told him that the carburetor was flooding because the
gasoline level was too high, and was caused prim arily by a grain
o f sand in the needle valve, or a float that had partly become filled
with gasoline? Anyway, the name of the part is carburetor, and
that is enough.
Assum ing that the skip has been overcome, and that you wish to
strengthen you r m ind against further losses, then learn to think
the inquiry, Can it be proved? T hin k this w ithout stopping the
flow o f general thought. The claim that a horse can think o f but
one thing at a time and that m an can think o f many, is not altogether
tru e ; but it is a fa ct that man is able to carry two currents o f
ideas in his conscious m ind, side by side, w ithout the aid o f the
Other M ind. H ere are some of the statements that may be made
and questions asked about them at the same time. They are taken at
random, and merely serve to illustrate how the m ind works when
trained. M illions of other statements could be taken as w e ll; or
any remark that you make during your conversation with others.
“ T he world is grow ing better.” Can it bo proved? W ho knows?
W ho has a right to say the world is grow ing better? I f it is a
known fact, why has not someone made it more prom inent as a
means o f encouraging workers fo r reform ? M ost people are finding
fa u lt with the idea that things are looking up, and charge the late
spasmodic efforts as a mere wave that w ill soon pass. I t is an im
portant question, and should be proved. B ut how can it be sub
stantiated ?
Y o u see the replies are not made. The p roof is not actually
offered; n or need it be, so that the m ind is set to thinking. A ll
these thoughts hover around the one statement. T he w orld is grow
in g better.
Here is another.
“ H onesty is the best policy.”
Can that be proved ? Is not a thing that is a policy a matter o f
deceit? I f a man is honest fo r the mere purpose of policy, would
he be honest if there were nothing to be gained by in tegrity? H ow
many persons would be honest if it were not p o licy ?
Here is another:
“ 'T h e man who hesitates is lost.” Can that be p ro v e d ?? Is it not
better to hesitate and be sure you are righ t before g oin g ahead?
Does not the statement mean that the man, under a narrow and
peculiar d rift o f circumstances, who stops to consider the conditions,
null lose by it, as when he is on the track and an express train is
com ing ?
“ Jones is a thief.”
Can that be p rov ed ? D id someone see him steal? I f he did, then
is there not some explanation of the reason why he took the m oney?
D id he need it enough to have to pilfer it ? Is he the victim o f the
nervous disease known as kleptom ania? I f no one saw Jones take
the money, how can it be proved that he stole it ?
IN THE SILENCES
“ They say that Smith, who was engaged to M iss Brown, has
jilted her and is goin g to m arry Miss W hite.”
Can that be proved? D id Sm ith tell you, or did Miss Brown tell
you, or did Miss W hite tell you ? I f not, who d id ? I f you heard
it on the street the other day, did you follow the matter up and
ascertain if Smith or B row n or W hite knows anything about it ?
Here is another:
“ They say that Miss W inton has colored blood in her veins.”
Can this be proved? Does it mean red blood, or A frican b lood ?
I f the latter, who knows that it is tru e? She is a very pretty girl,
has bright ways, is o f fine intellect, and enjoys a splendid reputation.
S till if she has a drop or more of A frica n blood in her veins, she
must be ostracized, despite her beauty, her charms o f manner, her
brilliant m ind and high m oral status. Therefore it is well to obtain
the p roof before she is subjected to harsh treatment.
T he purpose o f this double w orking o f the m ind is to draw atten
tion to som ething more than the remark. T alking is to a large
extent an automatic habit, in which there is very little m in d ; and
it is the person who is troubled with the first two silences, or either
o f them, who is the victim later on o f abstraction.
This fau lt is due to the automatic process by which a person can
keep on talking while the m ind does less and less thinking. The
double process compels the m ind to think m ore than the voice talks.
T hen there can be no such habit as automatic speech.
Make the experiments.
A n y question w ill d o ; but those we have selected are easy to use
in setting the m ind to a running fire o f ideas, and they have been
em ployed in several cases with perfect results. It does n ot take
lon g to start the double action. N or is it a new plan. In some
o f our earlier works it is treated more extensively than here. One
of the quickest ways to adopt this plan is to memorize some selection
of dramatic power, which means that it is a story o f human nature
or some episode in life. A fter you have mastered the words, acquire
the correct action fo r the proper delivery o f the whole piece. Y o u
can make u p the gestures and attitudes and the pantom im e of the
b o d y ; fo r it does not matter how crude all this m ay be i f it seems
to you to be the way o f expressing the matter. Then repeat this
selection m any times. A t length begin to recite it with the m ind
talking over the details all the while, and n ot in spoken w ord s; just
thoughts.
'W B OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND
W hile to you in the beginning this may seem im possible, it is

the simplest form o f double-mind, action. I t has been done many
times. W e have seen actors in the m idst o f the deepest tragedy
play in the most com ic manner, and use undertone remarks all
the way through the delivery, interposing these secondary statements
along with the heavier words. They seemed to enjoy the business,
and it has been said of some, like B ooth, that it was necessary in
order to throw off the burdens o f too severe tragedy. It is a relief.
W e once heard M ary Anderson, in the m idst o f her greatest scene
on the stage, in which she was in the arms o f her lover, say to him ,
“ Get off m y foot,” without stopping the flow o f the great thoughts,
as fa r as the audience was concerned. These fou r words can be
spoken while the voice is at the ordinary stop in the usual groups
that are made in the delivery o f the lines, and need scarce a second.
T o any person who wishes to test the power o f this double process
in restoring the energy o f the m ind to m aintain its hold on all that
enters it, there is nothing in the whole range o f training to equal
it in fru itfu l results.
It is n ot difficult, except to start. I t is within the possibility o f
every person o f intelligence.
The peculiar fa ct connected w ith abstraction is the loss o f one
word, while the rest of the statement is fu lly in the m ind. The
latter m ay be active and even strong, and yet the w ord w ill drop out.
Later on, tw o words w ill slip aw ay; then th ree; and finally the
disease w ill be known as fa ilin g memory.
B ut the fa ilin g o f the memory refers always to some idea o f old,
that has faded o ff; it is not the dropping out o f a strong statement
o f one w o rd ; but the hazy or faded fact that was once known but
is now gone. The com m on case o f the m an who is told by his w ife
in the m orning to mail a letter, and he brings it back with him at
night, is not loss o f m em ory, or abstraction; but mere lack o f atten
tion. There is no reason why the m ind should either remember or
forget the letter. The m an has not given the same degree o f attention
to that fact as he has to the debtor who owes him some m oney and
who has prom ised to pay him that day. T he latter fact claims his
attention in sufficient strength to hold his m ind to i t ; and he calls'
on the debtor fo r the money. H a d he been the victim o f fa ilin g
memory, he w ould have forgotten one m atter as readily as the other.
Y o u once knew the dates o f all the great battles o f the w orld if
you studied h istory ; now you can state the dates o f less than a dozen ;
IN THE SILENCES
possibly not more than three. T hey have slipped away. Nearly
every such fact fades in tim e ; but the m ind is not expected to recall
them, and there are few persons am ong those who could once state
such things with exactness, who to-day have them in m ind. There
fore the tendency o f the brain is to give up its details.
Y et in spite o f this tendency, it is true that the few great events
that live in the m ind have been recalled time and tim e again until
they have been doubled on, and have been thereby given new strength.
The things out o f your past life that you m ost clearly remember
have been thought over many times u ntil they are fresh as the last
thoughts given th em ; while all else has gone out forever, only to
be fou n d again in the Other M ind. That fu n ction never gives up
anything for good. Its knowledge m ay touch the outer edge o f the
conscious m ind and be thereby recognized, but it is n ot lost to
the psychic realm. N othin g there fades.
This brings us to the next silence.
9. The ninth silence is that of inattention. I t has just been said
that the man who is given his w ife’ s letter in the m orning to mail
when he goes down town, and who brings that selfsame letter back
in his coat pocket, is not guilty of loss o f mem ory, but of inattention.
H e may be asked if he mailed it, and he w ill possibly rep ly:
“ I f you gave it to me I certainly m ailed it.”
H e is not sure that she gave it to him. H e m ight have been in
a lapse of m ind when he got it, and thus have taken it automatically,
with n o realization o f receiving i t ; but this is not often the case.
H e sim ply was thinking of something else and did not fix his atten
tion on the episode in the m orning. It was a dream to him. H ad
he placed the letter in his cigar pocket, and then fou n d it there
in the m iddle o f the forenoon, he would have looked at the address,
and surmised that the letter was intended to be mailed, as it was
in his w ife’ s handw riting, and she had sometimes given him a letter
to mail.
Children have this habit of inattention; and the fa ct that they
outgrow it and develop strong m inds in some cases, shows that it is
not a sign o f decadence. F orgetfu l husbands w ill appreciate this
explanation.
H ow to overcome it in children in the shortest possible tim e is
one o f the problems o f teachers in the public schools. W hipping
does not seem to remedy the trouble. So the w ife who scolds the
husband does not better him very much. The best method is that
which w ill set the double action o f the m ind at work. W ives have,
by the use of sarcasm, brought their husbands to a proper degree o f
attention. In H arvard U niversity, during a valuable but rather
dry lecture, the students were in the habit o f engaging in whispered
conversation, which the lecturer had remarked upon several times
w ithout effect. On one occasion he stopped and said:
“ Y ou n g gentlemen, if m y lecture should at any time interfere
with your private conversation, I will gladly suspend it u ntil you
have fin ish ed /’
This set them to thinking d o u b ly ; prim arily o f what he was sa y in g ;
and secondarily o f the effect his remarks would have on the students.
Those who had been whispering, wondered what the others thought
o f their being made the butt o f sarcasm ; and those who had not been
whispering at that time, wondered what effect the sarcasm would
have on those who were suspected o f the breach o f good manners.
A man who had twenty young women in his office, whose services
he valued, but who had acquired the talking habit after a very flashy
miss had come into the w ork and been discharged, cautioned them
about their new made habit, but to very little effect. Then he
put up the follow in g sign :
“ A ll clerks who wish to remain in m y em ploy and who are unable
to resist the habit o f talking while at w ork w ill be prom oted by
com ing to me and frankly stating the fact. Those who do not
wish to do this, w ill be assigned a special period after w orking hours
each day in which they are to meet and remove the talking germs
from their systems.”
One of the young women thought she would seek the prom otion,
which involved the confession that she could not help talking. She
was then given a vacation o f six months w ithout pay, a m uch needed
rest; at the end o f which time she came back older and wiser, but
at the foot of the list. This prom otion deterred the others, and
the talking ceased; but only after the clerks had come to the em
ployer and asked to have the offensive notice taken down. H e did
this on receiving the written agreement o f each clerk to take a
reduction in wages if she indulged in unnecessary talk again during
w orking hours. They stopped talking.
The principle involved is an im portant one.
T he double working of the m ind is appealed to in the fam iliar
notice which almost every town and city has had placed up some
where in its lim its:
I N TH E. S IL E N C E S
“ Gentlemen w ill n ot spit h ere; all others are forbidden b y law to

do so.”
T he above notice, or something o f sim ilar im port, which is so
frequently seen, contains the double effort to arouse the m ind. It
has had the effect to com pel the man who reads it to ask him self
i f he is a gentleman, and this is an idea back o f an idea. I t sets in
m otion the fundam ental fa ct that a man who is o f decent manners
w ill not spit on the places where others are to walk, especially ladies.
The real intent o f the notice is to stop that filthy habit. As it is
useless to ask a boor to stop it, something m ore must be done. Signs
fa il to attract attention if they have but one idea in them, or but
one set o f ideas; it is the thought within the thought that counts
value in holdin g the attention o f the reader.
A master in a high school who was n ot able to arouse interest in
a class in botany,, resorted to this same m ethod, by tellin g the students
that there was a certain leaf which was the only form ation of its
kind that had survived the great geological revolution hundreds o f
thousands o f years ago. H e had them hunting fo r it, and this one
incident aroused an interest in the study.
In like vein another teacher who fou n d history a dull theme with
his classes, assigned a very dry lesson and added: “ In the statement
of the recorded events, there is a hidden m eaning o f the author
which has come to light under recent analysis o f his w ritings. I wish
to know to-m orrow how m any o f you w ill be able to find this hidden
meaning.” T hey all tried, and some fou n d one thing, and some
another. T he m ind, while m aking an effort to grasp the facts of
history, was doing double thinking, and it paid.
The attention is always fixed in a wholesome and healthful way
by this double u se ; and it is the key to the developm ent o f a strong
m ind. It is also a tool in the hands of skilful speakers, teachers,
lawyers, doctors, and all business and professional m en ; and is used
to carry on the subtle and dangerous work known as wakeful hypno
tism, when com bined with the least degree, or any degree, o f m agnet
ism. I t serves to take the place o f the higher form s o f m agnetic
control.
T hrough the silences we have thus worked our way up to this
m ethod o f wakeful m agnetism ; and, w ithout the present cycle, it
w ould be difficult to understand the next.
TWENTY-THIRD CYCLE
E KNOW not when som e mind
^ May hold us in its power

Though we ourselves believe
T he m astery is ours
A nd what ive yield ive give
M ost willing away.
S H A S been frequently stated, this is an age o f hypno

tism. M oreover it is distinctly and decidedly an age
o f hypnotism . M en and women are learning the a rt;
nearly all o f them in a clumsy and half-efficient man
ner. A physician who uses this power fo r the purpose
o f cu rin g disease, and who has been very successful, states that he
has seen more than a hundred men and many women attempt hypno
tism ; that on an average they had no less than a dozen subjects each;
and that not one o f them was able to use the power either safely or
judiciously. F rom other sources has come the inform ation that the
beginner in this kind o f practice does m uch h a rm ; and that there
are experimenters who are seeking experience without fit preparation
for it. The fau lt to be found is in two particulars:
1. These operators have not equipped themselves with the necessary
knowledge o f the best and m ost direct methods to be employed.
2. They are not cognizant of the dangers attending careless control
o f the w ill power of others. They even ridicule the suggestion o f
danger.
In addition to the injuries that follow such carelessness, there is
the fa ct that the rapid increase in the public use o f hypnotism is
resulting in the half-degree o f influence that is more widespread to
day than ever before in the history o f humanity.
B y referring back to the cycle that taught hypnotism it will be
«fen that the F irst Degree is one that is attended by fu ll conscious-
IN THE SILENCES
“ Gentlemen w ill not spit h ere; all others are forbidden b y law to
do so.”
T he above notice, or something o f sim ilar im port, which is so
frequently seen, contains the double effort to arouse the m ind. It
has had the effect to com pel the man who reads it to ask him self
if he is a gentleman, and this is an idea back o f an idea. I t sets in
m otion the fundam ental fa ct that a man who is o f decent manners
w ill not spit on the places where others are to walk, especially ladies.
The real intent o f the notice is to stop that filthy habit. A s it is
useless to ask a boor to stop it, something m ore must be done. Signs
fa il to attract attention if they have but one idea in them, or but
one set o f ideas; it is the thought within the thought that counts
value in holdin g the attention o f the reader.
A master in a high school who was n ot able to arouse interest in
a class in botany,, resorted to this same m ethod, by telling the students
that there was a certain leaf which was the only form ation of its
kind that had survived the great geological revolution hundreds o f
thousands o f years ago. H e had them hunting fo r it, and this one
incident aroused an interest in the study.
In like vein another teacher who fou n d history a dull theme with
his classes, assigned a very dry lesson and added: “ In the statement
o f the recorded events, there is a hidden m eaning o f the author
which has com e to light under recent analysis o f his w ritings. I wish
to know to-m orrow how many o f you w ill be able to find this hidden
m eaning.” They all tried, and some fou n d one thing, and some
another. T he m ind, while m aking an effort to grasp the facts of
history, was doing double thinking, and it paid.
The attention is always fixed, in a wholesome and healthful way
by this double u se; and it is the key to the development o f a strong
m ind. I t is also a tool in the hands o f skilful speakers, teachers,
lawyers, doctors, and all business and professional m e n ; and is used
to carry on the subtle and dangerous w ork known as wakeful hypno
tism, when com bined with the least degree, or any degree, o f m agnet
ism . I t serves to take the place o f the higher form s o f m agnetic
control.
T hrough the silences we have thus worked our way u p to this
method o f wakeful m agnetism ; and, w ithout the present cycle, it
would be difficult to understand the next.
WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM
ness and fu ll wakefulness, except that the subject feels a little drowsy,
or has an inclination to sleep. I n the F irst Degree there are some
characteristics that are peculiar:
1. T he subject is fu lly conscious.
2. H e has n ot the slightest idea that he is under hypnotic in
fluence, and stoutly denies it when so inform ed.
3. The operator is n ot always sure o f his control or that he has
even brought the subject to the F irst Degree. This fact has been
demonstrated in hundreds o f cases am ong operators w ith their early
attempts. T hey have abandoned the efforts as useless, in the belief
that they cou ld n ot induce as m uch as the F irst D eg ree; while, as a
matter o f fact, their subjects are already under that stage o f control.
The result has been that thousands o f men and wom en have gone
out in that state and have been a lon g tim e, in some instances, in
reaching a norm al state again.
4. M any persons in a m ood of playfulness have sought to hypnotize.
Only a short tim e ago, a you ng woman said to several young men,
“ I can hypnotize all o f you. M ay I try it ? ” She was jok in g, and
d id not know that some persons are exceedingly susceptible; the
result being that the third you ng man she tried to pu t to sleep, fell
into the First Degree.
“ H e is foolin g,” said one o f the others.
The young wom an thought it true that he was p reten d in g; but
he seemed very serious, so she tried to carry the joke farther, and
soon he was in the T h ird Degree. "When she fou n d that she could
n ot awaken him , she screamed and ran fo r a doctor. I t was hours
before he was restored to norm al wakefulness.
In a group o f a hundred men, a novice would find several who could
be put in to hypnotic sleep; while an expert w ould find over ninety
who would be controlled sooner or later, and made to pass beyond the
F irst Degree. W om en would yield a larger percentage, possibly
ninety-eight out o f a hundred being susceptible.
Wlien one person in a group is hypnotized, others are m ore easily
subjected to the same influence. W e can cite caseafter case where
an expert physician allows his patients, especially those who have
never been hypnotized, to sit where they can see the process and the
ease with which others are subjected to this influence. T he result is
that he finds several in each group already in the F irst Degree, al
though they do not realize it.
This fact is o f the highest importance.
It can be verified by asking any doctor who makes use o f the

art, unless, for reasons that may be deemed politic, he m ay not like
to have the fact known. B ut it is published broadcast in works,
magazines and other fo rm s; and is known to be one o f the m ost p o
tent factors in the practice.
I t has been said by one o f the m ost capable experts in this practice
that a mass o f people can easily be thrown into a half-degree by the
application of the same principle.
E A S E OF T H E H A L F -D E G R E E IN F L U E N C E .
1. It does not require m anipulation.

2. I t does not require the dulling of the eyes by the use o f any
bright object. T he intense fire o f the m agnetic eye is not needed in
this work, nor any m ethod which w ill cause drowsiness. In the
ordinary uses of hypnotism , it is always necessary to produce some
feeling o f heaviness at the eyes.
3. It does not impress the subject as an attempt to hypnotize.
4. The user o f this subtle power may be heard o n ly ; or he m ay
depend on ideas that are conveyed by letter or in w riting, although
the latter methods are m uch more difficult than words spoken to
the ears, and assisted in some way by holding the gaze o f the listen
ers.
5. W e have fou n d that whole juries, whole congregations, whole
audiences, whole groups large and small, have been controlled by this
power known as wakeful h ypnotism ; and in addition to this fact,
it has also been proved that individuals are to-day being swayed
by it to a greater extent than ever before.
Since the w ill of human beings ceased to be swayed by the use
o f force, it has been the custom o f people to take advantage o f
their liberty and seek mastery, fa ir or unfair, by mental efforts
alone. W e have ju st stepped, as a people in entirety, into this use
of the freedom o f the m ind with which to obtain control over oth ers;
and hence this has become an age o f influence, the latest phase o f
which is to em ploy the new powers in an open encounter.
W hile this deals with what may be called the half-degree o f hypno
tism, and should properly be classed among the earlier cycles o f this
work, it is founded on the silences which could n ot be described
until they had been approached through a certain range o f cycles in
order that their principles m ight be understood; so that the logical
position in this study is after the account of the silences.
WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM
W e m ust start with a realization o f the seriousness o f the situation

that faces the civilized w orld to-day. W hen m ight made right,
the weaker physically were com pelled to succumb to the stronger.
To-day if the man with the gun is able to hold up the man with the
m oney, the latter must p a y ; and this is about all that is left of the
old law o f m ight com pelling right.
T he shifting o f the means of preying on the property and liberty
of others has led to the skilful invention o f the use o f the m ind as
the weapon of warfare. In this use there is one w ord that conveys
a world o f meaning and power, the strongest word in the language
to-day, and the one w ord that is almost resistless. It i s :
S U G G E S T IO N .
This is employed in all the degrees o f control.
1. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the F irst Degree.
2. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the Second Degree.
3. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the T h ird Degree.
4. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the F ourth Degree.
5. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the F ifth Degree.
6. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the Sixth Degree.
7. Suggestion is used when the subject is being influenced before
passing in to any degree, as a means o f bringing him under control.
8. Suggestion is used when the subject, having been put by it into
a hypnotic sleep, is awakened in that sleep and controlled in thought
and action.
9. Suggestion is used during sleep that is natural, and at the time
when sleep is com ing on.
10. Suggestion is used by the person who seeks to b rin g on a state
o f conscious em ptying o f the m ind, and to cause the Other M in d to
take up ideas fo r the advantage o f the individual.
11. Suggestion is used in fu ll wakefulness when one person wishes
to control the w ill or the inclinations o f another.
12. Suggestion is used by any person who is brought under some
belief or expectation to such an extent that the m ind’s attention is
absolutely held by it. This is known as auto-suggestion, and is very
com m on to-day, as it has always been in the past.
The last named form o f suggestion is illustrated by the methods
o f the old healers who used to travel from one city to another in
the past centuries; and who are now fou n d only in remote countries.
T heir com ing was heralded weeks ahead. H ow they would, come wa
OPERATIONS OF TI1E OTHER MIND
known by the elaborate preparations. Outriders, follow in g advance

couriers, excited the liveliest feelings o f expectation. Stories o f m ar
velous cures, called miracles, were circulated. The grow in g power
of the healer was not forgotten, i f his agents could be trusted to tell
the truth. T he sick, always hopeful and susceptible, were quite as
m uch under the sway o f their own suggestion as that of the healer.
The latter need only appear to complete the work. H e could tell
those who were subjects to hypnotic power, which o f course was a
part o f his methods, and these he took in hand and actually accom
plished g o o d ; but those who, as he surveyed the masses, were not likely
to become ready subjects, he let touch the garm ent he wore, or
touched them w ith his h a n d ; and m any o f them were benefited.
In such cases the power o f self-suggestion achieved the results.
There is no doubt that cures are effected in such way, and are
wholly due to auto-suggestion. There is no doubt that the medicines
that are in fact worthless, accomplish cures in the cases o f people
who are thoroughly convinced in their efficacy; unless, as in the case
o f the patent medicines now on the market, there are alcohol, cocaine,
and other deadly enslaving drugs that w ill turn the individual into a
confirm ed wreck in a short time.
Every reputable physician can tell you o f countless instances where
harmless pills, m ere-nothing-m edicines and sim ilar tricks have pro
duced remarkable cures by the same principle o f auto-suggestion.
T o have a convincing and unshakable belief or faith in anything
or any person w ill bring revolution into the body and into the m ind.
It all depends on the thoroughness of the belief or the faith, llo r e
than fou r thousand years ago it was asserted that faith in anything
whether through religious channels or otherwise, if absolute, would
accomplish any end desired. T his has always been true, and it is
true to-day.
Suggestion, therefore, must inspire belief.
B u t it is not easy to catch belief. T he ignorant, having run up
against the bitter experiences o f their own recklessness, are on the
lookout fo r more trickery. They are mastered by two influences only
in large measure now, and that is in the use of nostrums and the
claims o f political demagogues. In nearly all else they refuse to
believe unless it is inexpensive, like gossip that damages the repu
tation o f their fellow beings, or yellow journalism that is only a
m uddier form o f gossip ; the sewerage being in greater volume, or
spread out over m ore ground.
WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM
T h e wiser m inds are still more difficult to sway b y the mere

agency or belief. Y e t in all cases the belief must be caught before
any control, hypnotic or open, can be exercised effectively. This may
then be set down as the first point.
D isbelief is a resistance o f the mind.
There can be no resistance as lon g as there is n o definite thought.
T o-day the effort to capture belief that is against one’ s inclinations,
is met by the definite thought that there is a motive fo r the asser
tion, and here we have the fu n ction o f double-ideas that was the
clim ax o f the cycle ju st preceding this.
As lon g as a person is able to maintain this double process o f
thinking, so lon g w ill it be impossible to exercise any fo rm o f control
over him. Take a few examples as instances:
1. A man is asked to buy something he wants. I f he can get it
o f one person at a lower price than is charged by another, he w ill buy
it o f the form er, all other things being equal. I f the latter is to
secure the sale, he must in still a secondary idea in the m ind o f the
buyer, and to-day that is the problem o f merchants who seek good
prices. The natural appeal is to a belief in better quality as a basis
o f the increased cost.
2. A man is asked to buy something he does not know whether h
wants or not. T he vendor must prove to him that he really wants it,
and show the advantage o f an immediate purchase. T his is hard to
do, but it is being done righ t along.
3. A man is asked to buy som ething that he knows he does not
want and w ill never need. T he vendor has a still more difficult task,
and m ust prove to the man that he can turn the ownership o f the
thing to a future advantage. Even this is being done every day some
where, and m en are being bitten.
4. A lawyer is called upon to defend a m an who is charged with a
crim e. T he p ro o f is absolute. There is no defense. T he lawyer, in
order to secure a verdict o f acquittal, must make the ju ry believe that
the m an had legal justification fo r his deed. H ere is fou n d the most
difficult o f all con d ition s; yet the juries are brought about through
the skilful handling o f the facts, and the substitution o f other matters
that are not facts.
T he p eg called “ reasonable doubt” is the one on which most
cases are miscarried. B efore the lawyer gets through he will make
the ju ry wonder what is a reasonable doubt, and in the end they will
entertain a reasonable d ou bt as to their a b ility to u nderstand w hat is
meant by i t ; and this is sufficient to bring abont an acquittal. Most

prosecutors have not yet learned that their strongest fight must be
on this point. T hey say a few words on the subject and leave the
rest to the court;, the opposing counsel and the ju ry. B ut, in order
to want to release the defendant on the point o f reasonable doubt,
the jurors must have a secondary motive. S kilful lawyers furnish
this in many ways. I f the case can be brought to near the close o f a
day preceding a holiday, especially Christmas, few juries want to
make a man a present of a conviction. I t is the m ellow tim e of
the year. One defendant had been released on bail, and sat close to
his lawyer. H is little boj7, with innocent childish face, sat close to
his father and his tiny hand was held in the defendant’ s. W hat
man on the ju ry wanted to send the father to ja il or to a death
sentence P So the presence o f an aged father or mother, or wife,
or daughter o f the crim inal, w ill serve to side-track justice. The
men in the box think o f the effect of their verdicts on others, and
this double-action of the m ind is a power which enables them to re
sist the appeal o f the prosecuting attorney.
In antagonism, where two or more persons seek the will-power of
any one, it is the purpose to set up this resistance in the m ind. But
it requires the other process o f com pletely diverting the attention in
order to plant the seeds o f mastery.
I f the attorney fo r the plaintiff seeks to sway the ju ry against the
defendant, he must carry 011 two victories in o n e :
H e must brin g the minds of the jurors into the ninth silence,
which is in attention ; and then must set up the double process in
place of that condition, so that they w ill form a fixed resistance to
the demands and appeals that w ill be made to their judgm ent by the
attorney fo r the defense.
A lm ost every human being to-day is look ing fo r motive. I f you
want a favor, or seek to buy or sell something, or ask the attention
o f a person to any plan that you have, there w ill at once be set up in
the m ind of that person a demand fo r a motive. There w ill come
in one way or another the inquiry, W hat is the use o f it, or the reason
for it, or the good of it ? “ I w ill sell you something fo r less than
it cost m e,” is a com m on offer, or its equivalent. “ But why should
it be sold fo r less than cost? H ow can I be made to know that fa c t?
H ow can it be p roved ?” As long as the other party is allowed to
busy his m ind with these inquiries, he is in a state of resistance that
cannot be overcome by the transaction its e lf; and the purpose is then
WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM
to throw the m ind out o f one of these double-ideas. W hen this is

done, the control soon follows.
Motive and p roof are everywhere the two agencies of resistance
to your efforts to master the minds o f oth ers; that is, there w ill be
the seeking o f the m otive, and the wanting to know how m uch truth
there is in the general offer or statement. These tw o inquiries
were param ount in the last cycle, and they always w ill remain so in
life, no matter what may be the exact w ording of the questions.
U n til you are able to recognize the supremacy o f these two de
mands on the part of others, you w ill never realize the steps that are
necessary to break down their power. People automatically study
what you say, ask themselves automatically why you say it, or what
is the use of it, and then wonder how m uch o f it is true. They thus
become resistant w ithout fixed purpose, unless they are in rapport
w ith you.
There seems to be 110 absolutely neutral ground.
1. A ll persons are automatically resistant.
2. Or are purposely resistant.
3. Or are in rapport.
A person who is in rapport is always controlled. T o bring about
this condition where it does not already exist, is the work o f either
hypnotism , by m anipulation, hypnotism in wakefulness w ithout ma
nipulation, or magnetism.
It is this m iddle, or second, method that is claim ing our attention
now. Some persons become in rapport, or sympathetic harmony, on
meeting. Tw o gentlemen often find themselves perfectly agreeable
at the very first word, and neither has a selfish or ulterior motive.
T o presume upon such mutual likin g by an attempt to becom e a
master, either o f the other would probably set up resistance, and
the feeling of harmony would be dissipated before control was se
cured. T w o persons o f opposite sexes often meet and are in this
sympathetic harmony at the very start o f their acquaintance. In
order to obtain control o f it is necessary that one shall deal with the
other so carefully that there is no m ental resistance.
I t is only a stupid man who proposes and is rejected. T h e evidence
o f rapport is so plain that it requires 110 skill to read it. A woman
who is distant in her treatment o f the man who is w ooing her, is not
suited to become his wife. I f both love each other in fu ll sincerity,
there is the natural course o f events; the touch of hands, the rest
ing voluntarily o f the smaller hand in the larger, the arm at the
waist, the lips in exchange o f the deeper fe e lin g ; and that is the
m ost conclusive o f answers. I f she does n ot know whether she loves
him or not, the first step should tell the story ; withdraw the hand.
I f she is partly o f the opinion that she w ill become his wife, and yet
has her doubts on the subject, though not strong in resistance, she
should make that fact clear before giving herself to his caresses, how
ever slight they may be. I f she is shallow, then he would capture
her to his lik in g and pass on to some new flirtation.
The novelty at first o f the close attentions o f a man, takes away
the ordinary resistance. I f she has a fixed dislike fo r him , she will
become purposely resistant. Some wom en outgrow such a start in
friendship with a m a n ; but it takes years, and she is then generally
a left-over who w ill make the best marriage available. There are
many wom en who have turned down good offers o f m arriage; then,
having approached the age o f thirty, or passed it, have looked over
the men who were early proposers, and taken the one that seemed most
available; generally a widower. Such cases are frequent. A n d most
of these women settle down in the belief that they love their husbands,
and are happy. They make excellent wives as a r u le ; but it seems
that marriage is more o f a business than a love affair.
The reason why they rejected their first proposals is because they
were resistant. They thought behind the friendship, and asked
themselves m entally the questions, H ow m uch is he w orth? Can he
support a w ife ? Can I hold him at a distance while m aking a bid fo r
some one higher u p in the financial scale, or one who is better look
ing, or one who has a brighter future ? T hey were n ot in rapport.
A woman o f great beauty quickly stops the ordinary type o f man
from double thinking. H e has but one idea, and that is to w in her
favor. H e ceases to be resistant. Such a wom an is able to make a
lon g line o f conquests, and even to gather in financial assistance if
she can preserve the fascination. I t often happens that a m an is
awakened to double thinking and becomes resistant when there is an
attempt to make use o f beauty fo r gain, even w ith no im m oral ends
in view.
A case in p oin t is that o f a club o f wealthy bachelors who had
resolved never to marry, but who were made the butt o f a practical
joke. A n actress, young in her profession, but o f the m ost delicious
ways, was engaged under contract to make herself frien d ly w ith this
chib under a professional appearance in one o f the chib’s entertain
ments. A nother actress, about fifteen years older, but very demure
WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM
and gentle in her ways, appeared as tlie mother and chaperon of

the fair maiden, and never left her presence. T hey were cautioned
to carry on the plans so as to excite the greatest adm iration fo r their
modesty. Both were married, and their husbands knew o f the joke.
This you ng wom an was as beautiful as a young wom an could be.
The instant the eyes rested on her, all thoughts flew to the fou r
winds o f the sky. She was gracious, demure, slightly alert, and fu ll
o f a bright interest in all around her. The bachelors were com pletely
swayed out of their senses fo r a while. N ow came her finesse, fo r
which she was employed and paid a large sum. S till in the pres
ence o f her chaperon she showed special interest in each o f the men
who came to speak with her in the social chat which follow ed. They
eame singly and in groups, and on each she beamed in such a
way as to make him say to him self, “ I am the one.” Some asked
who she was, directing their inquiries to the mem ber who had been
put in the secret; and he replied that she was a very you ng miss,
not over seventeen, who had been to school and ju st graduated, wealthy
in her own right, an orphan, and one totally unfam iliar with the
world. T he chaperon, her mother to all intents and purposes, re
ferred inadvertently to her wealth and stan din g; and this supposed
m other smiled and beamed on all the men in turn, and made each
think he was the one who would be favored.
It is said to be a fact that every one of these bachelors would have
proposed had the maiden not disappeared into total oblivion after that
event. Thus many men, some married and some single, are carried
away by beauty. W e recall a m eeting in a com m ittee room where
all the heaviest problems under grave consideration were sent out o f
m ind by the appearance o f a very sweet and pretty miss o f eighteen.
N ot one o f the men could give a coherent statement o f what had been
said in the session before she entered.
It is said of a lawyer that he employed his daughter as his stenog
rapher because she was fon d of the legal atmosphere. She was very
beautiful and, during the trials in court when she was m erely a vis
itor, she appeared dressed in the height o f fashion and taste, sitting
behind him , and unknow n to the ju ry. In one case the title o f a
home was in dispute, and the lawyer on the other side continually re
ferred to an old man, his client, as having all his life savings involved
in the issue. T his attorney, whose daughter was a spectator at the
trial, saw that sympathy was being used in the effort to win, so
he suddenly, w ithout the slightest prem editation in that part o f his
argument where he was seeking to undo the pressure brought to

bear on the ju ry, turned to the beautiful maiden, who dropped her
head in h alf fear as she saw the act, and said : “ Gentlemen, I w ill
not appeal to your sympathies. T he facts are before you, and they
alone must sway your m ind. I f I had a poor case with no hope o f
w inning your verdict, I would tell you o f the suffering that will
come to this young girl if you take her home from her. B ut I disdain
to make such a suggestion.” F rom that tim e to the end o f the appeal,
the men in the box had m any eyes fo r the girl, and she was visibly
pleased at the attention, the joke lightin g up her face until it beamed
on the twelve men. W hen they went out and returned, one of the
jurors gave a very sly wink at the miss, and this told that beauty
had won once more. Another o f the jurors, after the court had ad
journed fo r the term, said that he “ could not see that g irl thrown out
into the cold world.”
Thus the psychic principle tells us that some specific atttraction
either in thought, or person, or object, w ill overcome resistance and
com pel the m ind to w ork in one thought o n ly ; and that thought is
the fixed attention to the single idea. The idea, not being the one that
is furnished by the m ind itself, but by some outer influence or some
other m ind, absorbs the fu ll powers o f thought, and here is the state
of wakeful hypnotism . There are two steps in this process:
1. The absorption of the m ind o f another person.
2. T he fillin g o f that m ind by some suggestion strong enough to
make resistance impossible.
These two steps assume that the magnetism is not pow erful enough
to directly w in the w ill of the other party. T he difference between
m agnetism and hypnotism is t h is :
1. M agnetism wins by its com pelling power which uplifts the per
son w on and draws him to the plane o f influence of the winner. It
is a charm, an inspiration, a noble attraction.
2. H ypnotism stills and depresses and then substitutes suggestion
fo r the w ill o f the subject. I t seems to make a hole in the m in d o f
the other party. I t is opposite to magnetism. T he latter is a fair
fight fo r supremacy carried on in an open field, with the two parties
m oving onward and upward together. H ypnotism is dark and empty
except as the suggestion of the controller becomes the will of the
controlled.
N ever forget that hypnotism and magnetism are exactly opposite
each oth er; both in m ethod and in fairness. M agnetism never re
WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM
sort to tricks or deception. H ypnotism cannot exist w ithout some

fo rm o f trickery and deception.
W e have shown a few o f the ways in which the m ind or attention o f
another person m ay be absorbed. Suggestion is the main theme of
this entire volume, and what it means and is, can be seen by reading
alm ost any of the cycles.
T o one skilled in absorbing the m inds o f listeners in a ll the pro
fessions and in all departments of life , there are certain stock ideas
that are in use. These m ay be seen by attending court trials where
great lawyers, or advocates, are at work over juries. Some o f these
attorneys w in nine cases out o f ten. W e looked up the record of a
certain lawyer and fou n d that in the 200 eases he had tried before
juries in the higher courts, he had won 1 9 2 ; a remarkable showing.
H e actually swayed jurym en by wakeful hypnotism , and when once
his methods were understood, they were merely a stock in trade. We
called the attention o f the judge to this fa c t ; and, at his request, we
spent an evening of several hours goin g over the methods, having
some o f the stenographic reports of remarks and speeches to refer
to in the conversation. The judge was amazed. In the next trial at
which this lawyer appeared, the judge kept pace with his methods and
made it im possible for them to succeed. Three years afterwards the
same judge told us that he had successfully interfered w ith the subtlo
arts of a num ber o f lawyers who had great power over the ju r y ; and
he said, “ I am satisfied that wakeful hypnotism is used.”
One has only to follow the courts in any part o f the land to find
this fa ct verified.
Congregations in church are often swayed in this way. T hey do
not seem to be under direct hypnotic control as has been charged
in the cases o f several o f the m ost fam ous clergym en o f A m erica, but
they are in the power of wakeful hypnotism. One preacher told us
after a sermon, “ I can tell when I am to draw a large contribution
from the people. I have the collection taken after the sermon on
this account. I generally succeed in con trollin g them, and when
I have them well in hand, I feel it m ost distinctly in the pulpit.
There is the stillness, the leaning forw ard o f m y listeners, the rapt
attention, the open m outh, and the fixed gaze. Then, brin gin g m y
address quickly to a close, the collection is taken and is large.” On
the other hand, a personal friend in the congregation, when asked
if he realized this power, s a id : “ I have often felt that our m inister
held us in his co n tro l; sometimes fixedly. Then the church seems
dark to me, m y m ind is in a black hole, and I think only what he

thinks. B ut I am free to say that I w ould n ot have observed m y
condition had I not been w atchful o f m y se lf; and, in m ost o f this
influence, I lose m y recollection o f what is g oin g on w ithin m e.”
This is a com m on experience.
A m an o f standing wrote us that there was a preacher in a great
city who actually had his hearers in a hypnotic condition. W e went
on to the church and was present during two sermons. T he clergy
man had startling facts that were of all-absorbing interest and that
com pletely swamped the minds of his audience. H e had evidently
been hunting up these facts, and knew the kind that w ould overwhelm
the attention o f those who listened. A n d he succeeded. W e had all
we could do to keep up resistance by the m ethod o f double-thinking.
W e continually said to ourselves: This m inister has hunted far and
wide for his gigantic facts. H e has led up to them in a masterly
way in the arrangement of his ideas, and he knows he is using them
to get hold o f the m inds o f others. H e knows it every minute. H e
realizes how fa r he is succeeding. H e can measure his progress in
this form o f wakeful hypnotism . Is he honest to do so?
These were our secondary thoughts while listening to the m ain ideas
of his sermons. A s lon g as we could keep u p this double-thinking,
we were safe.
W e have in the past fifteen years listened to no less than eight
preachers who hold their congregations by the same influence, wak
in g hypnotism . There are others, probably a hundred or more in
this country, who have the same power. T he test is in the a ttim ies
and faces o f the listeners. A photograph would disclose the fa ct
whether or not there is this control.
The physicians o f the highest grades of practice, as far as success
is concerned, make use of the same power, and deem it necessary to
do so fo r the good o f their patients.
Great generals send their soldiers to battle and victory under the
spell o f some all-powerful idea, which is infused into the officers and
sometimes directly in the minds o f the m en themselves by the leader.
A t the turning point o f the conflict a new idea is made to seize the
men, and they rally as i f by magic.
B ut it is in the quieter walks o f life that this power is most
employed, and its rules are now well fixed. These w ill be stated here.
They are based on the summary of what has been taught in this and.
the preceding cycle, and other essentials added to com plete th e m :
[
WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM
RULES OF PROCEDURE I N W A K E F U L H Y P N O T IS M .
B u l e O n e :— The subject has no way o f detecting the effort to

use wakeful hypnotism, unless he is fam iliar w ith its process; and
this state o f m ind must be maintained.
B ule T w o :— I f he is in single-thinking, the attention m ay be
distracted by simple efforts; but if in double-thinking, or if he
passes from single to double-thinking during the effort, it w ill re
quire a stronger attempt to dislodge his thoughts, and this is done
by the skilful in jection o f an idea o f all-absorbing interest, one
capable o f throw ing him off his attention and em ptying his m ind
o f his own thoughts. The attempt to distract his own thoughts and
to absorb his attention, must be w holly concealed by the reasonable
ness o f the change of id ea s; and the new attention m ust be based
on a new idea having a degree of strength corresponding to the
necessities o f the case.
B ule T hree :— As the purpose o f the subjected idea is only to
absorb the attention, it must be follow ed by the suggestions required
to com m and the w ill power o f the subject. T he strong idea, there
fore, is m erely the stepping stone to the real process.
B u l e P o u r :— A s there is generally a period of tim e available fo r
the effort, as in conversation or address, the voice o f the speaker
should be gradually shifted fro m the prevailing to the con trollin g
ton es; and this shift should occur between the in jection o f the strong
idea and the beginning o f the suggestion.
A ll the rules except the last one have been in use from the be
gin n in g o f time, and being a phase o f human nature, have not been
understood. B ut the users o f them have had the purpose, cunning
or otherwise, to control the subjects. The fou rth rule adds a scien
tific value to what is clearly a natural and oft-used process. This
w ill necessitate a complete course o f training in the development of
the C ontrolling V oice, which is sometimes called the hypnotic tone,
but in fa ct is the voice o f the Other M ind. A s the training should
be thorough and absolutely complete, the whole o f the next cycle
w ill be devoted to it.
A s an example o f one use that m ay be made o f this m ethod, we
w ill take only a typical case as a means o f illustrating the process.
The subject, we w ill say, is addicted to the use o f cigarettes, and
is n ot easily influenced to give up the habit. H e w ill n ot listen to
advice. W hen he is approached on the subject, he sets his m ind
against all suggestion. H e naturally takes to double-thinking, never

having been taught it. A ll persons do this kind o f thinking if they
think there is some motive in the other party. This young man,
when talked to on the habit, w ould think to him self that the speaker
was trying to p u ll the wool over his eyes and to preach to him , all
the while listening respectfully. This is double-thinking and it re
sists all attempts to secure control.
The effort must first be made to empty his m ind of this double
action. The ideas must be shifted by the in jection of something that
w ill be all-absorbing to him . I f the fea rfu l consequences of the
habit are told, he w ill do still m ore double-thinking, as the scheme is
too thin. B ut if he is known to have some great am bition, or some
desire, or would be entranced by some prospect, as that of a trip to
Europe with expenses paid, and a trifling salary added, then some
stranger, employed fo r the purpose, m ight come upon him apparently
by accident and ask him fo r the names o f some young m en about
his age, who would like such an opportunity. This would com
pletely absorb the attention. A ll resistance w ould fly. T he m ind
w ould think only of the one idea. Then the voice, shifting gradually
to the con trollin g tones, would be able to carry the suggestions of
wakeful hypnotism , in which a statement like the follow in g w ould be
com pletely v eile d :
“ I w ill be back here in about a month. I presume that you can
not g o on this t r i p ; but you may hear o f a young man who would
like it. P ick out some one fo r me, a you ng m an of good habits.
W e do not want one that swears, or drinks, or gambles, or is addicted
to the cigarette habit, as that takes away the m ind and the vitality
of the fellow . W e want a m anly young man, such as you seem to
be.” E tc.
This is m erely a case stated to show the steps of the process; but
the experiments that have actually been made in this line o f control
have brought the results that are desired. It can be used with one
person, w ith two, or with a group, as well as with a large number.
There is no lim it to the latter, as eight thousand people have fallen
under its influence at one meeting.
M>ny ingenious collections o f strong ideas have been made, each
suited to special con d ition s; and it is amazing how many may be
form ulated.
In order to make the study of wakeful hypnotism a complete course,
the next cycle w ill be joined to this and the preceding cycle.
TWENTY-FOURTH CYCLE
THE CONTROLLING VOICE
O M E T O N E S there are that sway

The mind as with a rod
So deep and fu ll they seem
A n d wondrous in their sound',
Charged with assertiveness
Bespeaking royal power.
E A L L the wonders o f the age o f discovery, that which

will stand fo r centuries as the most astonishing is the
production o f the C ontrolling V oice. I t has, in part
usage, been employed in hypnotism , but by mere
ch ance; and, where it has been recognized, it has been
hypnotic voice. Even then it has not been a scientific
acquisition, for the users of it have n ot had a clear idea o f what it
was, how it was produced, or its connection with the psychic realm.
B efore this cycle ends it w ill be seen that it is capable o f being cu lti
vated or created by every person, and that it holds a direct relation
ship with the Other M ind.
W hen these two great facts became known, steps at once were taken
to put it to every kind of p roof and te s t; and, the more the investiga
tion was developed, the greater were the results.
There is now not the slightest doubt that the C ontrolling V oice is
the voice o f the Other M ind. As its basis is made up o f the tones
employed at haphazard by hypnotists o f the greatest skill, and also
involves the tones that have been called the soul’ s voice by expert
trainers o f vocal culture, it is seen at the beginning that it is a natural
attribute.
There are two steps in this work o f developm ent:
1. T he voice must be created.
2. T he voice must be applied.
It is not possible to describe it except by the method that is em
ployed in creating it. A ll the way along this process the character
W' OPERATIONS OF TIIE OTEER MIND
of the tones w ill be gradually made fam iliar u ntil every one is
able to recognize what it is.
T his includes a complete course o f training fo r the purpose o f de
veloping the C ontrolling V o ic e ; as set forth in this cycle.
I t is called con trollin g because it actually does influence the per
sons who hear it. It influences them even when wakeful hypnotism
is not u sed ; but its mission is to accompany that process, and to begin
to operate when the strong idea has been injected, and to be con
tinued up to the time when suggestion becomes a supreme possibility.
L et these steps be fixed in the m ind, as laid down in the two pre
ceding cycles:
W A K E F U L H Y P N O T IS M
m ay be summed up as consisting o f the follow in g steps:

1. T he in jection o f the strong idea to absorb attention.
2. The gradual shifting o f the voice from the prevailing tones.
3. T he absolute sway o f the m ind by the controlling voice.
4. The use o f suggestion fo r any purpose whatever.
It w ill be seen then that wakeful hypnotism has three powers at
w ork :
1. The strong idea.
2. T he voice from the Other M ind.
3. The influence o f suggestion.
These occur in their order. H aving a clear knowledge o f the uses
to be made o f this created voice, the method o f developing it will
now be started.
The first step is mechanical.
I t is the building o f a round tone. T his is an old and fam iliar
exercise in vocal culture. In order to understand what is to be done,
im agine that voice is a rope, starting at the cords in the throat, and
projectin g itself out in the air through the round position o f the
lips.
F i r s t R e q u i r e m e n t :-—M ake the voice round.
Pronounce the words home and gold. Take them as key words o f
this step. Say them gently, and in as pure a tone as you can pro
duce.
Then repeat them again and again, each tim e thinking o f the letter
0 in each word. P u t the m ind on the 0 . Then repeat the words
many times more, still thinking only o f the letter 0 , and giving
length to the words, until they are each five seconds long.
TEE CONTROLLING VOICE
S econ d R e q u ir e m e n t :— B egin cumulative prolongation o f the

two words, hom e and gold. T his is done by taking a fu ll breath
into the lu n g s; then let it out without loss o f air in the sounding of
these two words, each five seconds; then let out all the breath ; take
in a new breath, and prolong each word seven seconds; then let out
the breath, and take in a new breath, and prolong the w ord home
ten seconds. L et out the breath, then inhale and prolon g the word
gold ten seconds. L et out the breath and take in a new breath ; then
prolon g the word home twelve seconds. L et out the breath, take
in a new breath, and prolong the word gold twelve seconds. P roceed
slowly.
T his is to be continued until you are able to prolon g each word
forty seconds. I t w ill take some tim e to learn to do th is; but the
tone o f the voice has been carried to ninety seconds in one breath, al
though we know of but one person who has ever done this. It was
accomplished regularly by P rof. W illiam Guilmette o f Boston. A m ong
his pupils were such great actors as E dw in Booth, Lawrence Barrett
and others o f high ran k ; as well as clergym en afterwards fam ous,
and some o f the greatest Am erican singers of the last generation.
The steps m ust be cumulative. I f you attempt to go at once to the
greatest possible length o f prolongation, you m ight as well give up
the practice. B y cumulative is meant that each tim e you start to
practice, you must go five seconds; then seven seconds; then ten sec
on d s; then twelve secon ds; then fifteen seconds; then seventeen sec
o n d s; then twenty seconds; then twenty-two seconds; then twenty-
five seconds; then twenty-seven seconds; then thirty seconds; then
thirty-tw o seconds; then thirty-five seconds; then thirty-seven sec
on d s; then forty seconds.
The first day you w ill find that you can go to five or perhaps seven
seconds. T h e next day, you must start all over again, and you may
be able to reach ten seconds. I f you start after you have reached the
lim it on the same day, begin all over. Never try to go to the point
where you le ft off the day before, n or where you left off the same
day, i f it was your lim it. I f you do not strictly follow the cumula
tive order there w ill not be m uch gained by the practice.
It is not loss o f time.
I t builds up a rich and beautiful voice that w ill be o f great value
to you for any purpose, whether singing, conversation, or address. It
is the greatest single line o f practice known in voice development.
T his you w ill soon ascertain, and your im provem ent o f voice w ill be
noticed by all your friends.
I t w ill also build up your lungs, as well as your general vitality.
T h ir d R e q u i r e m e n t :— W hen you are able to prolong the words
Lome and gold, each forty seconds in one breath, which ought not to
take m ore than one month unless your lungs are very weak, then you
are to drive all the aspiration out o f the tones. A spiration is not
w hisper; but it is a m ixture o f whisper with voice.
A pure voice has no whisper in it.
A pure whisper has no voice in it.
Aspirated tones are made o f whisper and voice m ix e d ; and there
are m any degrees o f these, depending on the proportion o f voice in
the whisper. The follow in g is the scale o f progression in securing a
pure to n e :
1. W hisper the words home and gold.
2. Repeat them with the least amount of voice in th em ; m ost all
whisper.
3. Repeat them with about one-fourth part o f voice in th e m ; and
the other three-fourths whisper.
4. Repeat them half-and-half.
5. Repeat them with three-fourths voice in th em ; and one-fourth
whisper.
6. Repeat them with the least b it o f whisper in them. In this
step the voice w ill seem pure.
7. JSTow be sure that A L L the whisper has been taken out.
T he last is very difficult. I t cannot be accomplished u ntil you have
learned to prolon g the words each forty seconds by the cumulative
method. I t w ill also be noted that the exercise to drive ou t the as
piration from the voice is progressive in the same cumulative lin e ;
beginning at the start on each new attempt at the practice.
T h e departure o f the aspirate timbre fro m the speaking and singing
voice w ill be a pleasing accomplishment, as it w ill save your throat
from being rasped by the unvibrated passage o f air, and w ill lend a
charm and purity to your tones.
Three requirements have thus far been given, all o f which are o f
immense value to the personality and health. T hey should be culti
vated by every person, whether engaged in psychic "studies or not.
F o u r t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— P u t the m ind on the idea o f m aking the
back o f the m outh and throat ro u n d ; and constantly increasing the
diameter or size of the cavity at that place. D o this at all times,
not only in repeating the words given, but in conversation. The

throat and back o f the m outh are called the cavern o f the voice. T he
larger this cavern is made, the sooner the results sought w ill be
attained.
F i f t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— Relax the cavern, or back of the mouth
and throat. D o n ot make it fixed. I t can be enlarged and held in a
large position by the act o f the w ill after the habit has been form ed
by repeated practice. Every great singer the world has produced has
been com pelled to learn this enlarged throat position and its com plete
relaxation. It is the old exercise of devitalization applied to the
throat. In this connection re-read the Eleventh Cycle, and then the
T w elfth and Fifteenth Cycle.
S ix t h R e q u ir e m e n t :— Learn to pronounce the two words, home
and gold, with the tone o f distant, quiet thunder. T his w ill send
forth a cavernous and resonant voice. T his should not be attempted
until all the requirements thus far given have been m et by constant
practice. Take the tim e when you can. D o n ot hurry. D o not seek
conclusions. B u t earn your way step by step exactly as directed.
A fter you have satisfied yourself that you can prolong the words in
a fu ll im itation o f distant thunder, which is a smooth, pure, almost
still rumble of the v o ice ; then change the words t o :
T oll, Roland, t o l l !
These are liquids, and are easily taken up by the voice.
Give them in the solemn tollin g tones o f distant bells o f great size.
S e v e n t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— This has to do with three pitches o f
the musical scale. There are three divisions, which fo r convenience
w ill be ca lled :
H igh pitch, or register.
M iddle pitch, o r register.
L ow pitch, or register.
I f you w ill go to the piano and try you r voice to ascertain what is
the highest note that you can sing or intone easily, and the lowest
a lso ; then count the notes, whole and half, and divide them by three,
or in three equal parts, you w ill have your three registers. Y o u
cannot speak any higher than you can sin g ; nor any lower. A ny
note that you can sing in, you can speak in, if you cultivate the
habit.
Have made the three registers, then practice the lin e :
“ T oll, Roland, t o ll!” in each o f the three registers, no matter
what exact notes they m ay strike on. D o not sing them or chant
them, but give them a natural speaking voice except that it is in

im itation o f distant, large, solemn bells, tolling.
Master them in the higher third o f your voice.
Then master them in the m iddle third o f your voice.
Then master them in the lower third o f your voice.
R e q u i r e m e n t :— Take the last requirement and carry
E ig h t h
the tones in all degrees of force. D o not allow any aspiration to come
in the voice when you attempt the m ild degrees; nor any departure
from the solemn, dark tones, when you attempt the strong degrees.
The combinations are as fo llo w s :
1. The m ild degree o f force in the upper register.
2. The m iddle degree o f force in the upper register.
3. The strong degree of force in the upper register.
4. The m ild degree o f force in the m iddle register.
5. T he m iddle degree o f force in the m iddle register.
6. The strong degree o f force in the m iddle register.
7. The m ild degree o f force in the lower register.
8. T he m iddle degree o f force in the lower register.
9. The strong degree o f force in the lower register.
This practice w ill require work, so will anything else that is worth
having. B ut the work w ill develop the voice along the lines em
ployed by the greatest teachers o f singing or speaking in the world
to-day. There is nothing b etter; nothing so good in such culture as
the foregoin g exercises. The fa ct that the voice is made dark by the
process is to the great advantage o f the tones fo r all purposes; as
it is always easy to brighten the tones. They are often harsh and
rasping, especially i f they have any aspiration in them.
Several names have been given fo r this timbre. B y German ex
perts it has been called the dark voice. B y Italian masters o f the
voice, than whom none greater have lived, it is called the soul tones.
By hypnotists o f the highest rank in scientific research, it has been
called the hypnotic voice. B y others who have studied it in its
wonderful effects on audiences, it has been called the controlling
voice. The fa ct is, however, as w ill be shown in this cycle, it is the
V oice from the Other M ind. Quick p roof is attainable.
N i n t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— T ransfer all the foregoin g accom plish
ments as taught in the requirements, to the words and sentences that
you use generally; that is, to your vocabulary o f spoken words. The
purpose o f this rule is to make all words easy and natural in their
utterance in the controlling voice. W hile the two words, home and
gold, are tlie richest and most beautiful in the language fo r the
em ploym ent of the voice in the advancement o f culture o f any kind,
they are not the words m ost used in life. In shifting into a general
vocabulary, it is best to first take a list of words having the lon g o
sound in them. A few such words are old, cold, fold , roll, toll, soul,
bold, roam , tome, foam , loaf, boast, coast, fore, tore, more, pore, lore,
and a vast number o f others. Y o u can construct a list o f your own,
and it w ill be a good exercise fo r you.
The next list should have words with the ah sound in them. A
few such words a r e : Far, tar, dart, heart, father, hard, card, market,
part, and others. Y o u can construct this also, and b rin g in scores o f
others.
The next list should contain the mystery sound o f short o, which
is too often caught by the ear as the ah sound. T he words are like
the fo llo w in g : H ot, stop, fall, all, call, awe, faw n, raw, jo b , doll,
dog, and the like. Many persons make the mistake o f pronouncing
dog as if it were d a h g ; stop as if it were stahp, and the like. Many
school teachers lack good training in this defect. O f course there
is a difference between awe and for, call and c o t; but, in the effort
to get away from the longer form , the teacher has often made cot
sound like cart, with the r o u t; and fo r sound exactly like far. There
are thousands o f teachers, and m illions o f others who cannot catch
with the ear the difference between fa r and fo r. Fawn, fo r and fop
all have the same vowel so u n d ; but what is called the vanish into an
oo sound makes faw n seem deeper and longer in effect. The initial
sound o f the vowel is exactly the same. Dictionaries do not make this
difference clear; and the result is a general m ixing o f the people
between the ah and the short o sounds. Vanishes in the Am erican
language are always misleading. L o n g oh vanishes in oo. L on g
a, as in fay, vanishes in ee. L on g i does the same, as in my. Ore
vanishes in uh. A n d so on. The brogue o f Ireland can be quickly
analyzed as a series o f vanishes. So are many dialects.
These vanishes are wonderful agencies o f variation.
In speech, whether conversation or address, the m ost careful enun
ciation is necessary in order to make the ideas strike home readily;
fo r the m an or wom an who has the controlling power and lacks the
agency of clear speaking, w ill be like the carpenter whose skill is
great but whose tools are very deficient. In conversation m any o f
the valuable syllables are lost by bad enunciation. The person who
has an accurate coinage o f words will start with a great advantage;
and the person who combines with this accuracy the beautiful tones
of the Other M ind, will add a double advantage.
In other words, you cannot secure the confidence and acquiescence
o f other persons if your pronunciation is bad, your enunciation
sloppy, or your voice harsh and rasping, even in its m ild tones. This
is sense on its face and needs no advocacy.
T e n t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— Enter upon a series of private conversa
tions with im aginary persons in which you use arguments, persuasion,
and suggestion, all in this controlling voice. A ll successful extem
pore speakers have built up their powers by these im aginary talks.
A ll the great orators o f the w orld have done their practicin g in private
to im aginary audiences; w'hile the lesser orators have done their
p racticin g before actual audiences and have bored them accordingly.
T his is a mistake, for development is very slow that way. Y o u can
get more than a thousand opportunities in private with im aginary
listeners, fo r every one you secure in public. There is no branch o f
development so rapid and effective as this. I t has only to be tried to
be proved.
Every requirement must be taken in its turn, and com pletely mas
tered before the next is undertaken. This w ill require tim e, but
life is time, and it matters not how lon g one works if progress is
com ing every day. That is the test.
E l e v e n t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— Make use of the comparative voices
in conversation. This may be begun in im aginary conversation, as
under the tenth requirem ent; then it can be transferred to actual
persons with whom you speak. In conversation there are two voices
to be used:
1. The colloquial voice.
2. The controlling voice.
The colloquial is that voice which you use naturally, and by wdiich
you are recognized. It is made up of m ixed timbres, having some
defects, and some peculiarities. Even the telephone carries these
qualities to your acquaintances, and your particular voice m ay be
recognized out o f a large number. This is one o f the mysteries o f
that instrument that has never yet been satisfactorily explained.
Y o u should employ the colloquial voice at all times when not seek
in g control o f the thoughts of any other person.
W hen you wish to hold an easy control where there is rapport
between you and another, you m ay use a part mixture o f the con
trolling voice.
gold, are the richest and most beautiful in the language fo r the
em ploym ent of the voice in the advancement o f culture o f any kind,
they are not the words m ost used in life. In shifting into a general
vocabulary, it is best to first take a list of words having the lon g o
sound in them. A few such words are old, cold, fold , roll, toll, soul,
bold, roam, tome, foam , loaf, boast, coast, fore, tore, more, pore, lore,
and a vast number o f others. Y o u can construct a list of your own,
and it w ill be a good exercise fo r you.
The next list should have words with the ah sound in them. A
few such words a r e : Tar, tar, dart, heart, father, hard, card, market,
part, and others. Y o u can construct this also, and b rin g in scores o f
others.
The next list should contain the mystery sound o f short o, which
is too often caught by the ear as the ah sound. T he words are like
the follow in g : H ot, stop, fall, all, call, awe, faw n, raw, job , doll,
dog, and the like. M any persons make the mistake o f pronouncing
dog as if it were d a h g ; stop as if it were stahp, and the like. Many
school teachers lack good training in this defect. O f course there
is a difference between awe and for, call and c o t; but, in the effort
to get away from the longer form , the teacher has often made cot
sound like cart, with the r o u t; and fo r sound exactly like far. There
are thousands o f teachers, and m illions o f others who cannot catch
with the ear the difference between fa r and for. Fawn, fo r and fop
all have the same vowel so u n d ; but what is called the vanish into an
oo sound makes faw n seem deeper and longer in effect. The initial
sound o f the vowel is exactly the same. Dictionaries do n ot make this
difference clear; and the result is a general m ixin g o f the people
between the ah and the short o sounds. A7anishes in the Am erican
language are always misleading. L o n g oh vanishes in oo. L on g
a, as in fay, vanishes in ee. L on g i does the same, as in my. Ore
vanishes in uh. A n d so on. The brogue of Ireland can bequickly
analyzed as a series o f vanishes. So are m any dialects.
These vanishes are wonderful agencies o f variation.
In speech, whether conversation or address, the m ost careful enun
ciation is necessary in order to make the ideas strike home readily;
fo r the m an or wom an who has the controlling power and lacks the
agency of clear speaking, w ill be like the carpenter whose skill is
great but whose tools are very deficient. In conversation many of
the valuable syllables are lost by bad enunciation. The person who
has an accurate coinage o f words w ill start with a great advantage;
and the person who combines with this accuracy the beautiful tones
of the Other M ind, will add a double advantage.
In other words, you cannot secure the confidence and acquiescence
o f other persons if your pronunciation is bad, your enunciation
sloppy, or your voice harsh and rasping, even in its m ild tones. This
is sense on its face and needs no advocacy.
T e n t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— Enter upon a series of private conversa
tions with im aginary persons in which you use arguments, persuasion,
and suggestion, all in this controlling voice. A ll successful extem
pore speakers have built up their powers by these im aginary talks.
A ll the great orators o f the w'orld have done their practicin g in private
to im aginary audiences; while the lesser orators have done their
practicin g before actual audiences and have bored them accordingly.
This is a mistake, fo r development is very slow that way. Y o u can
get more than a thousand opportunities in private with im aginary
listeners, fo r every one you secure in public. There is no branch o f
development so rapid and effective as this. I t has only to be tried to
be proved.
Every requirement must be taken in its turn, and com pletely mas
tered before the next is undertaken. This w ill require time, but
life is time, and it matters not how lon g one works if progress is
com ing every day. That is the test.
E l e v e n t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— Make use of the comparative voices
in conversation. This may be begun in im aginary conversation, as
under the tenth requirem ent; then it can be transferred to actual
persons with whom you speak. In conversation there are tw o voices
to be used:
1. The colloquial voice.
2. The controlling voice.
The colloquial is that voice which you use naturally, and by which
you are recognized. I t is made up o f m ixed timbres, having some
defects, and some peculiarities. Even the telephone carries these
qualities to your acquaintances, and your particular voice may be
recognized out o f a large number. This is one o f the mysteries o f
that instrument that has never yet been satisfactorily explained.
Y o u should employ the colloquial voice at all times when not seek
in g control o f the thoughts of any other person.
W hen you wish to hold an easy control where there is rapport
between you and another, you m ay use a part m ixture o f the con
trolling voice.
I
TEE CONTROLLING VOICE I

In passing from that period when you have successfully injected
the strong idea, you m ust do so by gradations, not ju m p abruptly to
the controlling voice, as it w ill not seem natural.
This change im plies, as in the case, that there are m any degrees o f
m ixture in the v o ice ; one being close to the colloq u ia l; the next hav
in g slightly m ore o f the controlling tim b re ; the next having more
s till; and so on u ntil the entire voice is of the latter alone. In con
versation, as in public speaking, this transfer is easy and does not
attract attention. Y o u should know when you are speaking in one or
in the other. Y o u should have an autom atic consciousness of the
fact, and suit each to the conditions prevailing at all times. It
would n ot do to go about with the controlling voice, when other
circumstances did not concur with its use.
A fter you have mastered all of the requirements, each in turn
and in the regular order, then you are to make the follow in g ex
periments :
1. M erely fo r the purpose o f n otin g the effect o f this voice on any
of your ordinary acquaintances, use it in some easy transition from
the colloquial timbre, if the matter under discussion is worthy o f
the attention. Y o u may try it on one person i f you w ish ; but there
m ust always be a natural use of it. D o not trifle w ith it. L et the
theme be o f some im portance, and the tim e and place suited to such
u ses; then gradually shift into the degrees o f the controlling voice.
Y ou w ill becom e aware o f a strange influence pervading the atmos
phere, and this w ill be fe lt both by yourself and the person to whom
you are talking. It is not im agination, nor is it due to suggestion,
expectation or mere belief. I t is an absolute fa ct that cannot be
avoided.
2. Take any animal you have at h a n d ; a dog, cat, horse or other
pet. I t is not necessary that the animal knows you or your voice.
Step at once into the use o f this psychic timbre, which is known as
the controlling voice. The animal w ill instantly be all attention.
Obedience m ay be secured very easily in this way. W e recall a
horse that was always nervous when excited by any object it was pass
in g ; but that could be brought into speedy subjection by being talked
to in this psychic voice. W e have seen cats and dogs look up in the
utm ost amazement at the person who employed that timbre. These
facts show that the psychic voice is not lim ited to psychic conditions,
but that it controls all life that can be reached by the tones o f speech.
3. I f you are at a gathering o f people w hom you wish to Impress
with any idea o f im portance, shift to this tone. I f your voice is not
known it w ill n ot be necessary to begin with the colloquial timbre,
i f the theme is o f sufficient weight to require or adm it a serious
handling.
4. In business matters, try this voice, and note the difference it
w ill make in your dealings, and the respect that w ill be paid you.
5. A school teacher who had absolutely no control over her pupils,
made use o f this voice after passing through all the requirements.
She had been under training in voice culture and easily acquired the
psychic voice. One m orning on entering the school, she seemed
very serious, as she had seemed before, but to no effect. This m orn
in g she addressed the school in the psychic voice, and as lon g as she
spoke or taught, there was an air o f extreme seriousness and a feel
ing that some im portant thing had happened or was about to happen.
F rom that tim e on, she was always able to control the pupils.
There was an awe about the room that could not be understood. We
know o f a large number o f teachers who are studying this m eth od ;
and all are m aking progress in obtaining mastery over the scholars
to a degree never before deemed possible. One principal, a man who
has never been successful in his hold over the pupils, says in a le tte r:
“ I find that I have both the respect and the attention o f my school
now.”
6. I f you are a clergym an, note the follow in g experiment that
was recently made in this a rt: A preacher who was dull, although
learned, suddenly shifted into the psychic voice, after he had de
veloped it by study and practice. I t was one Sunday m orning when
he felt that his preaching was over the heads of his listeners. Many
seemed to have a cold, fo r they coughed all through his address.
A t length, desiring to know by actual experiment of the real value
o f the psychic voice, he shifted to it, as he changed his line o f
thoughts. Instantly every person in the church who had been cough
ing, stopped short. I t had the effect o f choking them off, as he has
since remarked. There was not one cough after that during the
service. B ut the attention was as suddenly changed from the wan
dering o f the minds o f those present, to the closest listening as
though not one word must be missed. A ll this was done in a second or
two. It was so sudden that the m inister could hardly believe it
himself. L et any m inister who wishes to make a trial o f his power,
acquire the process by faith fu l practice in all the work assigned in
this cycle, and first be sure of having developed the psychic voice
before m aking the experiment. Then let him , during some sermon,
when the subject or theme is changed, pass into the use o f the con
trollin g or psychic voice, and note the sudden effect on all those
present. W e have seen this done hundreds o f times, and know that
it is a decided control, not one that is im aginary.
7. W e tried the follow in g test fifty times over as m any different
classes, during a num ber of y ea rs: Some theme that was exceed
ingly dry and uninteresting was suddenly entered upon, but with
the psychic force. A stenographer took down every word. I t was
purposely planned that the material was to be too technical and dull
to be of any practical valu e; but the classes would be all attention.
N ot a word would be missed. N othing could have enticed them away
from the lecture hall. Y e t, had the same discussion been carried on
in the colloquial, or com m on voice, every pupil would have been
bored, and yawns w ould have prevailed from all parts o f the room.
One o f the pupils said, in explanation o f the affair, “ I t seemed then
as i f the air was heavy w ith im portance, and som ething aw ful was
portending.” A ll this in the use o f dry words on dull material for
a lecture.
8. A t a director’ s m eeting of a great corporation a p u pil of this
series o f studies who had mastered the psychic voice, which is an
other name for the controlling voice, finding the discussion very
aull and nothing o f im portance on hand, made what he term ed a
chance experiment. H e began to talk o f a trivial matter in the
psychic voice, and he talked and talked fo r an hour in a quiet
manner. N o one seemed to want him to sto p ; no one interrupted
h im ; and on he went. Notes had been made by a stenographer.
A fter a while a member entered who had been absent up to that
point, and asked what was goin g on. The notes were read to him .
“ T im e wasted, gentlem en,” was the reply. T hen all the others said
the same thing. The man who had been doing the talking was
asked what he was driving at. One director said, “ Y o u were so
profound that we thought you were saying something worth listening
to.”
This experiment, which was a wanton use o f the power, serves
to illustrate the all-reaching effects o f the psychic voice. I f it can
hold the attention o f m en whose every m inute is o f value in the busi
ness world, and can do this fo r no real purpose, what must be its
influence when wielded fo r some definite end with a fixed determina
tion to make it succeed is param ount in the m in d ?
'•Wm OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND
There is nothing that gives results so quickly as this voice. B ut

it must be acquired, step by step, by follow in g the requirements o f
this cycle. W hen secured it may be known by its peculiar depth,
and cavernous character, smoothness, and solemn rin gin g tones. It
moves as no other agency in life can move. I t is within the reach
o f all persons.
H aving made the foregoin g experiments, the next step is as fo l
lows :
T w elfth B e q u ik e m e n t :— This calls fo r the m onotone, which
is the key to the hypnotic voice. W e are not advocating the m ono
to n e ; but, as it is a part of the complete system o f training o f this
cycle, and as we wish to leave nothing om itted in this great system,
we are including that phase herein.
T he m onotone may be discovered by goin g to the piano and sing
in g a line all on one n o te ; and keep on singing it until you are tired
ou t or have gone to sleep. T his is the m onotone o f pitch. Then
transfer the voice from singing to speaking; then into the psychic
timbre, all on one note o f the musical scale. Those of the lower
register are the most effective in hypnotism.
There is also the monotone o f force, which means that the same
degree o f strength is em ployed right along in the voice. This should
be a quiet degree. Thus we have the follow in g com b in a tion :
1. A quiet degree o f force, evenly maintained.
2. One note of the lower register evenly maintained.
3. The psychic timbre, which is the same as the con trollin g voice.
These three w ill sometimes induce sleep o f the hypnotic character
w ithout m an ipu lation ; and the person using the com bination need not
be seen. The voice is enough. B u t the effect is not speedy in some
cases. M any operators hypnotize by the tones of the voice, and never
take the trouble to look at their patients in the first stages. V ery
susceptible persons are so influenced.
The effect o f m ixin g the m onotone w ith the psychic voice is to
make the subject drowsy, although very attentive and interested.
It is the opposite o f the defiant inattention in which the listener
yawns, squirms, looks at the clock or watch, and wishes he was some
where else. In such case there may be drowsiness, but it comes
from physical sources, and n ot because o f being drawn under the
hypnotic influence o f the speaker.
I f the desire is to w in the w ill and approval o f the listener, there
is no use in producing hypnotic drowsiness. M erely em ploy the
I
psychic voice is well-m aintained m odulation, which is a relief from

all m onotones:
1. The pitch is constantly changed.
2. The degrees o f force are constantly varied.
3. The psychic timbre, having once secured control, is relaxed
slightly to vary the steadiness o f its power.
T h i r t e e n t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— In proportion as the tendencies
to hypnotic sleep are avoided, the m onotones w ill be om itted or re
duced, and a new element w ill come into the timbre. This is the
realization o f the im portance o f the control, and a self-assurance
that you have the ability to hold mastery over another hum an being.
T his is n ot magnetism, but close to it. The next step would be
the introduction of the first steps in magnetism into the psychic
voice, and the whole effect is w onderfully altered. H ypnotism makes
use o f subterfuge to get control, and the psychic voice is then called
in, during the presence o f which there need be no deceit or subter
fuge. T he more you get in to the psychic realm, the less need you
w ill have o f the strategy that is a part o f hypnotism , unless there
is an ever-present willingness on the part o f the subject to be con
trolled. B ut we are dealing now with those who are n ot to be
con su lted ; with those who are to be mastered w ithout their own
knowledge, and who would resist i f they knew it.
F o u r t e e n t h R e q u i r e m e n t :— T his is the last. I t brings into
the m ind the greatest thought that you are able to suggest. As
the whole process is b ig with results the theme should rise to the
level o f the highest power. The thought that is b ig is n ot necessarily
filled with a great achievement, but it must grow in size until it fills
your m ind. I t must seem to absorb all your being. T he psychic
voice is so b ig that it has an all-em bracing cavernous nature, as it
is heard. L et the idea that you suggest likewise fill your mind.
It may be the removal o f some bad habit, or the encouragem ent that
will u p lift one who is depressed. A m an who was bent on taking
his own life, ow ing to his financial condition, was talked to fo r a
few minutes and became resolute to live and to work with a 'will
to retrieve his lost fortune. H e said, at the end o f the very few
words, “ Som ething in your voice seems to com e from another w orld.”
H e is livin g to-day and is in good mental powers, with a rapidly
im proving material condition. H e was saved by this psychic timbre,
the voice from the Other M ind.
I t is a serious w ork that confronts hum anity to-day.
.‘-'w -
I f the world is on the threshold o f the psychic age, let all men
and women be awake to the fact, or be awakened, and jo in in the better
influences that will sweep over all the globe.
In m any o f the large cities there are associations devoted to the
w ork of saving lives fro m self-destruction. H ere is the agency that
w ill drive the distracted m inds o f m ortals in to the higher channels
o f pu rpose; and away from the dregs o f the animal nature.
In the cure o f disease by psycho-therapeutics, this voice from the
Other M ind is fa r more effective than any other agency.
O f course when magnetism, which is the opposite o f hypnotism,
comes into the psychic voice, a very different story is told. The
power then becomes magnificent and w holly irresistible. B ut this
work is along psychic lines alone, and it is neither fair nor possible
to brin g in m agnetism ; fo r that power is as broad as life itself
and requires several great systems to make it clear. B eing the real
power behind intelligence, it is necessarily an all-em bracing agency
o f the forces underlying existence.
S U M M A R Y O F T H E R E Q U IR E M E N T S
1. T he round voice.
2. Cumulative prolongation o f key words.
3. R em oval o f aspiration.
4 . M aking the voice-cavern.
5. Relaxation o f the voice-cavem .
6. T he tone o f far distant thunder.
7. The three registers.
8. T he degrees o f force.
9. The natural vocabulary.
10. Practice with im aginary listeners.
11. The comparative use o f the two timbres.
IS. T he three monotones.
13. Developm ent of self-assurance.
14. The all-filling thought.
H ere is an education complete in its e lf; wholly and absolutely
entire from beginning to end. I t is an education that is worth
obtaining, and the only cost is effort. The results are equal to an
investment paying ten thousand per cent, dividends.
There are many uses to which it may be put.
T he possession o f the psychic voice is a g ift in itself, that is ever
ready to serve the owner. Its only opportunity to display a fau lt
is in the unskilful handling o f it. T o ju m p fro m the colloquial

timbre into the psychic w ould be useless, as it brings n o advantage;
and the attempt to em ploy it in this way would seem clumsy. Like
the diam ond, it does its best service when n ot made too conspicuous
on trivial occasions.
A ll form s o f suggestion m ay be made with it.
The child about to fa ll asleep at night is easily swayed by such
tones, and they should always carry weight to pleasing themes.
There is no p oin t in depressing the m ind o f the ch ild w ith undue
im p ortan ce; certainly not with gloom . Y o u n g people have been
held to a higher course o f development in their characters by this
voice. In the household it has its tim e and place, and there is no
parent who need ever lack the respect o f his fam ily when thus en
dowed.
In sleeping suggestion, when any person, young or adult, is in
slumber, the psychic voice carried in fine tones, has more power than
the colloquial tones. In fact, the tests show that the increase o f
effectiveness is very great. This shows that the voice has the way
o f reaching the Other M ind o f the person asleep. A t the present
tim e many im portant experiments are being carried on to give further
p roof o f the greater usefulness o f the controlling v o ice ; and there
is already m uch reason to draw the conclusion that the results will
be more than surprising.
Thus it is shown that the voice from the Other M ind is an agency
by which, in another person, it reaches the Other M ind. Some in
vestigators have made the attempt to set up the principle that the
Other M ind is a general fund, and n ot identical w ith an individual.
T his is one o f the m ost serious problem s fa cin g students o f psychic
forces to-d a y ; for, if there is a general, all-knowing fu n d o f m ind,
ou t o f which one person draws by chance some fact, and another
draws another fact, then there is an end to the individual at death.
The physical m ind is born in the flesh and with the flesh; and it
fails when the flesh fails, and dies when that perishes. I f you sleep
in the physical body, your physical m ind sleeps too. I f you faint,
that does likew ise; i f you are forced to sleep by a drug, the conscious
m ind goes off to sleep with it. I f the dentist gives you gas to
enable you to feel no pain while he extracts the tooth, that, as well
as your m ind, w ill be insensible to the su fferin g; and not till one
wakes up w ill the other be alive to the pain. O f course they are
one and the same.
T hey die together.

W hat would be the advantage o f all the struggles o f this life if
death, in taking away the body and the conscious m ind, were to
send back the Other M ind to the general fu n d from which it is
draw n ; or if, as some w ould have us believe, the Other M ind is
only a sieve through which we see and know things that come by
accident in to the chamber o f intelligence and there are caught by
the echo they leave behind?
This study, as you perceive, deepens as it progresses, and the
profoundest theme of all is now awaiting our attention in the next
cycle.
TWENTY-SIXTH CYCLE
UR H U M A N brains and bodies

A re but instrum ents
Through which flow
V ast forces, M ysteries
F rom som e hidden so u rce;
Unseen, unending, unknown.
E F O E E entering the final cycle o f this study, we will

introduce a complete section never before put into
an edition o f Other M ind. The lessons in this cycle
are so closely linked up with the whole trend o f this
volume that students w ill be delighted with its inser-
Unseen Powers T hat Control H um an L ife , is the theme
o f this cycle.
A s this brings us to the shores o f a newly discovered world, we
find it necessary to understand what powers are unseen and what
influences are holdin g sway in the sightless air about us. A n un
healthy m ind conjures u p all sorts o f goblins and fea rfu l sp irits; and
the brain can create alm ost everything it fears. A wholesome, sane,
norm al m ind, has no fancies that are m orbid. T o it all things are
clean and free from apprehension. I t is the purpose o f this book
to destroy fear and superstition.
L et us start by studying the follow in g grou p of the unseen powers
and influences that surround life or exist about us som ew here; begin
n in g at the Supreme Being, and dropping step by step from H im , as
we descend.
1. GOD.
2. H E A V E N .
3. R E L IG IO N .
4. I N S P IR A T IO N .
5. G E N IU S .
6. U N I V E R S A L M A G N E T IS M .
7. IN T U I T I O N .
8. IN S T I N C T .
9. S U P E R S T IT IO N .
10. D E M O N S .
tiO L )
There is a livin g God whose presence fills the universe. O f this fact
there is n o doubt. N o person can study psychic telepathy or u n i
versal m agnetism and have any m isgivings as to the existence o f a
living, ever-present Supreme Being. I t is n ot our purpose to enter
into the discussion o f this assertion. There has not been a nation
or people since first the world began, who has not been reaching out
after the D ivine in response to the psychic longings w ithin the human
breast; and that w hich is longed fo r or hoped fo r, exists somewhere.
B u t this line o f argum ent is speculative, and does n ot suit the
methods o f this book. T he poin t we make is that the existence of
God is a generally accepted fact. F urther than this, it is also a
proved fact.
L A W .— God is a m ultiple being.
H e is not a giant o f undue and inharm onious proportions w ith the
rest o f creation ; but is om nipresent by reason o f the fa ct that H is
personality is m ultiple. It m ay occupy every one of the countless
worlds in space. I t may be present in many parts o f the same world,
and so exist without lim itation.
There is no doubt that God is seen and known in all the worlds
o f the universe except the earth.
T he best conception o f H im that is obtainable from any source,
whether religious or psychic, may be had b y a careful analysis o f
the Bible, as fa r as it shows H is character and purposes. I t also dis
closes in w onderful review the many-sided nature o f hum anity in
the m idst o f temptations, doubts and struggles that were titanic.
I t is not possible to obtain a knowledge o f God by the mere use
o f the reasoning faculties. They are born o f physical parentage, and
God is w holly apart from that realm, both as to H is being and H is
mode o f dealing with humanity. Y e t it is true that, as we catch
glimpses o f the psychic through the material realm, so we see the
plan of God at times in the creation about us.
I n the study o f the idea o f sex nature, it is shown that all the uni
verse and all life o f every kind is sexed. G od is the Father, and is so
known. Nature is the M other, and she has always been referred to
by that term. The physical construction o f the universe is the p rod
uct of the union between God and Nature. This M other o f us all is
physical life in all its processes.
I
THE UNSEEN POWERS
L A W .— N ature is a conscious personality knowing hum anity in

its smallest and its greatest needs.
L A W .— The 'product o f N ature is hum anity with its physical and
psychic possibilities.
HEAVEN
F rom the remotest era all peoples have believed in a place of abode
after death; and it is not surprising that their belief was colored
by their grades of civilization. The higher the scale o f intelligence
rose, the nobler became their conception o f heaven. N othin g reflects
better the character o f a people than their views o f the hereafter. As
reason grew apace, some m inds thought that the w ill should be un
chained, and its flights given free wing. T his plunged us in to an
era o f skepticism, using the term in its sense o f relationship to the
prevailing religion.
L ayin g aside all influences that come from such sources, whether
for or against a belief in heaven, we come to the direct proofs fu r
nished by psychic telepathy, universal magnetism, and the efforts o f
the psychic world to break through the ordinary senses.
L A W .— N oth in g is lost, wasted, or in vain.
The sky is fu ll o f worlds. They are called suns because they give out
original light, or light o f their own. E ach sun has planets, as our
own sun h a s; and each planet has satellites, as our earth has. Some
scientists regard space as having no lim it. Some think that all the
sky is inhabited with stars which are parts o f a great mass o f m atter;
and that we are insects craw ling on grains o f sand, o f which the
earth is a very small individual.
T his view is incorrect.
In the use o f the m icroscope we get very close to the atoms which
compose the sunlight, showing the lim it o f creation in that direction.
F rom the atom everything begins.
L A W .— E th er fills all occupied space in the sky.
This atmosphere which is now known everywhere as ether, is
the sunlight that has gone forth as rays, in lines o f atoms. T he sky
is filled with it, as fa r as the sky is occupied. There is a lim ited
number o f worlds, even though they are seemingly countless and
amaze the mathematician by their vastness o f size and endless proces
sion. W here the worlds end, there the ether ends. A ll else is nothing.
L A W .— L igh t is an im pulse that vibrates the eth er throughout
all the occupied realms of the sky.
In the beginning the suns went forth. Then they sent out their
flaming light. This light, finding space unoccupied, took possession
o f it, u ntil all was filled with ether. Since then the impulses o f light
vibrate the ether that occupies space, taking the place o f all is woven
into worlds. T he process o f w orld-building is part o f our higher
system o f training, known as philosophy.
L A W .— A psychic im pulse travels fa ster than a wave o f light.
I t requires but a few minutes fo r an im pulse of light to journey
from the sun to the earth, m ore than ninety m illions o f miles.
L A W .— L ig h t is material.
In fa ct the ether is material, and really physical, but we fa ll partly
in to line with others who assert that it is supernatural, fo r we take
the word itself as the key to the proper term to be applied.
W e call ligh t m aterial, and yet it furnishes the m edium whereby
all ethereal life travels or exists. There is noth in g smaller than an
atom of light. A body o f air is material, yet sound travels on it
by using the mass fo r the purposes of vibration. Sound is not air,
and air need not have any m otion whatever, yet sound moves along its
mass at a rate o f speed that is inconceivable when com pared with any
form o f physical m otion.
L igh t occupies several minutes o f time in com ing a distance o f
ninety m illions o f miles. A ir m ay move at the rate of a hundred miles
an hour or even faster than that, although it keeps w ithin a more
reasonable rate o f speed m ost o f the time. Sound which is the vibra
tion of a body o f air, travels so m uch faster than the gale, or air-
body itself, that it cannot be compared to it. Y e t sound is n ot air.
W e now see that the occupied space o f the sky is filled with worlds
sailing in a sea o f ether, and that this ether is the m edium o f com
m unication from w orld to world, ju st as the ocean enables m an to
have converse with the continents and islands o f earth, and air gives
him the promise o f other triumphs.
T he law tells us that nothing is lost, nothing is wasted, and
nothing is in vain. In fa ct there is no way o f losing anything. The
substance o f the sun goes forth as atom ic matter, but it cannot get
lost, not even i f it strays billions o f miles off. M agnetism holds it
in leash. Every atom must be accounted for, and there are more
billions o f atoms in a drop o f water than you could count in ten
billion centuries, i f you counted a billion every second o f the time.
H ere we have an example o f infinitude.
L A W .— E very world in the shy is the abode o f created beings.
THE UNSEEN POWERS
N othing is lost. N othing is in vain. N othin g is useless.

Every atom has its nse.
A s out of the. abundance of earth each and every particle is
made to serve some useful purpose, so all the worlds in the sky con
tribute to the service o f the Creator and the beings that are subject to
H is rule. The idea of orbs that are dead and dried up, or that have
cooled off and are n o longer useful, is erroneous, as it is contradicted
by every known principle o f creation.
L A W .— B eautiful worlds are the abodes and visiting places o f the
psychic body.
W hat earth is, w ill be seen later in this book.
I t was once supposed that our planet was the center of the sky, that
the sun revolved around it, that the stars were made fo r no other
purpose than to. give light on nights when the m oon was away, and
that heaven was above the earth.
The fa ct is that we are some distance away from the center o f
the universe, but n ot relatively far off. W hat is called the m ilky way
holds the central orbs. B u t the best telescope ever made cannot
peer within its courts.
A s the m icroscope becomes a confused mass when it reaches its
utmost power o f m agnifying, so the telescope gives nothing but a
blur ju st when we think that we can look in upon Mars, the m ost
favored o f all the heavenly bodies fo r our study. T o combat this
difficulty the ingenuity o f inventive m an has conceived the idea o f
taking photographic views o f that planet, and then m agn ifyin g those
views, again photographing, u ntil at last we can see an object on
Mars as b ig as the head o f a pin, and read the facial expression on the
nearest inhabitant. B u t the barrier is purposely placed against
such a discovery.
N o physical invention w ill look upon any star or orb and reveal
the life that dwells there.
I t is a psychic existence.
The study o f the planet Mars discloses canals that change their
shape and conditions tw ice a year, as though beings were w orking
on them. A plausible account o f the purpose involved in such opera
tions makes it look as if there m ight be people there who take ad
vantage o f the peculiar seasons in order to raise vegetation, which
it is claimed appears every summer in the warm portions o f the orb.
B ut the best astronomers refuse to advance such theory and m erely
say that n ot enough is known to warrant the suggestion that there

is any life on Mars.
Other planets are given special seasons and habits, ow ing to their
varying relationship to the sun. One has eternal summer throughout
one great zone, with eternal winter on the extremes. I t is as though
we lived in Canada in an endless January, and others lived in
New Y o rk in an endless June, while others lived in F lorida in an
endless August.
Another planet gives one-half o f itself to constant winter and
another h alf to constant summer. So they change to set u p variety.
N o two are alike, and each has some distinct characteristic that marks
it as specially arranged fo r life on its surface.
The one law o f variety alone gives certainty that a purpose is
involved in the plan o f creation. W hat is true o f one orb is true o f all
the suns and all their planets and attendant globes. Each world is
different from all others.
This variation is intended to bring an endless succession o f glories
to the psychic body when once it is set free from the bondage o f earth.
L A W .— H eaven includes all the universe beyond the earth.
God is an unseen power. There may have been good men who have
looked upon H im or some one o f H is m ultiple personality, but they
are not livin g to-day.
Heaven is an unseen power. I t is not only the places o f abode and
visitation, but the peoples that are there. They exert in some way an
influence over the better part o f human nature on earth.
RELIGION
W ith the first com ing o f human fam ilies on earth, there arose the
question, W hat becomes o f our loved ones when they d ie? T hat in
quiry o f itself is enough to give rise to every religion on the face of
the globe. The desire to live, the dread o f death, and the hope o f
continued existence, make it easy fo r any leader among a people to
fram e the tenets of a religion and find follow ers until something
better is offered.
Death is both mysterious and alarming.
Sadness, grief, the fear o f dark agencies, the high tension o f the
nervous system among the ignorant classes, all make religion a natural
offering from those who are able to take the leadership. Strong men
and all women lean to the hope that religion gives. So pleasing is it
THE UNSEEN POWERS %MI
in the m inds o f certain peoples that death is welcom ed rather than
feared because of the prospect o f greater happiness forthw ith. A n y
m otive that w ill urge one to court death on the prom ise o f happiness
in another world, is a religious disease; fo r it invites suicide, and
suicide is death to the psychic body, and to hope hereafter.
In stinct is one of the unseen powers.
It cannot tell a lie. W hen its m eaning is fu lly understood, what
it has to say in its way is the truth.
There are grades o f instinct running the gamut from the realm
o f the lower animals to that o f the highest genius in man. In all
norm al hearts there is the instinct fo r a true religion. I t is not only
inborn but is a part o f the existence o f the psychic nature in the
human body. Death excites and inspires it among those who survive
and is made an agency fo r just such pu rposes; in the same way that
love inspires and excites the function that reproduces the race.
The one purpose o f any religion is to set the soul free from the
bondage o f earth. T he m ethod by which it sets the soul free is in
m aking it worthy to pass on to other worlds in the sky, and thus to
enter heaven.
H ope is a form o f religious instinct. So is faith. So is the lon g
in g for a life hereafter. So are all the teachings and doctrines that
actually make man stop before he com m its crim e and realize that
there is a God that sees him and that w ill leave him to a dreaded
fate if he goes wrong.
The fu n ction of religion is to destroy the feeling o f security in
w rong doing. W hen any man or woman feels safe in such acts as
are prohibited in the code o f an u pright life, then religion is lacking.
W hen the sense o f security is present because no one is looking, then
there is no religion.
F rom a scientific standpoint the definition o f religion is that it is
the highest ethical instinct in the human heart seeking a code that will
com pel each individual to stop before he com m its crim e, that will
show him the ever-present Eye o f the Creator looking down in to his
heart, that w ill rescue him from the sway o f tem ptation and give him
clear passage to another world if death were to come unannounced.
INSPIRATION
However humble the m ind or heart m ay be, n o person is denied the
power that comes from inspiration. There are several grades o f this
OPERATIONS Z)F THE OTHER MIND
faculty. L ike instinct it appears in the low ly and in the highborn,

in the lesser scale of life and in the greatest ranks of intelligence.
I t often takes the place o f education, as in the case o f Shakespeare.
H ow any lad who had not been taught enough to have given him
qualification to enter the first schools of our day could become master
o f the E nglish language and set the pace fo r the grandest geniuses
to follow through endless generations, is hard to understand.
A person is inspired when he receives help from the psychic world,
no matter whether or not he hears any voice, or sees any visions or
comes in contact with any other b e in g ; it is enough i f he is given
knowledge or power.
L ik e instinct, inspiration w ill n ot mislead or falsify.
W ere it not fo r the facts that are breathed into the m inds o f the
lower animals, all would perish. Birds know when to go south and
when to come north, when to build and where to make their stay.
M any o f the smaller quadrupeds lay by their stock o f fo o d fo r the
winter, and perform deeds that excite the adm iration o f human
bein g s; acts that are n ot told them by their parents, fo r there are
countless cases where the young have been orphaned at birth, and yet
have taken up instinctively the methods that are necessary to sustain
life. A person who has n ot studied the habits o f the animals w ill
be surprised at the m any acts o f a superior intelligence they perform ,
outw itting m an both in skill and cunning. A s th ey have had no one
to teach them, it must fo llo w that they are given knowledge by a
psychic power which fo r convenience is called instinct.
This power does not he.
It is keener than m ost persons believe. The more it is studied the
greater becomes its wonders, and the more respect one has fo r it.
T o the unobservant m ind it is almost nothing. W e recall the case
o f a man o f great intelligence who asked to be advised how to cu lti
vate a belief in some unseen pow er, no m atter what it was, so that
it was g en u in e; and we asked him to make a persistent and exhaus
tive study of instinct in all the uses that he could ascertain. In
other words, to make a lo n g and thorough investigation into its
operations fro m its humblest acts to its greatest.
A t first he hesitated on the ground that the scope was too lim ited
to afford deep study. B ut he started in, and soon was absorbed
in the u n fold in g fields o f labor before him. A cts, deeds, transactions,
wonderful habits and traits, all held him spellbound fo r months.
A t last he wrote us as follow s: “ I find that instinct is indeed an
TEE UNSEEN POWERS
unseen power, and I lift m y hat to it w ith the deepest worship.

N o law of nature can account fo r the specific acts o f high intelligence
that I have m et in m y researches. A t times I have felt sure that
I am putting m y hand in God’ s own hand and being led into a
beh ef in H is personal presence; but I have decided that H e consigns
to other powers each department o f H is government. I w ould like to
publish a book o f instinct by which I m ight tell the w orld the miracles
that it knows nothing about. In closing I wish to say that this power
is not a thing to be theorized over. I t is a fact all the way along.
It is as plain as the sun in the heavens. Its methods are convincing.
T hey prove that we exist in the m idst o f an unseen governm ent, to
deny which is the highest evidence o f an u nfolded m ind. I did
deny it once, and I deserve censure fo r it.”
T he knowledge that instinct furnishes is m ost am azing in its
volume and power. T he things that it tells are draughts from
the psychic world.
E isin g to higher gifts, a new power dawns on the horizon. It is
inspiration. I t is all the tim e knocking at the door o f every life
where it is likely to receive the slightest welcome.
A ll the worthy battles o f the w orld have been planned and won
by the aid o f inspiration.
A ll the deeds that have set on the tide o f progress have had their
origin in this unseen power.
W ithout inspiration everything is ordinary. I t follow s the hum
drum o f a daily physical existence. I t is w ork w ithout reward, when
it is w ork w ithout inspiration.
The inventions o f the w orld were born in inspiration. T he good
deeds, the gifts o f art, o f sculpture, o f painting, o f literature, o f
poetry, of music, o f architecture, and o f all that draws the heart o f
man up nearer to heaven, are conceived in this power known as
inspiration.
A s life in the body is both physical and psychic, it follow s that
the predom inance of one subdues the other, and the subjection o f
one permits the other to have greater sway. I t also follow s that,
when one is neglected, the other w ill seek to take its place.
Exam ples of this tendency are fou n d in the lives o f those men
who have had fra il physical bodies and whose psychic natures have
been m ore active in consequence. H undreds o f cases o f the kind
m ay he summoned at once from the pages o f history. T his shows
& OPERATIONS OF TEE OTEER MIND
a conform ance with the general principle stated, and confirms the
psychic law.
The power known as inspiration can be cultivated to a very high
degree by any person. ISTo m atter how long you have denied admis
sion to your m ind o f this agency from the psychic world, it still
stands at the outer door w aiting fo r recognition. Its knocks will
be fa in t or lou d in proportion as you have given it entrance in the
past. W hether you are in business, or in society, or in a profession,
or at w ork fo r another person, there is opportunity to find aid from
this power.
The psychic w orld is seeking all the while to break through into
your physical life. This is one o f its well known and certain channels.
It- may com e in the fo rm o f a valuable idea. Seize that at once.
Go to some book and write it down. D o n ot wait one minute.
Stop wherever you are, and secure the idea ju st as you received it.
This has been the practice o f the greatest men in the world. W hether
poet, or prose writer, orator, painter, sculptor, painter, architect,
lawyer, doctor, inventor, business man, no m atter in what walk
of life, when an idea o f value comes to you, secure it in black and
white. L ongfellow , the poet, used to leap from his bed and note down
his ideas. The same fa ct has been related o f others so m any times
as to be a by-w ord in the class of great men.
A strange arrangement o f words, a beautifully fram ed thought,
an epigram , a plan fo r im portant achievement, or other visit of this
power should be recognized by being placed on paper where it may
be reviewed from tim e to time. T he thought o f it, the seeing o f it,
and the repeating of it becom e stimulants to the very faculty that
gave birth to the inspiration. The power comes m ore readily the next
time, i f so encouraged. There is but one way to encourage it, and
that is by putting the facts on paper at once, and then keeping them
in m ind from tim e to time.
This m ethod has been advised in our books fo r m ore than a quarter
o f a century, and a few persons have follow ed it w ith stupendous
success. T he result is that the power o f inspiration opens up
the pages o f the books o f knowledge that are closed to all other
human beings. A ll m ay be admitted to the class o f favored people
who receive the rewards o f such knowledge. Y o u can make the
effort in your own life, and you w ill soon witness the presence o f
the power.
F or fear that some reader m ay deem the task too difficult, we
I
THE UNSEEN POWERS
wish to repeat the advice to have pencil and paper at hand at all
times, and when any idea that seems valuable occurs to the m ind,
note it at once. D o n ot depend on the m em ory.
The purpose o f this habit is to set in m otion the process o f this
unseen power. I t w ill do it. A t first the ideas m ay n ot seem strong
or useful. N o matter. K eep up the practice. Eead over from time
to tim e what you have written down. K eep them all in one book,
and get them as near like the first im pression as possible, using
the same words that you first em ployed in thinking o f the idea.
These are nearest to the power itself.
In a few months you should have hundreds o f ideas that seemed
to leap into your life. Y o u w ill en joy reviewing them, and w ill
never tire o f this practice, when once you have got it well started.
D ay by day i f you persevere, the power w ill grow stronger, espe
cially i f you have persisted in it fo r some months. N othin g can be
accomplished in a day.
W e wish you to see fo r yourself what can be achieved in your
life by developing this psychic power. Just fo r the sake o f m aking
the test and pursuing one line of worthy am bition, follow this to
tne greatest end possible. W e know what w ill be the outcom e i f you
stick to it with a dogged w ill. The power w ill grow and you r ideas
w ill become greater and greater until one o f them brings you success
in a degree beyond your fondest dreams. This fa ct is so easily
proved that you should give it a fa ir trial. The test is within your
grasp. I t w ill cost you nothing.
It may be as an inventor that you w ill obtain an enormous fortune.
I t may be in some profession that you w ill achieve success. It may
be in art or literature that fam e w ill be won. I t may be in business
ventures, and they require the aid o f inspiration and inspired ideas
to brin g gigantic results. N o matter how hum ble yon are in life
at the present day, you w ill rise, rise, rise, until you h old the reins
instead o f being driven.
T his fa ct is as certain as that the m orrow ’ s sun w ill rise.
A w riter began nearly forty years ago to pursue the course advised
in this chapter, and he was given the suggestion in private by one
o f the m ost fam ous and m ost successful men that have ever lived
in A m erica who took an interest in him then. H e has not always
obeyed the appeal o f the power when it seemed to knock at the
door o f his life, but to a great extent he follow ed that advice. The
result has been th is: There are times when great facts w ill le<ip
out of the universe upon his pen, and he w ill sit amazed by them,
unw illing to give them place fo r fear he is drawing too boldly on
the unseen fu n d. B ut analysis and study and investigation have
always fou n d these truths to be invincible. H is works are the prod
u ct o f ju st such help, and they have become m ore and m ore proved
as the years have advanced. H e knows that the laws and statements
made in this book are true. Y e t m any o f them are ahead o f the
times. P roofs abundant have hemmed them all in on every side
until thinkers accept them as established facts.
GENIUS
Lesser in degree, but none the less true are the evidences o f power
known as genius. M en and women, some uneducated and others fa v
ored w ith book learning, have been fou n d to be geniuses. The in
spired writer m ay reveal the story o f heaven told to him by angels,
as occurred in the olden times. Or he m ay arise to heights o f
achievement in any line o f life, seizing the thunderbolt and arresting
its course on the mount o f glory, to send it forth in the name o f
progress fo r the earth.
A genius would not write a great poem , but he m ight plan and
execute some piece o f workmanship, or lead the way into new fields
o f discovery.
The m ain difference between the unseen power o f inspiration and
the unseen power o f genius is th is :
Inspiration secures knowledge, while genius executes the work
o f hum anity in a better way than it has ever been done before.
It m ay be courted or cultivated by follow in g the suggestions
and practice o f the preceding chapter.
B u t such suggestions belong rather to the w ork to be done than
to the ideas or principles that underlie that work. T he ability to
make a perfect circle in one sweep o f the brush shows remarkable
genius in an artist, as does the playing o f the piano in such a way
as to cause the notes to sing. The same kind of power makes the
actor a genius, fo r he does not originate the thoughts he utters.
Y e t he m ay achieve greatness by his interpretation.
UNIVERSAL MAGNETISM
H eld together by chains o f unseen power all the worlds o f the
sky are drawn into a com m on fam ily o f relationship. L ook in g at
TEE UNSEEN POWERS
the sun, the m ind that had n ot studied the subject w ould say at
once that it had no con trol over the earth; but, when he learned
that it was m ore than ninety m illions o f miles away, he would feel
sure that it could not be subjected to any influence that came from
so great a distance.
A gain, when he was shown a planet that seemed so small an
ob ject as to have no claim whatever on his attention, and was told
that it was more than a billion miles away from the sun, he would
ridicule the idea o f its being held tightly w ithin the control o f the
great star that centers our system. Sw inging ou t through space,
retracing in their years the same pathway all the while, yet flying
rapidly away from the power that binds them to their orbit, they
find themselves all the time com ing back into subjection.
H ow can this happen?
Gravity is an unseen power. I t is n ot a substance, any more than
sound is a substance. B y gravity the body o f m an is chained to
the earth m uch m ore securely than cords or irons could hold him.
H e cannot defeat gravity, and he m ight cu t the chains and ropes.
B ut what is gravity ?
I t has no existence except in the w ill of the Creator. I t actually
takes hold of nothing. T he planets that are more than a billion
miles away are tied to the su n ; yet they are thrown from the sun
by the opposite power. W hat is there in a planet that can exert
an influence through a distance o f a b illion miles, w ith nothing
but ether between? This unseen power must act on the ether and
through it, as that medium must carry the message and execute the
w ill o f the power ordained.
In ether, which penetrates every solid as easily as it permeates
space, there is the element that holds molecules together in such
a way that some make iron, some gold, some diamonds, some wood,
some water, some air, and others every conceivable shape and sub
stance. In ether is the element that generates electricity. In ether
is the element that executes the lav/ o f gravity. In ether is the
element that executes the law o f magnetism. In ether is the element
that reaches out through infinite space and holds worlds together.
Neptune is as closely bound to the sun as is Venus or M ercury.
T his is the power of magnetism.
As far as ether extends through space, so far does it carry the
influences known as magnetism and telepathy; and it reaches to
all worlds that exist in the sky. N o one can deny that there is
“W * OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND
such a power as gravity or attraction that is exerted fo r m ore than

a b illion m iles in our solar system. This fact is elementary. It
shows in the simplest form one o f the unseen powers that are at
work. Y e t gravity is a division o f magnetism. T he follow in g prin
ciples w ill help to give a clear understanding o f this quality o f the
psychic w orld :
1. W hat is known as magnetism is power.
2. M agnetism is the opposite o f hypnotism.
3. There are tw o classes o f m agnetism : the physical and the psychic,
4. Physical m agnetism includes the power o f action, thought
and feeling.
5. P sychic magnetism is the power that rules all subconscious
existence.
6. I t is by magnetism that growth o f every kind takes place.
7. It is by magnetism that gravity, cohesion, adhesion, and other
forces operate.
8. I t is by magnetism that the earth is held in the solar system,
and yet is kept from rushing to the sun.
9. It is by magnetism that distant influences extend throughout
all the realms o f the sky.
10. Universal magnetism throws its lines to every world in space,
unites the m ost distant orbs with all others, connects every form
o f power with every other, reaches the smallest form s o f life in our
planet and opens to them the powers o f com m unication w ith the
whole universe.
These conditions have always existed. The ability to know them,
to recognize them, to take up the thread o f connection w ith them,
and to use them, is open to every human being.
Personal magnetism is one o f the divisions o f physical power.
I t deals with the influences that are exerted by animal electricity
and its charms over others who come directly under such processes.
I t is the first great training school o f self-control, w ithout which no
person can hope to control others.
N o pow er can be exerted w ithout some m edium through which
to act. I n universal magnetism the m edium is ether, which has
already been described. O f its existence there is ample proof, and
it is accepted as the one great sea in space through which all influences
travel. A ll writers on psychic subjects to-day, whose works are given
standing as reliable, refer to the spiritual body as the psychic body
THE UNSEEN POWERS
or the ethereal body. I t is n ot made o f ether, but employs that agency

as the m edium through which it passes on to other worlds.
It is thus seen that some kin d o f substance is everywhere present.
W ater is more unstable than land, as land is more stable than sand,
and sand than m ud, or m ud than water, or water than air, or air
than gases, and so ether is lighter than gases. U nder this theory,
the whole universe is p h ysical; but science still regards the ethereal
as psychic, and the distinction should be m aintained fo r convenience,
if fo r no other reason.
Personal magnetism is the power of control between m inds and
bodies in their physical relations.
Universal magnetism is the power o f control between psychic
minds in psychic life, in their psychic relations.
Thus it w ill be seen th a t:—
Telepathy is knowledge,
M agnetism is power.
In the functions o f the physical m ind and the physical body,
telepathy has always been more or less a ctive; but it has been found
that personal magnetism, under the highest cultivation, w ill increase
the activity o f the telepathic functions to a degree that borders on
the w onderful. The results are so remarkable and startling that
they amaze the student at every step of progress in these twin
studies.
E very intelligent person knows that there is a physical m ind
and a physical b od y ; a psychic m ind and a psychic life. These p ri
m ary facts being true, it must needs follow that, inasm uch as m ag
netism is power and telepathy knowledge, there should be both power
and knowledge within reach o f the student o f psychic phenomena,
as well as on the physical side. Psychic telepathy is n ot only a new
science, but is the direct result o f the study o f universal magnetism,
and has been made possible only by that system. I n fa ct it was
discovered through that channel o n ly ; and this accounts fo r the
absence hitherto o f any work on psychic telepathy.
Magnetism develops telepathy.
Universal magnetism, being psychic power, develops psychic telep
athy.
INTUITION
L ittle by little the powers com e down the scale in to the busy scenes
o f physical life. T heir duties seem now to be confined to the pur
pose o f helping struggling humanity. W hat is called an education

is supposed to be book learning. The use o f words, the correct way
o f spelling them , the ability to do m athem atical w ork enough to
secure an understanding o f the values o f things, and a few other
branches, more or less useful, make up necessary book learning.
B ut wisdom does not come in that way. N or is any part o f the
book learning o f earth useful in the life beyond. I n other words, the
psychic w orld has no occasion to em ploy grammar, spelling, reading,
arithm etic, or languages. T he best examples o f college training
la v e gone down to the grave carrying in the dead brain all the acquisi
tions o f the university, every part o f which dissolves and m olders
back to the soil.
There is but one genuine education, and that tells us what
man is, whence he came, where he goes, and what duties and lines
o f usefulness in this life are best adapted to his happiness and suc
cess both here and hereafter.
H e should know what his needs here are, what he can best do
and do at his best, what he can accom plish here to make him a
cred it to this w o rld ; fo r as he fits him self to live here m ost nobly,
he at the same time secures citizenship in the universe.
T o lead such a life as that, he must make his earthly existence
a success. H e must meet the counter-efforts o f the thousands whose
interests are ever encroaching on his field o f labor, and on the results
o f his struggles. H e ought to know the motives, the purposes and
the plans o f all men and wom en who can do him a w rong or wrest
from him the fru its o f his work.
There comes into his life a power called intuition, which perform s
the service o f taking him as far as the outskirts o f the motives o f
others. H e can cultivate this facu lty by listening to it, or he m ay
allow it to hover all the while about him w ithout recognition. I t
never speaks so plainly that its voice is absolutely certain. I f it
did, no man would be called upon to exercise his judgm ent and to
weigh both sides o f the im portant questions o f life.
B u t it comes to all men and women.
I t is increased when it is given attention and acted on. I t is
decreased when passion or prejudice holds sway. I n successful
lives it becomes a second nature. H um an nature is read like an
open book, and the plans o f others are all discounted lon g before
they are acted upon. I t is said that wom en have intuition in greater
degree than men because they are not capable o f reasoning. The
TEE UNSEEN POWERS
average wom an runs to the follow in g chain o f argum ent: “ I t must

be so, fo r there cannot be so m uch smoke w ithout some fir e ;” re
ferrin g to the usual subject of conversation, the misdeeds o f others.
A nother fem inine argument is th is: A Bishop acknowledged paying
m oney to keep from the newspapers a b it of scandal that reflected
on his chastity. A wom an claim ed to have knowledge o f his mis
conduct, and he paid her m oney to keep the affair from the press.
W hen this fa ct was known, every fem inine m ind said:: “ I f he was
innocent he never would have paid that money. D o you think that I
would ever pay hush m oney unless I was guilty. N o, a thousand
times no T o test this principle a society with the consent o f the
police in a large city selected at random twenty fam ilies w h o were
approached with absurd charges. A ll were wealthy. A ll were given
the opportunity to buy silence on paym ent o f a certain sum o f m oney,
and to the surprise o f the society, every fam ily decided to pay the
m oney. Y e t not one was guilty. On hearing o f this, the fem inine
m ind w ill reason as fo llo w s : T hey m ust have all been guilty o f som e
thing, or they w ould not have paid hush m oney so readily.'” A n d to
such minds as have weak reasoning powers, conclusions are jum ped at
w ith bounds.
Intuition therefore is a keener facu lty with wom en than with
ordinary men. B ut it is a more dangerous w eapon; fo r m en who
have acquired experience in dealing with human nature are far m ore
able to estimate the reliability o f intuition and possibly to avert
error. A woman o f large experience in the world, cou plin g in tu i
tion with that acquisition, is a form idable individual. Some wives are
better managers than their husbands and bring financial success
in to the fam ily because o f their com bination o f experience and in
tuition.
W e have ju st met a case where a man o f active habits and great
willingness to work, was made a widower when he was fo rty years
o f age. H e had lost his farm by bad management. In a year he
re-m arried. The farm was re-bought w ithout any money, as neither
had a n y; the same routine was re-established; d a iry ; crop s; tra d in g ;
and the hum drum details o f the life in the country. B ut the new w ife
managed the husband. She stopped buying fertilizers. Crim son
clover and lim e were substituted, and the com post from the barn
yard was m ixed with old sod and made into a rich natural loam
by the aid o f deep plow ing. She com pelled her husband to cu lti
vate the soil more deeply and oftener, on the principle that such
m anipulation took the place o f expensive fertilizers 'which plaster

m ortgages all over farms. In three years their fa rm produced twice
the crops per acre o f any land in the county.
H er intuition told her when to sell and not to sell the products.
H er neighbors g o t eighteen cents a pound fo r b u tter; she pu t it in
m olds nicely stamped, and got ten cents more a pound fo r it. They
sold m ilk fo r one and a h a lf cents a quart. She g ot five cents a
quart. N othin g was wasted. I t required n o more work to do things
righ t than in the old ways. E ggs were sold fo r thirty-six cents a
dozen on an average the year r o u n d ; while her neighbors received
less than tw enty-four cents on an average. H ay was marketed at
opportune times, and so were all the crops.
In the fou rth year, after the interest and taxes had been kept
paid prom ptly, they began to reduce the m ortgage which had been
assumed ow ing to the fa ct that the holder o f the security was a deacon
in the church to which the man belonged, and he desired to help
him all he could. In three more years the whole debt had been paid,
and they are now saving m oney, with every prospect o f being well-
to-do some day. I t is all the result o f the intuitive powers o f the
w ife. She is known as smart. M any business men and agents have
tried to pu ll the w ool over her eyes, but she knows them better than
they know her.
M any times we have been asked the question, W hat is the difference
between inspiration and in tu ition ? T he answer m ay be given as
fo llo w s: Inspiration is the power o f revealing to great men and
wom en and to geniuses, the knowledge o f higher realms by which
they are led to fam e and lo fty success. In tu ition is the practical
power that gives help to those who are engaged in the com m onplace
duties o f life.
B ut it has a broader scope under elevating conditions. It has
been the good right hand o f many a person in danger. I n detective
life it is the sole source o f success at crucial mom ents. W e have
volumes o f letters and reports on this subject, and have learned
fro m the lips o f the w orld’ s best detectives o f their constant use of
the intuitive faculty. Pinkerton said that no man can hope to become
a successful detective unless he possesses this gift. Im possible clews
are run down and crim inals caught by the quick leaps o f thought
from the m ind o f the intuitive realm. Could we devote here five
hundred pages to this one subject we could place before the reader
TEE UNSEEN POWERS
the m ost wonderful cases o f that kind that have ever claim ed at
tention.
3STo person denies that there is such a power as intuition.
Some have had the direct help o f this psychic agency and have
been saved from m isfortune or disaster by its aid. B ein g psychic
it is closely allied to the class o f warnings known as prem onitions;
but the latter are suggestive of actual beings at work to help humanity,
while intuition is a power rather than a personality.
Here is a man about to pass a tree as he goes hom e in the early
evening. Just before he reaches the tree, a form comes to him and
a hand points to the other side o f the street. T hat actually occurred.
It was a prem onition. In another case that actually occurred,
a man was approaching a tree under sim ilar circumstances, and some
th in g seemed to tell him that there was a m an concealed behind it.
He crossed the road. In both cases a highwayman stood ready to
strike down the approaching man, and in both cases he was foiled.
B ut the latter case was an example of intuition. The close associa
tion o f the two powers only serves to show their genuineness.
We have had comm unications with people fo r m any years and have
never yet fou n d one m an or woman who did n ot believe in in tu itio n ;
while more than ninety-five per cent, now believe in prem on ition s;
but comparatively few believe in spiritualism.
INSTINCT
D ow n still lower in the scale o f everyday, practical life, comes the
power known as instinct. I t serves the purpose o f directing the action
of the lower form s o f creation. B irds and beasts are all led by its
aid. The new born child is also assisted in some o f its early habits.
Were it not fo r instinct, the lips o f the babe w ould n ot suck its
food , and it would starve. This action is as com plete in all its
details as if it had months o f experience back o f it. Y e t w ithout
so m uch as a first lesson, the child as soon as it is born w ill begin
to take its food like a veteran.
The swallowing action is also taught by instinct. W ithout it
the taking o f food into the stomach w ould be impossible.
A s the child grows older it does not need the aid o f in stin ct; and
this trait is abandoned in its operations, as fast as the im itation
that comes from education or experience is employed.
I f it were true that only the simplest habits in the lower animals
were adopted w ithout training, they m ight be attributed to h eredity;

although heredity is so great a mystery that it may be ascribed to
a power akin to instinct. B ut animals, birds and all form s o f lower
life, are constantly giving fresh evidence o f a source o f knowledge
that cannot be accounted fo r on the theory o f heredity. N o r is it a
blind impulse. There is a power that speaks to the m ind o f the beast
or b ird and conveys specific inform ation in some peculiar way.
H ow does the bee know that the six-sided cell is the m ost eco
n om ical shape fo r saving room and holding the greatest quantity o f
honey? I t is not reasoning, fo r there is nothing on which to base
the. logical process o f thought. It is not im itation, fo r there is no
difference in the habits between bees that are orphaned w ithout hav
in g gathered honey, and those that have been led by older com pan
ions.
H ow do birds know when an early spring or a late spring is com ing ?
T he educated weatherman does not know that. B ut many birds
w in delay their flight to the north in order to await the com ing o f a
belated season; while others w ill start earlier than usual when the
spring is to be premature. Surely this cannot be heredity, nor is it
taught by im itation. There is nothing in the sky or air to lead them
on, fo r the freaks o f the weather rarely deceive the feathered hosts.
There are many reliable works on this su b ject; and they are
w orth reading if any person wishes to study this problem fo r him
self, and form an opinion as to what kin d of power conveys in form a
tion to the lower species o f life.
SUPERSTITION
S till low er we descend into the operations o f life, and come now
to a study o f the influence that enslaves more than ninety-nine
per cent, o f all the inhabitants o f the world. There is no one so
ignorant or so educated that superstition does not taint their daily
existence. In this age of advanced thought more recruits to the
ranks o f the free are being made and we often hear the rem ark:
“ I am not superstitious in the least, but I w ould not sit down to
a table o f thirteen, nor would I begin anything on a Friday.”
Y et such person is sure that superstition is a mere mental fear.
N ot lon g ago we heard a very refined and highly sensible woman
decry against the belief in superstition; but at the dining table she
would n ot pass a dish o f salt from her hand to another person’s
hand. W hy n o t? It would be a sure sign o f a quarrel.
TEE UNSEEN POWERS
This fear m ay not be regarded as a power, but it exerts the fu ll

influence o f a power, and that it stamps it as an evil ruler o f hu
m anity.
A man who had built up a large fortune by his ability and who
repudiated all opinions that leaned toward this power, afterwards
became the m ost superstitious individual we have ever met, and fo r
the follow in g reason: One Christmas day he sat at the table where
thirteen persons were present. Nhxt Christmas all o f them had died
but him self. H e knew this to be the fact, because they were his
personal friends and he was present at their funerals. A fter that
he lived in dread and died in the course o f a few years. I t was
the fear that depressed h im ; and, whether there is any real power in
superstition, it does incalculable harm by instilling fea r in to the mind.
M any ocean vessels w ill n ot start on F riday fo r their voyages;
their officers may not be superstitious, but they say the in ju ry is done
to the service by the dread which sailors w ould have o f setting sail
on that day. One captain remarked to u s : “ W hy if we had a storm
or danger arose in any form , the sailors who had left port on a
F riday w ould be useless. T hey w ould feel sure o f the com ing disas
ter and w ould become cowards.”
W ithout exception it is true that the low er the grade o f in telli
gence in the human m ind the m ore it is swayed by superstition.
In the A frican fam ilies there is constant fear o f this power, and
it does m ore than anything else to keep them ignorant and debased.
A m on g negro servants this same slavery o f the m ind is m any times
more abject than am ong the educated classes o f the same race. T heir
employers have fou n d it necessary to yield to their superstitious
dread when they would n ot take one w ord or look o f im pudence
from them.
A book would be required to contain all the catalogue o f supersti
tions that prevail am ong the educated white classes. Y o u n g women
have the most abundant vocabulary in this respect. W hen they
are grow n up and get some hard knocks in the world o f experience,
they drop a few score signs from the list. I t is beautiful phase
o f human nature to hear the mature wom an o f sense describe the
follies o f believing in this power, and then give her friends a con
stant stream o f evidence to the contrary, explaining each exception
by sayin g: “ It is a pet idea of m ine not to do this or that, but
it has noth in g to do with superstition.”
The fu ll measure o f this power is seen only when the nervous
system is throw n into a cataleptic fear by which self-hypnotism is

induced. I f you are weighted down by dread o f any kind, you
w ill do a great in ju ry to your nerves and m ind. Out o f this fear
came the influences known as w itchcraft. I f a shrewd man or woman
knew o f any person who had become a slave to superstitious fear,
a control of a very serious nature could be secured, and thus it
opened up a special kind o f hypnotism.
Physicians who have made investigations along this line have
come to the conclusion that w itchcraft did in fact exist. The age
in which history charges it with m ost offenses was peculiarly an
age of great superstitious fear. Some persons had over one thou
sand signs o f evil, so many in fact that it was impossible to turn
to the right or the left w ithout invoking the spirits of demons, aa
they thought.
A dded to this was the mental darkness o f the age in which they
lived, and the crim inal tendencies of the masses in Europe or the
heavy religious melancholy o f the Puritans in A m erica, all o f which
destroyed the normal power o f the nervous system.
I f you w ill note the effect o f a nervous person alone in an old
house at m idnight, with strange noises in the room above and the
cellar below, you have a condition that gives rise to the presence
o f spirits, so-called. Self-hypnotism enters into the scene and creates
sights and sounds at the w ill o f the frightened m ind. I f in that
lonely house where you are sitting in the dark at m idnight, you have
the corpse o f a dead man in the a d join in g room , you can get an
idea of the age which gave birth to witchcraft.
T he dem on-world is pregnant with such progeny.
Superstition is the basis o f ignorance. N o t the kind o f ign o
rance that is indicated by the inability to read and write, but the
denser kind that has an incoherent idea o f the duties and needs of
life on this earth. E ducated people are superstitious. Geniuses
are enslaved by this power. Every actor is likewise weighted down.
Nearly all business men are superstitious. Bankers have the same
weakness, showing that a keen m oney-m aking m ind is n ot free from
ignorance.
W hoever allows this power to influence them is sure to be hindered
in their duties, fo r the latter must o f necessity give way to the inter'
ference o f this agency. W hen a boat is ready to sail on Friday,
it should leave port, and not lose a day. W hen there are thirteen
at a table, whether to dine or do business., there is some loss some
THE UNSEEN POWERS
where i f the fu n ction is delayed or broken up. These are but ex
amples. The grand total o f notions or signs embraced in the whole
category o f the superstitious realm is so large that it would take a
book to properly classify and describe them.
THE DEMONS
One more descent in the scale o f the unseen powers and we come
to the lowest realm of all. H ere are the demons. In the m aking of
the many w onderful and beautiful worlds in the imiverse, with
freedom o f will in every created being, some m ust fa ll, and there
must be some place to which they fall. I t is the opinion among
the best minds o f to-day that writers who are not directly inspired
by the Supreme B eing may nevertheless receive inspired thoughts
as stated in an earlier chapter of this division.
A m on g such writers are men like M ilton.
In his Paradise L ost he depicts the fa ll o f the lost angels or beings,
givin g vivid accounts of their lon g descent through space, and their
apparent endless fa llin g headlong to the nether regions. So much
potency o f description cannot be the im agination o f a mere physical
m ind. The very essence of a motive in that sublime poem is the
dropping out of heaven o f beings that m ight have inherited eternal
bliss but fo r the fact that they have been allowed to choose their
fates fo r themselves, just as you and all others have been given free
dom o f choice.
In the same character o f description the Bible confirm s the story
o f the fa llin g o f the beings out o f heaven. I n fa ct that book o f
books cannot be interpreted in any other meaning. It w ill n ot do
to ascribe to everything sacred an allegorical meaning, although that
is an easy way in which to dispose o f the otherwise unsolvable prob
lems o f the Scriptures. W here the trope is, in the accounts of the
fall of man and the fallen angels we have never yet been able to
discover.
Such a work as the In fern o o f Dante has more or less of the
semi-inspiration o f M ilton in it. I t reflects some degree o f psychic
power. In it we are taught that there was a fall, and the nether
regions are crudely depicted in the midst o f a chaos o f description
that is more poetical than coherent. B ut there is the central idea
in it that cannot be shaken by all these shortcomings.
No person can go very far in the study o f psj^chic telepathy with
out finding out the facts and laws that are set forth in the pages
o f this work that follow .
L A W .— Earth is hell.
T o what extent this statement m ay shock the m ind o f the reader
it is not possible to conceive. N o one has ever pretended that earth
is heaven. M ost students o f crim inology have already com e to the
conclusion that earth is hell. B ut crimes and crim inals alone cannot
make a hell of any planet.
L A W .— A ll created beings have been endowed with the freedom
to choose their own fates and destined careers.
This law is so well recognized that it need not be discussed.
The Creator could not associate with H im self any form o f life
that was not free. I f one being in a m illion were to become rebellious,
the percentage would be hardly a m arring influence on the state
o f absolute p erfe ctio n ; yet one in a m illion would, in the aggregate,
produce a total o f hundreds o f m illions or billions perhaps in the
entire universe.
Whether the fa ll was com pleted in one era, or is now in progress,
cannot affect the principle in volved; although it is supposed that
it occurred at one period only. Scientists agree that hum anity
is the acme o f im perfection, ju d ged by any standard; that it is as
diabolical in nature as any creatures can be and not totally annihi
late each other. In fact, from the beginning o f time, the ch ief aim
o f man seems to have been to slay his fellow beings, and to add to
the doom of death all the torture that can be invented in the dia
bolical genius o f the human heart.
There has never been an age of honesty or peace.
The present time seems to us the best in all the history o f the
world, and it is fu ll to the brim and running over with dishonesty,
cruelty and evil. In all parts of the world, but more especially in
the civilized countries, crime and wickedness o f every description
are on the rapid increase. Beports of investigators, in cluding heads
of police, say that in the past fifteen years there has been an alarm
in g increase in the number o f all grades o f crim e and all kinds of
penal offenses.
The tortures that were practiced in all ages down to the most
recent date in the leading countries, and that are practiced now
in ninety per cent, o f the world, have put Satan to the blush if
the sacred accounts are to be taken fo r their face value. Diabolical,
cruel, barbarous, fiendish and terribly demoniacal are the inventions
THE UNSEEN POWERS
that man has pu t into practice with the one idea o f m aking his
fellow beings suffer the most excruciating agony prolonged through
as great a period of time as possible. Iso government has been ex
empt from this condition. N o creed has not been stained by its
guilt. In fa ct more people, more brave men, more helpless women
and innocent children have been burned alive, or racked, or broken
on the wheel, or pinched day after day with red hot irons, or other
wise m utilated by orders of the church than by the state in the coun
tries that boast o f the greatest civilization. T o m urder m et the
penalty o f hanging, a painless death. B ut to have an opinion, a
mere breath of the m ind, was m et by the most devilish tortures
that human ingenuity could conjure up.
It has been said that the age of such conditions has passed fo r
ever. This is not true. Men have been burned alive in the U nited
States; some at the stake, some in houses fo r purposes o f robbery, and
some for revenge. Only recently a band o f men forced three men,
two women, and five children into a house, piled up faggots about it,
and set it on fire. In the old times the victim at the stake was
quickly relieved fro m consciousness by the smoke and flam es; but
in a house where the inmates must fly from room to room as the hot
flames creep upon them, the death is slow and torturing. The hu
man heart is as hard now as ever, but the power o f police suppres
sion is greater.
A t a m ilitary college a young man was taken from his room at
m idnight, stripped o f all his clothing, and carried to a river, the
ice broken, and the poor fellow forced to stay under water u ntil un
conscious and nearly dead from the flooding of his lungs. On being
taken out, he was revived, and the same treatment given him again
and again. F rom a rugged and vigorous constitution, he was made
so ill that he fell away and in a short time died. H is name was
W illiam Jarvis and the hazing took place at W est P oin t, the na
tional m ilitary school. This you ng man was the personal friend
and associate of the author in his you ng manhood, and he related
these experiences in person.
In one o f the AVestern States, a young man was hazed by being
tied to a tree and then burned slowly. The fire made more rapid
progress than was expected; and the boy, after suffering the m ost
excruciating tortures by slow burning, died.
These are merely sample eases. T hey are equalled on every hand
by the disposition to torture with the most fiendish cruelty the pupils
who attend, institutions o f learning. A college president said : “ I

do n ot like to say it, but I think that more g ood w ill come from
letting the pu blic know the opinion of a m an in m y position than to
keep silence, when I assert that there are many students who, if
given freedom to haze their fellow s, would revive all the tortures o f
the dark ages. The demon spirit is only dorm ant in the human breast
in this age o f advanced m orality.”
I n a leading magazine, a very able article on Chicago stated that
the im mense numbers o f diabolical crim inals of every grade from
cutthroats up to runners and managers o f houses o f prostitution and
p olitically supported saloons, where crimes were nightly enacted with
out fear o f punishment, proved beyond all doubt that hum anity to
day is ju st as savage and ju st as fiendish as in the blackest period
of Eom an history when wom en and children were fed to fam ished
w ild beasts in the arena fo r the amusement o f the assembled thousands.
Surely a ju st God never made such beings as these. E ither the
inhabitants o f this planet are freshly created at birth by the hand
o f the G od o f Love, or they are the product o f the demons. As
the earth is seeking always to blossom into beauty and kindliness,
through its flowers, its adornment, its color, its exquisite dress and
rich emblems o f peace and sweetest tenderness, and through the
noble characters that rise from the debris o f its wickedness, there
can be no doubt that G od fives.
This being true, there can be no reason to believe that the devilish
beings that infest this globe are H is direct work. In fa ct they are
the product o f their own past.
L A W .— T he earth is the dumping ground o f the universe.
I f the beings that dwell on this planet were created by the Supreme
B eing in ju st the moral condition in which they now exist, then that
Creator is not God. I f they were once brought in to life pure and
perfect, endowed w ith the power to choose their own fate, and have
rebelled against the governm ent o f heaven, they are n o longer fit
to remain in an abode o f peace and love. T hey must o f necessity fall.
I f they are allowed to remain where they fa ll, their presence must
always be a source o f pain and suffering to those who see them. It
is n ot righ t that any part o f a happy w orld should be devoted to the
incarceration o f demons, as fallen beings are called. It certainly
would be a w rong to set off in each orb in the sky, a place where
these demons could dwell.
L A W .— A soul once created is im mortal.
THE UNSEEN POWERS
As these demon souls must live on forever, it would be an injustice

to inflict them on other beings who had been loyal to God. As
they are im m ortal, they would then remain in those world-prisons
forever. In such prisons they would be deprived of the power to
free themselves. A s they are all psychic beings the question of
transit to one specific world is o f no importance.
The whole universe may be traversed.
It was decreed that one orb alone should bold all the demon spirits
o f the universe, and they were sent to this earth.
In order to m aintain their own independence they were allowed
to run as w ild as they chose, and given fo o d and drink with oppor
tunities to clothe and shelter themselves as best they could.
L A W .— The earth began as a rejected rock world, and has evolved
its own progress until it was fit fo r the physical existence of the
demons.
H ardship after hardship has been placed in the path o f man from
the beginning o f time. The rock has been cold on this globe for
about one hundred m illion years. Man began life here about one
hundred thousand years ago, and it is probable that the beings fell
from their rank in the universe at that time.
Days and nights, weeks, months and years are nothing in the
psychic world. W hether it requires an aeon or a m illion centuries,
is of no importance. H um anity m ight occupy a hundred thousand
years in evolving from rock to physical life, and it would pass as
instantaneous creation. Therefore it is im material whether man
was directly given life on earth, or came to his present stage by the
processes o f improvement.
L A W .— Physical life is the union o f m atter with the soul.
When the beings fell out of heaven they could not appear as physi
cal beings until the rock o f this planet had been m olded into shape
to receive them. Many changes were required. There must be
pliable matter capable o f living, o f which the plant was the first
type, containing sap which was the forerunner o f blood, leaves which
were the forerunner of the lungs, and roots which were the fo re
runner o f the stomach having digestive powers.
Then food was essential before man took bodily shape, and this
was brought about by the operations o f nature such as rain, frost
and the flow of waters, to wear away the rock, reduce it to sand
and afterward m ingle it with decay in order to produce loam , out
o f which man would be able to secure bis food. A ll that he eats of
whatever nature, comes from such loam , even i f he takes the flesh
o f anim al life as. part o f his diet.
T o accomplish all these changes required m any thousands o f years.
In time the material of the earth was fit to be united with the soul
o f a demon, and man appeared. The proofs furnished by geology
and other sources, show conclusively that every grade o f prehistoric
man was a d em on ; and there could have been no exception to that
rule. A fter hum anity had occupied this globe fo r many centuries,
all the while in the form o f savages, which are the basest o f the
human demons, the better spirits o f peace and love sought to find
scope in which to develop, and religion, inspiration and hope o f
im m ortality began to find room in the breast o f mankind.
Every statement in this chapter is a fact.
I t is an absolute, provable fact. It is verified beyond all doubt
by the uses and practice o f psychic telepathy; but, in addition thereto,
it is proved by every w riting on the subject that has ever been issued.
It is proved by every science that touches the subject, by every
form o f religion, by every substantiated belief, and by the conditions
o f the earth and its people, past and present. It is being proved
here and now day and night, year in and year out. I t is in harmony
with all the problem s that stand before the m ind. I t explains
every phenomena o f every kind. W ithout it there is a hopeless
tangle in the philosophies o f the world.
The laws and statements, therefore, that have thus far been made
must be accepted as the only truths that bear on this great theme.
They are proved with absolute certainty up to the present moment.

The Final Chapter - Hamilton Miller

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Final Chapter - Hamilton Miller

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TWELFTH CYCLE

O T until the exercises of the Eleventh Cycle have

processes that are goin g on th ere; in other words, it is the ability

In learning how to abstract the m ind the m ost favorable times

HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND ^

the hum an m in d in the present era. I t is possible fo r every man

smooth respiration is to lift the hand to a height w ith the mouth,

are troubled with sleeplessness. The best light lunch is a bowl of

A DEEP, DAEK, BLACK

There are fo u r sections to the thinking brain, and they are to

into oblivion. The sensation soon becomes like that o f a fa ll in a

DEEP— DARK— BLACK

B y this practice we have recently saved several persons, three

Six years ago, follow in g a plan that we have always used o f

poor form o f telepathy, and it has no practical uses. I t is also

any person who has practiced it often. I t is known as the fa d in g

E E 'P E R A N D D E E P E R we plunge into the profound

lost fo r lack o f means to transfer them to the fields o f human use­

called a wandering of the mind in a normal way. The disconnected

prior to utterance by another o f an idea that was spoken, it was to be

F ir s t.— The interval is the empty condition o f the mind.

2. T o bring the Other M ind upon the arena in such a manner

A ll the mistakes o f earthly ventures have been made in that turning

This is the experience of countless thousands of people.

A teacher was explaining some rather dull matters to the class,

In the Sixth Degree it is proved that the Other M ind is always

THE TURNING POINTS

PITFALLS OF THE MIND

A V IN G conclusive proofs o f the occurrence of the in ­

man who has no m agnet in a home to attract him to its d o o r s ! A nd

gar, approached a man o f wealth, and tried to interest him in some

A young man, having a mother whom he loved and fo r whom he

“ W hat did he have in his left h a n d ?”

room of the Directors’ meeting, to the present day, and then to

I am sure I saw the ghost o f m y brother standing before me here

husband to have it destroyed on the promise that he was to wake

S T H E R E are tw o sides to every operation o f the Other

and learned m en in various ways, there is ever com ing an increasing

2. W hen you seek to draw knowledge from the minds o f those

first, and what a slow process it was to make them flexible. B n t

based on the power that is naturally lodged in the feelings, which

German, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Greek, Japanese, Chinese, or other

2. T he way the Other M ind acts in the first development.

One evening, before he had settled in a new boarding place, he was

One evening, before he had settled in a new boarding place, he was

o f com plications that were understood only by him self. So the

is undoubtedly a fact. I know nothing one way or the other about

it was unknown to him. H e wrote down the names o f the signs

o f sleeping. T hen conies the deliberate attempt to break in upon

second must have a counterpart, and this is not always available.

idle waste o f minutes and hours, in which nothing is gained fo r

N ow it is a fa ct that you have no such ambition, and you do

com e to you, and it w ill be a great flood o f light, measured wholly

istence o f two m inds, fo r Dickens him self in his working thoughts

were largely guided by intuition o f which they were the master­

ITCH has been written o f thought transference, and very

much truth there is in the spoken or written words, is an educa­

of late. T he third was soured by her failure to succeed in her am­

his visit. As a large building was standing in place o f the cottage

E nough is now known o f the operations o f the Other M in d to

3.— In an interesting case like the foregoing, a man who held a

been im possible fo r a stranger to have fou n d the way to it. Then

test fo r the gain it m ight bring to science. T he society abroad

of inquiry w ithout the knowledge o f her husband, and fou n d that

lost fo r lack o f means to transfer them to the fields o f human use

A V IN G conclusive proofs o f the occurrence of the in

were largely guided by intuition o f which they were the master

much truth there is in the spoken or written words, is an educa

of late. T he third was soured by her failure to succeed in her am

people. I learned to decide slowly and correctly. I thought care

Cycle. Every human being possesses intelligence, power, knowl

fo r me. W ith the m ore efficient corps o f assistants I have pro

fo r me. W ith the more efficient corps o f assistants I have pro

S H A S been frequently stated, this is an age o f hypno